Actix

www.actix.com

Version 3.9

Radioplan User Guide

www.actix.com

Documentation Version: UG-v3.9, April 2008 Software Version: Actix Radioplan v3.9 The content of this manual is provided for information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Actix. Actix assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that appear in this documentation. Copyright © 2001–2008 by Actix GmbH. All rights reserved. Trademark Notice Radioplan is a registered trademark of Actix GmbH in the European Union. Actix and the Actix logo are trademarks of Actix Ltd. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, MS Access, MS Query, and MS Excel are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield Software Corporation. UNIX is a trademark of X/Open Company Ltd. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Java is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. ESRI is a trademark or registered trademark of the Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI), Inc. Panasonic is a registered trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. CDMA2000 is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA-USA) in the United States. Oracle is a registered trademark of the Oracle Corporation. All other product or brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Contact: Actix GmbH Actix Ltd Altmarkt 10 200, Hammersmith Road D-01067 Dresden Hammersmith Germany London, W6 7DL tel.: +49 (0) 351 404 29 – 0 United Kingdom fax: +49 (0) 351 404 29 – 50 www.actix.com e-mail: [email protected] www.actix.com

www.actix.com

Contents

1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................13 1.1 RADIOPLAN .................................................................................................13

1.1.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................13 1.1.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................13

1.2 MEASUREMENT MODULE...................................................................................14 1.2.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................14 1.2.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................14

1.3 DYNAMIC/SNAPSHOT UTRA/FDD RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM SIMULATOR (WINES)..............15 1.3.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................15 1.3.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................15

1.4 AUTOMATIC CELL PLANNING (ACP) .....................................................................16 1.4.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................16 1.4.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................17

1.5 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY PLANNING (AFP)..............................................................17 1.6 AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR LIST PLANNING (ANP) ........................................................17 1.7 AUTOMATIC RRM PARAMETER OPTIMIZATION (APO) .................................................18 1.8 CAPITAL PLANNING ........................................................................................18 1.9 DATA INTEGRITY TO PRIOR VERSIONS...................................................................18 1.10 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................18 1.11 OUTLINE OF THIS USER GUIDE .........................................................................18 1.12 SUPPORT ..................................................................................................19

2 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................21 2.1 SETTING UP THE RADIOPLAN WORKING ENVIRONMENT ...............................................21

2.1.1 Radioplan Software Package .................................................................21 2.1.2 Radioplan Installation Process ...............................................................21

2.2 CUSTOMIZATION OF THE RADIOPLAN INSTALLATION ...................................................22 2.3 LICENSE MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................22

2.3.1 Hardware Dongles ...............................................................................22 2.3.1.1 Single Computer License......................................................................23 2.3.1.2 Floating License Management ...............................................................23 2.3.1.3 Remote Update Procedure for a Hardware Dongle....................................23

2.3.2 Software License Files..........................................................................24 2.3.2.1 Registering Radioplan..........................................................................25 2.3.2.2 License Transfer .................................................................................25

3 RADIOPLAN INTRODUCTION ........................................................................27 3.1 COORDINATE SYSTEM .....................................................................................28

3.1.1 Geographical and Cartesian Coordinate Systems......................................28 3.1.2 Euclidian Cartesian Coordinate Systems used in Radioplan ........................30

3.2 MENU BAR ..................................................................................................31 3.3 TOOLBARS...................................................................................................32 3.4 LAYER CONCEPT ............................................................................................32

3.4.1 Configuration Data Layers ....................................................................33 3.4.2 Measurement Data Layers ....................................................................40 3.4.3 Result Data Layers ..............................................................................40 3.4.4 Optimization Data Layers .....................................................................40 3.4.5 Image Layers .....................................................................................40

Actix Radioplan User Guide 4

www.actix.com

3.4.6 Post-Processing Layers.........................................................................41 3.4.7 Graphics Layers ..................................................................................41 3.4.8 Cell Visuals.........................................................................................41 3.4.9 Working with Layers ............................................................................41 3.4.10 Locking Layers ..................................................................................45 3.4.11 Converting Vector into Raster Layers....................................................46 3.4.12 Import/Export of Layers .....................................................................47

3.5 PERSONAL WORKSPACE ...................................................................................47 3.5.1 Workspace Handling ............................................................................47

3.5.1.1 Importing a Workspace........................................................................48 3.5.1.2 Exporting a Workspace ........................................................................49 3.5.1.3 Resetting the Workspace to Default Settings...........................................49 3.5.1.4 Handling of Legend Presets ..................................................................49 3.5.1.5 Managing Layer Templates...................................................................49

3.5.2 General Application Settings .................................................................50 3.5.3 Display Settings ..................................................................................52 3.5.4 Layer Settings ....................................................................................54 3.5.5 Color Palette.......................................................................................57

3.5.5.1 Inspecting the Color Palette of a Layer...................................................58 3.5.5.2 Creating a Transition Color Palette ........................................................60 3.5.5.3 Using Legend Presets ..........................................................................60 3.5.5.4 Import and Export of Legend Presets .....................................................61

3.6 PAINT MODULE FOR GRAPHICS LAYERS..................................................................61 3.6.1 Creating a Graphics Layer.....................................................................61 3.6.2 Drawing in a Graphics Layer .................................................................62

3.6.2.1 Drawing Settings ................................................................................62 3.6.2.2 Drawing a Line ...................................................................................63 3.6.2.3 Drawing a Polygon ..............................................................................63 3.6.2.4 Inserting Text ....................................................................................63

3.6.3 Deleting Graphics Layers ......................................................................64 3.7 TREE WINDOW .............................................................................................64 3.8 VIEWING AREA .............................................................................................64 3.9 ZOOM FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................65 3.10 MESSAGE WINDOW AND STATUS BAR .................................................................65 3.11 ONLINE HELP .............................................................................................66

4 GETTING STARTED WITH RADIOPLAN .............................................................67 4.1 SETTING UP A DEMO PROJECT............................................................................67 4.2 RAN CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................68

4.2.1 First Site ............................................................................................68 4.2.1.1 Network Controller Configuration ..........................................................70 4.2.1.2 Site Configuration...............................................................................70 4.2.1.3 Antenna Import..................................................................................71 4.2.1.4 Cell Configuration ...............................................................................71

4.2.2 Second Site ........................................................................................73 4.2.3 Pathloss of the Cells ............................................................................73

4.3 USER CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................75 4.3.1 Equipment Profile ................................................................................75 4.3.2 Mobility Profile ....................................................................................76 4.3.3 Service Profile.....................................................................................76 4.3.4 Traffic................................................................................................76 4.3.5 UE Profile ...........................................................................................78

4.4 ENVIRONMENT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................78 4.4.1 Streets ..............................................................................................79


www.actix.com

4.5 NEXT STEPS ................................................................................................80

5 PROJECT HANDLING .................................................................................81 5.1 GENERAL PROJECT SETUP .................................................................................81

5.1.1 Project Folders....................................................................................81 5.1.2 Project Actions....................................................................................82

5.2 MULTI-LAYER/MULTI-TECHNOLOGY PROJECTS .........................................................83 5.2.1 Network Layer Management..................................................................83 5.2.2 Multi-Layer Project Structure ................................................................84 5.2.3 Duplicating a Network Layer .................................................................85 5.2.4 Applying Network Configurations from other Network Layers .....................85

5.3 USER RIGHTS MANAGEMENT..............................................................................86 5.4 CREATING A NEW PROJECT ...............................................................................87

5.4.1 Library Integration ..............................................................................87 5.5 PROJECT DATA IMPORT....................................................................................87

5.5.1 Importing a Project from an RNP Tool.....................................................87 5.5.2 Importing Network Configuration Data from the OSS................................88 5.5.3 Importing a Project from another Radioplan Database ..............................88 5.5.4 Loading Configuration Data in Radioplan Format ......................................89 5.5.5 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Import ................................................................90

5.6 WORKING WITH EXISTING PROJECTS ....................................................................90 5.6.1 Duplicating a Project............................................................................90 5.6.2 Using the Project Maintenance Wizard ....................................................91 5.6.3 Merging Projects .................................................................................93

5.7 PROJECT DATABASE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................94 5.7.1 Project Update ....................................................................................94 5.7.2 Complete Project Update of the Database ...............................................95 5.7.3 List of Projects in the Database .............................................................96 5.7.4 Project Statistics .................................................................................96 5.7.5 Direct Comparison Between Project Configurations...................................96

5.8 PROJECT DATA EXPORT....................................................................................98 5.8.1 Backward Synchronization of an RNP Project from Radioplan .....................98 5.8.2 Saving a Project into Files.....................................................................98 5.8.3 Actix CellRefs Export............................................................................99 5.8.4 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Export ................................................................99 5.8.5 Configuration Item Export ....................................................................99

5.9 MANAGING NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA IN A PROJECT .......................................... 100 5.9.1 Structure of Network Performance Data................................................ 100 5.9.2 Network Performance Data Import....................................................... 100 5.9.3 Deleting Network Performance Data..................................................... 100

5.10 DELETING AN EXISTING PROJECT..................................................................... 101 5.11 HANDLING OF MASTER/SUB-PROJECTS.............................................................. 101

5.11.1 Deriving Sub-Projects from a Master Project ........................................ 101 5.11.2 Working with Sub-Projects ................................................................ 102 5.11.3 Synchronizing a Sub-Project with its Master Project.............................. 102 5.11.4 Deleting a Sub-Project ..................................................................... 103

6 MULTI-LAYER PROJECT CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 105 6.1 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 105 6.2 PROJECT SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 106 6.3 AREA MANAGEMENT...................................................................................... 107

6.3.1 Rules for the Shape of Areas............................................................... 108


www.actix.com

6.3.2 Simulation Area ................................................................................ 109 6.3.2.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Simulation Area ......................................109

6.3.3 Analysis Area.................................................................................... 110 6.3.3.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Analysis Area..........................................110

6.3.4 Working with Area Polygons................................................................ 110 6.3.4.1 Importing an Area ............................................................................110 6.3.4.2 Exporting an Area.............................................................................111 6.3.4.3 Duplicating an Area...........................................................................111 6.3.4.4 Inspecting Area Polygon Settings ........................................................111 6.3.4.5 Drawing an Area (Sub-) Polygon .........................................................112 6.3.4.6 Editing an Area (Sub-) Polygon ...........................................................113 6.3.4.7 Controlling the Visibility of Areas.........................................................114 6.3.4.8 Deleting an Area (Sub-) Polygon .........................................................114

6.4 CONFIGURATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................... 114 6.4.1 Clutter............................................................................................. 114

6.4.1.1 Clutter Matrix Format ........................................................................115 6.4.1.2 Defining Clutter Classes.....................................................................115 6.4.1.3 Importing a Clutter Matrix..................................................................118 6.4.1.4 Exporting a Clutter Matrix ..................................................................119 6.4.1.5 Viewing a Clutter Matrix.....................................................................119 6.4.1.6 Defining a New Clutter Matrix .............................................................121 6.4.1.7 Creating a Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers.........................................122 6.4.1.8 Deleting a Clutter Matrix....................................................................123

6.4.2 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) ............................................................. 124 6.4.2.1 DEM Matrix Format ...........................................................................124 6.4.2.2 Importing a DEM Matrix.....................................................................124 6.4.2.3 Exporting a DEM Matrix .....................................................................125 6.4.2.4 Viewing a DEM Matrix........................................................................125 6.4.2.5 Deleting a DEM Matrix .......................................................................126

6.4.3 Streets (for Simulation Only) .............................................................. 126 6.4.3.1 Inspecting Street Data ......................................................................126 6.4.3.2 Importing Streets .............................................................................127 6.4.3.3 Drawing Streets ...............................................................................127 6.4.3.4 Deleting Streets ...............................................................................129

6.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE RAN .......................................................................... 129 6.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 129 6.5.2 Network Controller ............................................................................ 130

6.5.2.1 Creating the Network Controller..........................................................130 6.5.2.2 Network Controller Settings................................................................130 6.5.2.3 Exporting the Network Controller ........................................................130 6.5.2.4 Deleting the Network Controller ..........................................................130

6.5.3 Site................................................................................................. 131 6.5.3.1 Creating a Site .................................................................................131 6.5.3.2 Exporting a Site................................................................................131 6.5.3.3 Duplicating a Site .............................................................................131 6.5.3.4 Moving a Site ...................................................................................132 6.5.3.5 Access to Site Settings ......................................................................132 6.5.3.6 General Site Settings ........................................................................132 6.5.3.7 Additional Site Status Info .................................................................134 6.5.3.8 Site Settings Overview ......................................................................134 6.5.3.9 Finding a Site...................................................................................136 6.5.3.10 Controlling Sites’ Visibility ..................................................................137 6.5.3.11 Deleting a Site .................................................................................137

6.5.4 Cell ................................................................................................. 137 6.5.4.1 Creating a Cell .................................................................................138 6.5.4.2 Exporting a Cell ................................................................................138 6.5.4.3 Access to Cell Settings.......................................................................138 6.5.4.4 General Cell Settings.........................................................................139


www.actix.com

6.5.4.5 Cell Custom Parameters.....................................................................141 6.5.4.6 Cell Settings Overview.......................................................................141 6.5.4.7 Transmitter Settings Overview............................................................143 6.5.4.8 Finding a Cell ...................................................................................144 6.5.4.9 Active Flag of Cells and Transmitters ...................................................144 6.5.4.10 Duplicating and Dragging a Cell ..........................................................145 6.5.4.11 Deleting a Cell..................................................................................145

6.5.5 Repeater.......................................................................................... 145 6.5.5.1 Adding a Repeater ............................................................................146 6.5.5.2 Access to Repeater Settings ...............................................................146 6.5.5.3 General Repeater Settings .................................................................146 6.5.5.4 Repeater Settings Overview ...............................................................148 6.5.5.5 Switching Repeaters On/Off ...............................................................148 6.5.5.6 Dragging a Repeater .........................................................................149 6.5.5.7 Deleting a Repeater ..........................................................................149

6.5.6 Additional Antenna ............................................................................ 149 6.5.6.1 Adding an Additional Antenna at a Cell.................................................149 6.5.6.2 Access to Additional Antenna Settings..................................................150 6.5.6.3 General Settings of an Additional Antenna ............................................150 6.5.6.4 Additional Antenna Settings Overview..................................................152 6.5.6.5 Switching Additional Antennas On/Off ..................................................152 6.5.6.6 Deleting an Additional Antenna ...........................................................153

6.5.7 Neighbor Lists................................................................................... 153 6.5.8 Pathloss Matrix ................................................................................. 154

6.5.8.1 Importing a Pathloss Matrix................................................................154 6.5.8.2 Pathloss Matrix Format ......................................................................155 6.5.8.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Pathloss Matrix..........................................155 6.5.8.4 Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview.......................................................156 6.5.8.5 Viewing Pathloss Plots .......................................................................157 6.5.8.6 Editing a Pathloss Matrix....................................................................157 6.5.8.7 Duplicating and Dragging Pathloss Matrices ..........................................158 6.5.8.8 Deleting a Pathloss Matrix..................................................................159 6.5.8.9 Working with Tuned Pathloss Matrices .................................................159

6.5.9 Antenna........................................................................................... 160 6.5.9.1 Importing an Antenna .......................................................................161 6.5.9.2 Exporting an Antenna........................................................................162 6.5.9.3 Duplicating an Antenna......................................................................162 6.5.9.4 Inspecting the Antenna Configuration Data...........................................162 6.5.9.5 Viewing the Antenna Diagram.............................................................164 6.5.9.6 Deleting an Antenna..........................................................................165

6.6 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR............................................................. 165 6.6.1 Assembling a UE Profile...................................................................... 166

6.6.1.1 Importing a UE Profile .......................................................................166 6.6.1.2 Adding a New UE Profile ....................................................................167 6.6.1.3 Inspecting the UE Profile Configuration Data .........................................167 6.6.1.4 UE Profile Settings Overview ..............................................................168 6.6.1.5 Duplicating a UE Profile .....................................................................169 6.6.1.6 Deleting a UE Profile .........................................................................169

6.6.2 Equipment Profile .............................................................................. 169 6.6.2.1 Importing an Equipment Profile...........................................................169 6.6.2.2 Exporting an Equipment Profile ...........................................................170 6.6.2.3 General Equipment Profile Settings......................................................170 6.6.2.4 Duplicating an Equipment Profile.........................................................171 6.6.2.5 Deleting an Equipment Profile.............................................................171

6.6.3 Mobility Profile .................................................................................. 172 6.6.3.1 Importing a Mobility Profile ................................................................173 6.6.3.2 Exporting a Mobility Profile.................................................................173 6.6.3.3 Inspecting the Mobility Profile Configuration Data ..................................173


www.actix.com

6.6.3.4 Duplicating a Mobility Profile...............................................................174 6.6.3.5 Deleting a Mobility Profile...................................................................174

6.6.4 Service Profile................................................................................... 174 6.6.4.1 Modeling Services .............................................................................175 6.6.4.2 Importing a Service Profile .................................................................177 6.6.4.3 Exporting a Service Profile .................................................................177 6.6.4.4 General Service Profile Settings ..........................................................177 6.6.4.5 Physical Layer Parameters .................................................................179 6.6.4.6 Packet Data Settings .........................................................................180 6.6.4.7 Traffic Model Configuration.................................................................182 6.6.4.8 Duplicating a Service Profile ...............................................................191 6.6.4.9 Deleting a Service Profile ...................................................................191

6.6.5 Creating Generic User Profiles ............................................................. 192 6.6.6 Traffic Matrix .................................................................................... 192

6.6.6.1 Importing a Traffic Matrix ..................................................................193 6.6.6.2 Traffic Matrix Format.........................................................................193 6.6.6.3 Exporting a Traffic Matrix...................................................................194 6.6.6.4 Inspecting the Settings of a Traffic Matrix.............................................194 6.6.6.5 Viewing a Traffic Matrix .....................................................................194 6.6.6.6 Defining a New Traffic Matrix..............................................................195 6.6.6.7 Creating a Traffic Matrix from a Surface Plot Layer ................................196 6.6.6.8 Duplicating and Dragging a Traffic Matrix .............................................200 6.6.6.9 Deleting a Traffic Matrix.....................................................................200

6.6.7 Revenue Matrix................................................................................. 201 6.6.7.1 Importing a Revenue Matrix ...............................................................201 6.6.7.2 Revenue Matrix Format......................................................................201 6.6.7.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Revenue Matrix .........................................201 6.6.7.4 Viewing a Revenue Matrix ..................................................................202 6.6.7.5 Creating a Revenue Matrix from a Traffic Matrix ....................................202 6.6.7.6 Duplicating and Dragging a Revenue Matrix ..........................................202 6.6.7.7 Deleting a Revenue Matrix .................................................................203

7 UTRAN CONFIGURATION ......................................................................... 205 7.1 RNC CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 205

7.1.1 General RNC Settings......................................................................... 206 7.1.2 Power Control Related Configuration .................................................... 207 7.1.3 Radio Bearer Control Configuration ...................................................... 209 7.1.4 Common Channels Configuration ......................................................... 210 7.1.5 Global Handover Configuration ............................................................ 212 7.1.6 Compressed Mode Configuration.......................................................... 215

7.2 NODE B CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 217 7.2.1 OTSR Configuration ........................................................................... 217 7.2.2 Node B Hardware Configuration........................................................... 219 7.2.3 Node B Connection Configuration......................................................... 220

7.3 UMTS CELL CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 221 7.3.1 UMTS Resources Configuration ............................................................ 222 7.3.2 HSDPA Cell Configuration ................................................................... 224 7.3.3 HSUPA Cell Configuration ................................................................... 226 7.3.4 Handover and Cell Selection Parameter Settings .................................... 228 7.3.5 Load Control Configuration ................................................................. 229 7.3.6 Scrambling Code List Handling ............................................................ 231

7.4 UMTS REPEATER CONFIGURATION .................................................................... 231 7.4.1 UMTS Resources Configuration for Repeaters ........................................ 231

7.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR............................................................. 232


www.actix.com

8 CDMA2000 RAN CONFIGURATION............................................................. 233 8.1 RNC CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 233 8.2 CDMA2000 BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 233 8.3 CDMA2000 CELL CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 233

8.3.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration..................................................... 233 8.3.2 Scrambling Code List Handling ............................................................ 235

8.4 CDMA2000 REPEATER CONFIGURATION ............................................................. 235 8.4.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration for Repeaters ................................. 235


9 GSM RAN CONFIGURATION...................................................................... 237 9.1 BSC CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 237 9.2 GSM BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ................................................................ 237 9.3 GSM CELL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................ 237

9.3.1 GSM Resources Configuration.............................................................. 237 9.3.2 GSM Transmitters Configuration .......................................................... 238

9.4 GSM REPEATER CONFIGURATION ...................................................................... 239 9.4.1 GSM Resources Configuration for Repeaters .......................................... 239


10 IDEN RAN CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 241 10.1 NETWORK CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 241 10.2 IDEN BASE STATION CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 241 10.3 IDEN CELL CONFIGURATION.......................................................................... 241

10.3.1 iDEN Resources Configuration ........................................................... 241 10.3.2 iDEN Transmitters Configuration ........................................................ 242

10.4 IDEN REPEATER CONFIGURATION.................................................................... 243 10.4.1 iDEN Resources Configuration for Repeaters ........................................ 243

10.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR........................................................... 244

11 WIMAX RAN CONFIGURATION ................................................................ 245 11.1 NETWORK CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 245 11.2 WIMAX BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 245 11.3 WIMAX CELL CONFIGURATION....................................................................... 245

11.3.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration......................................................... 245 11.4 WIMAX REPEATER CONFIGURATION................................................................. 246

11.4.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration for Repeaters ..................................... 246 11.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR........................................................... 247

12 NETWORK DATA EVALUATION .................................................................. 249 12.1 NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA MANAGEMENT...................................................... 249 12.2 BINARY FILE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND DEFAULT PARAMETER IMPORT SETTINGS ......... 250 12.3 CONCEPT OF RESULT ANALYSIS....................................................................... 250 12.4 ANALYZING RESULT PARAMETERS .................................................................... 253

12.4.1 Analysis Capabilities of Result Parameters ........................................... 254 12.4.2 Results Selection Dialog ................................................................... 255

12.4.2.1 Result Filter .....................................................................................256 12.4.2.2 Surface Plots....................................................................................258 12.4.2.3 Chart Graphs ...................................................................................260 12.4.2.4 Histograms ......................................................................................262 12.4.2.5 Spatial and Temporal Restrictions .......................................................262


www.actix.com

12.5 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH SURFACE PLOTS .......................................................... 263 12.5.1 Result Surface Plot Layers................................................................. 264 12.5.2 Identifying a Certain Data Item for Trouble Shooting ............................ 265 12.5.3 Manipulating a Surface Plot Layer ...................................................... 266 12.5.4 Coinciding Surface Plot Layers ........................................................... 267 12.5.5 Deriving Histograms from Surface Plots .............................................. 271 12.5.6 Extracting Tables from Surface Plots and Cell Visuals ............................ 272 12.5.7 Cell Statistics from a Layer ............................................................... 272 12.5.8 Clutter Statistics from a Layer ........................................................... 274 12.5.9 Discrete Value Layers....................................................................... 275 12.5.10 Layer Slide Show ........................................................................... 275 12.5.11 Printing Surface Plots ..................................................................... 276

12.6 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH CHARTS (PLOTS OVER TIME) ........................................... 277 12.6.1 Creating a Chart Graph .................................................................... 278 12.6.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Chart Graphs..................................... 278 12.6.3 Creating a Table from a Graph........................................................... 279 12.6.4 Customization of Charts ................................................................... 280 12.6.5 Printing a Chart Graph ..................................................................... 280

12.7 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH HISTOGRAMS ............................................................. 281 12.7.1 Creating a Histogram ....................................................................... 282 12.7.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Histograms ....................................... 283 12.7.3 Creating a Table from a Histogram..................................................... 283 12.7.4 Customization of Histograms............................................................. 283 12.7.5 Threshold Evaluation Methods in Histograms ....................................... 284 12.7.6 Printing a Histogram ........................................................................ 286

12.8 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH TABLES .................................................................... 287 12.8.1 Creating a Table.............................................................................. 287 12.8.2 Data Import into Tables.................................................................... 288 12.8.3 Data Export from Tables ................................................................... 288 12.8.4 Saving a Table/Report in the Project .................................................. 289 12.8.5 Embedded Clipboard ........................................................................ 289 12.8.6 Statistical Data Evaluation in Tables ................................................... 290 12.8.7 Transforming Table Data into Graphical Presentations........................... 291

12.8.7.1 Creating a Surface Plot from Table Data...............................................292 12.8.7.2 Creating a Mapped Surface Plot or Cell Visual from Table Data ................292

12.8.8 Converting Table Data into a Result Set .............................................. 293 12.8.9 Customization of Tables.................................................................... 296 12.8.10 Printing a Table ............................................................................. 297

12.9 NETWORK KPI ANALYSIS.............................................................................. 297 12.9.1 UMTS KPI Analysis........................................................................... 297 12.9.2 CDMA2000 KPI Analysis.................................................................... 300 12.9.3 GSM KPI Analysis ............................................................................ 301 12.9.4 KPI Analysis with Measurements........................................................ 303 12.9.5 UMTS Combined RSCP and Ec/I0 Analysis ............................................ 304

12.10 TRAFFIC MATRIX GENERATION ...................................................................... 306 12.10.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................. 306 12.10.2 Traffic Matrix Generation................................................................. 307

12.11 INTERFERENCE MATRIX GENERATION .............................................................. 310 12.11.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................. 311 12.11.2 Create an Interference Matrix Result Set ........................................... 312 12.11.3 Interference Matrix Result Set ......................................................... 312 12.11.4 Export an Interference Matrix .......................................................... 313 12.11.5 Customizing the Interference Matrix Generation ................................. 314

12.12 RESULT SET AGGREGATION ......................................................................... 314


www.actix.com

13 APPENDIX ......................................................................................... 317 13.1 NETWORK CONFIGURATION DATA SPECIFICATION ................................................. 317

13.1.1 Directory Structure of the Network Configuration Files .......................... 317 13.1.2 Network Configuration File Format ..................................................... 317

13.2 WINDOW CONTROLS REFERENCE..................................................................... 318 13.2.1 Menus............................................................................................ 318 13.2.2 Toolbars......................................................................................... 325 13.2.3 Additional Table Grid Settings............................................................ 327

13.3 LIBRARY OVERVIEW .................................................................................... 328 13.4 EXAMPLES OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 329

13.4.1 Demo Project .................................................................................. 329 13.4.2 Dresden City Example ...................................................................... 330

13.5 SUPPORTED RASTER DATA FILE FORMATS........................................................... 332 13.5.1 TIFF / Geo TIFF Format .................................................................... 332

13.5.1.1 ESRI World File Format......................................................................332 13.5.2 BIL File Format................................................................................ 332 13.5.3 Arc/Info Raster Formats ................................................................... 332

13.5.3.1 Arc/Info ASCII Interchange Format .....................................................332 13.5.3.2 Arc/Info Binary Grid Format ...............................................................332

13.5.4 EOSAT Fast Format.......................................................................... 333 13.5.5 Erdas Imagine Format...................................................................... 333 13.5.6 GIF File Format ............................................................................... 333 13.5.7 Grid eXchange File Format ................................................................ 333 13.5.8 Hierarchical Data Format (Release 4) ................................................. 333 13.5.9 Japanese DEM Format ...................................................................... 333 13.5.10 JPEG File Format............................................................................ 333 13.5.11 Atlantis MFF Raster File Format........................................................ 334 13.5.12 PCI Labeled Raw Format ................................................................. 334 13.5.13 Portable Network Graphics .............................................................. 334 13.5.14 USGS DOQ Format......................................................................... 334 13.5.15 USGS SDTS DEM Format................................................................. 334 13.5.16 X11 Pixmap Format........................................................................ 334 13.5.17 ERMapper Compress Wavelets Format .............................................. 334

13.6 SUPPORTED VECTOR DATA FILE FORMATS .......................................................... 335 13.6.1 Shape File Format ........................................................................... 335 13.6.2 MapInfo File Format ......................................................................... 335 13.6.3 Arc/Info Binary Coverage File Format ................................................. 335 13.6.4 Planet ASCII Vector Format............................................................... 336 13.6.5 Asset Vector Binary Format............................................................... 336

14 ABBREVIATIONS .................................................................................. 337

15 REFERENCES ...................................................................................... 341

16 INDEX.............................................................................................. 345


www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 13

www.actix.com

1 Overview

1.1 Radioplan Radioplan is a comprehensive system for planning, deployment, and operation support of mobile radio networks. It functions as the central framework to guide the user throughout the network planning and deployment workflows. This platform collects and manages all network related data, and realizes the pertinent data synchronization with other databases and applications. Its hierarchical database structure and complete GIS functionality enable a convenient usage and an efficient analysis of the network settings and behavior, Fig. 1-1.

Radioplan

Cell/Antenna optimization

Site selection

Data Verification

Automating workflow steps

Measurement Module

Automatic Cell Planning

Pathloss Tuning

Traffic matrix generation

Interference matrix gener.

Customer Engine...

Capital planning

...

Dyn. Network Simulator

QoS Network Validation

Traffic Mgmt. Policies

Aut. NeighborList Planning

Neighbor list generation

Neighbor list optimization

Fig. 1-1 Radioplan

Several modules are embedded into the platform for different, partly interacting tasks. The present product is targeted at systems like UMTS (UTRA/FDD), CDMA2000, GSM, iDEN, or WiMAX, and comprises a variety of functional modules. These modules are briefly introduced in the subsequent sections.

An overview of the Radioplan system architecture can be found in [R-Admin].

1.1.1 Values and Benefits Radioplan is the perfect solution to

• accelerate and secure the development and introduction of mobile networks and wireless services,

• cope with the increasing network complexity and thus reduce the operational effort,

• cut down costs in engineering and planning due to more reliable and quicker data provision, and to

• increase network revenues and subscribers' satisfaction by delivering and securing maximal network capacity and high Quality of Service.

1.1.2 Functional Overview Attributed to its framework character, Radioplan supports the workflows and procedures in radio network planning, deployment, optimization, and operation. In order to fulfil its purpose, it comprises the following features:

• complete representation and storage of large area network and environment data

• automated synchronization of network planning data with other RNP tools


www.actix.com

• comprehensive interfaces for data exchange and platform integration

• tuning and verification of network planning data with measurements

• unified data evaluation system for planning and measurement data

• fully GIS enabled for numerous Cartesian/geographic coordinate systems and geographic data formats

• rich analysis and visualization functions with diverse data presentation opportunities

• database with user rights management for multiple users

1.2 Measurement Module The Measurement Module is one embedded module of Radioplan. It efficiently supports the network deployment and optimization workflows.

1.2.1 Values and Benefits

• comfortable drive test solution for UMTS/FDD

• open interfaces for a large variety of drive test systems across various network technologies

• direct connection and synchronization of measured data with a network planning database

• direct competition analysis between different networks

1.2.2 Functional Overview The complete network performance measurement solution consists of several components that are shown in Fig. 1-2. These components interact via the indicated interfaces.

Vendor specific

Measurement Software

Radioplan

MeasurementModule

MeasurementDevice

GPS Receiver

Filter 1

Filter 2

Filter 3

...

measurement data import

Fig. 1-2 Network performance measurement system

The Radioplan Measurement Module supports two different operation modes which are indicated by the numbers (1) and (2) in the above Figure:

• Measurement analysis mode (1): Measurement data can be imported from all major commercially available drive test systems. These data can be analyzed using the variety of data evaluation opportunities of Radioplan. Furthermore, special plots and a measurement summary report can be generated to efficiently extract the


www.actix.com

main network performance indicators out of the recorded data. Planning data can be adjusted and calibrated by means of the measurement data incl. pathloss tuning.

• Drive test mode (2): For directly taking live measurements from the network, the Panasonic W-CDMA Area Analyzer with a dedicated measurement software Mcollect is supported. The measurement status can be observed online in different diagram windows (presenting certain measurement parameters) and in a map that automatically follows the current position using an autopad function. All measurement results are stored during the drive test. The drive test mode is only available for UMTS/FDD.

More detailed information about the Radioplan Measurement Module can be found in [R-Meas].

1.3 Dynamic/Snapshot UTRA/FDD Radio Network System Simulator (WiNeS) The UTRA/FDD network simulator is one embedded module of Radioplan. It supports both the network planning and rollout phase as well as the network optimization.

1.3.1 Values and Benefits Radioplan WiNeS comprises both a snapshot and a dynamic network simulator. In particular the dynamic network simulator can be applied for numerous tasks that make it an excellent solution for 3G network rollout and operation, for example to

• find out and define rules for an optimal network rollout,

• determine the realistic capacity limits under dynamic conditions,

• minimize the number of dropped services to increase subscriber satisfaction,

• maximize the throughput by improving parameter settings under dynamic conditions,

• support optimization tasks, e.g. by imitating trouble regions with different traffic and mobility scenarios,

• configuring the RRM for hierarchical cell layers and multiple frequencies,

• secure decisions concerning service level agreements.

1.3.2 Functional Overview The UTRA/FDD Wireless Network System Simulator comprises many outstanding features that are founded in its superior hybrid technology that unifies the dynamic and snapshot network simulation approaches. A selection of them with regard to mainly the dynamic network simulator is given below. The Radioplan WiNeS simulator architecture is depicted in Fig. 1-3.


www.actix.com

WiNeSSimulator

Topography

Technology &Network Setup

User ProfilesUser Behavior

Monitor

Radioplan

Fig. 1-3 Wireless Network System Simulator Architecture

• The WiNeS Simulator imitates the real radio access network behavior dynamically at system level. This means that a whole radio access network topology (or a representative part of it) with many concurrent users is modeled on a frame based approach with 10 ms resolution.

• The WiNeS Simulator allows to assess the impact of a multi-service UMTS network. Mixed traffic scenarios with both circuit-switched and packet-switched services can be investigated.

• The WiNeS Simulator supports multiple Transport Channel types thus offering the whole flexibility of the UTRA/FDD air interface.

• The WiNeS Simulator comprises a detailed modeling of Radio Resource Management (RRM) algorithms. It was especially designed for investigating the precise impact of these algorithms on the network behavior.

• The WiNeS Simulator enables the study of both uplink and downlink. Especially in UMTS, there are significant differences between these link directions.

• The WiNeS Simulator offers different ways of result reporting (monitoring): The opportunities range from comprehensive data monitoring and statistical analysis to individual link tracing.

More detailed information about the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator Module can be found in [R-Sim], [R-TecRef], [R-Snapshot], and [R-API].

1.4 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) is a functional module of Radioplan. It enables a very fast and accurate network optimization.

1.4.1 Values and Benefits

• cut down operational and capital expenditures significantly

• increase data service revenues and maintain QoS without investments in new sites

• reduce the time to market for new network setups and new services significantly

• evolve the network in a controlled manner in alignment with the marketing traffic forecast

• ensure a leading edge position regarding network quality and capacity against competing networks


www.actix.com

1.4.2 Functional Overview Network optimization is the process of steadily improving the network setup from the planning stage up to the live optimization of the running network. The principle of network optimization as implemented in Radioplan is visualized in Fig. 1-4. The key characteristics of the Radioplan ACP are given below.

reconfigurationof the

network setup

DEM map clutter map

objectivefunction

network setup pathloss maps

pre-analysisQoS

validation

constraints

traffic maps

Simulations orMeasurements

(optional)


(optional)

High-speed iterative process

reconfigurationof the

network setup

DEM map clutter map

objectivefunction

network setup pathloss maps

pre-analysisQoS

validation

constraints

traffic maps


(optional)


(optional)

High-speed iterative process

Fig. 1-4 Network optimization process supported by the Radioplan ACP

• optimization target: reduce interference between cells and create dominant cell areas; balance traffic load between cells while reducing peak traffic

• reconfigurable parameters: antenna tilt (mechanical or -remote- electrical), antenna azimuth, antenna type, antenna height, and cell transmission power

• optimization algorithms for capacity optimization (maintaining coverage level), coverage optimization, site selection, and site integration

• very fast: optimizes larger clusters (more than 100 cells) within a few minutes

• very reliable: can be tuned with live network measurements in conjunction with the Measurement Module

More detailed information about the Radioplan ACP Module can be found in [R-ACP].

1.5 Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) Relying on the Actix Cellopt AFP technology, Radioplan contains a miniAFP Module that allows to automatically optimize the frequency plan and other 2G related cell configurations. All the usual platform functions including the visualization of AFP related aspects are possible.

More detailed information about the miniAFP Module can be found in [miniAFP].

1.6 Automatic Neighbor List Planning (ANP) Neighbor List Planning is another functional module of Radioplan. It allows to automatically create and update neighbor relations between cells based on planning data and measurements. Of particular interest are neighbor relations between cells of different network layers and/or different technologies.

More detailed information about the Radioplan Automatic Neighbor List Planning Module can be found in [R-ANP].


www.actix.com

1.7 Automatic RRM Parameter Optimization (APO) Automatic Parameter Optimization embraces all aspects of network optimization that exceed the purely physical parameter set of Automatic Cell Planning or the resource assignment parameters of Automatic Frequency Planning. Radioplan contains a module for tuning different parameters of the RRM.

1.8 Capital Planning Capital planning allows the user to prioritize the implementation of cell and site modifications. The prioritization can be configured using different interference scenarios and is also dependent on the traffic assignment in order to give the most reliable plan for implementation.

1.9 Data Integrity to Prior Versions With the implementation of new features, also new configuration parameters are steadily introduced. However, the configuration data format is fully downward compatible, i.e. one can work with older configuration data without changes since all new parameters are set to according default values. The required database update of your existing data will be conducted automatically when Radioplan is started for the first time with a new version. The database update will not corrupt your existing data in any way. Also, new and renamed result parameters are treated in a way that full data integrity is guaranteed.

1.10 System Requirements The general system requirements for running Radioplan in different environments can be found in [R-Admin].

The WiNeS simulator as part of Radioplan is written in Java. The following system prerequisites are required for this module:

• Java JRE 1.5 or higher

• at least 1 GB RAM; large network configurations may require more memory

• at least 200 MB hard disk space (10 GB recommended)

• at least 1.0 GHz microprocessor clock speed recommended

• CD-ROM drive (for installation)

1.11 Outline of this User Guide This user guide describes the usage of Radioplan. Radioplan comprises all general functionality for network data representation, analysis, and synchronization. In addition, various seamlessly integrated modules are available that are targeted on certain application scenarios in a real mobile radio access network.

After an introduction to the basic principles of the mentioned modules and their interaction in this chapter, the following chapter 2 gives instructions on the installation of the system. The actual description of Radioplan is presented in chapters 3 (general usage), 4 (Getting Started), 5 (project handling), 6 to 11 (project configuration), and 12 (data evaluation). The user guide is concluded with the appendix containing some reference manuals.


www.actix.com

1.12 Support Comprehensive product support is available at the following contact points:

Main support web portal: www.myactix.com

Main support email contact: [email protected]

Regional contact Americas:

• Email: [email protected]

• Support direct number: +1 703 707 4779

• Support US toll free: +1 8777 72 ACTIX

• Fax: +1 703 707 4778

• Actix switchboard: +1 703 707 4777

Regional contact Asia Pacific:


• Support direct number: +65 6333 7469

• Fax: +65 6333 5540

Regional contact EMEA:


• Support direct number: +44 20 8735 6303

• Fax: +44 20 8735 6301

• Actix switchboard: +44 20 8735 6300

Direct Actix Radioplan product support:


• Support direct number: +49 351 404 29 20

• Fax: +49 351 404 29 50


www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 21

www.actix.com

2 Installation

2.1 Setting Up the Radioplan Working Environment

2.1.1 Radioplan Software Package The Radioplan application comprises

• the AO Platform, a client-server application that manages all configuration data and results,

• optionally certain modules of Radioplan that are enabled depending on license flags

• user manuals (this and other documents, see references) incl. an on-line help function,

• a library with building blocks for radio network configurations, and

• several example projects.

2.1.2 Radioplan Installation Process This section describes the normal installation procedure for Radioplan on a single computer. If floating licenses in a computer network shall be used, please consider the additional information in section 2.3.

Radioplan can generally be installed on a stand-alone computer or in a Citrix environment. In the first case, the software is installed comparable to any other Windows application. The InstallShield installer software is used for the setup process. Any previous Radioplan installation of a different version is not removed by this setup process. Thus, side-by-side installations of different releases are supported.

Important Notice for Hardware Dongle Usage

If the Radioplan installation is delivered with a hardware dongle, make sure that any of the dongles is not inserted before the entire installation procedure has been finished! This will ensure that the USB port driver for the hardware dongle is installed correctly before the dongle is inserted for the first time.

The installation of the driver for the hardware dongle requires administrator rights on the computer. Make sure that you have those rights when Radioplan is installed with hardware dongle support.

To install the software on a stand-alone computer (Windows 2000/XP platform), insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The setup program is automatically started. The Windows Installer is configured and the setup procedure is started. Then just follow the instructions on the screen.

If no other path is specified the default Radioplan installation folder %ApplicationPath% is:

c:\program files\Actix\Radioplan\<Radioplan-version>\ .

More information about the installation in different environments can be found in [R-Admin].


www.actix.com

Important Notice for the WiNeS Network Simulator

The WiNeS Network Simulator requires a Java Runtime Environment, release 1.5 or higher. Since most of the computers have already installed an up-to-date JDK or a JRE, the Java Runtime Environment is not installed by InstallShield. If necessary, it must be done separately.

The original JRE by Sun Microsystems is available on the installation CD-ROM in the directory \jre\ as additional setup executable.

In order to uninstall the Radioplan software, to install any other feature, or to repair the installation, just run the setup program again.

2.2 Customization of the Radioplan Installation There are several *.ini files that contain application parameters and, thus, enable a customization of Radioplan. Normally such settings are configured only during the installation process. However, if necessary they could also be adjusted at any given time.

All *.ini files are located in the Radioplan configuration folder %APPDATA%, which is (for Radioplan version 3.8 and higher) by default:

c:\documents and settings\all users\application data\actix\radioplan\<Radioplan-version>\configuration

[R-Admin] gives more explanations on the most important of those initialization files.

Further information can also be found in the module-specific manuals: [R-ACP] [R-ANP] [R-Meas] [R-Sim].

2.3 License Management Radioplan has a built-in software protection function to avoid illegal copies of registered products. Two different options can be used: either hardware dongles or software license files. In the case of hardware dongles, also floating licenses can be supported.

The end-user-relevant options are explained in the following sections.

More information on license management can be found in [R-Admin].

2.3.1 Hardware Dongles Radioplan can be delivered with hardware dongle protection by MARX Datentechnik GmbH. These security devices can be plugged into the USB port of a computer. They support the following two options:

• Single License: The Radioplan software can only be used on that computer where the hardware dongle is inserted.

• Floating License: A single hardware dongle controls the software usage in a computer network. The Radioplan software can be used concurrently on any computer in the network up to the number of purchased floating licenses.

Important Notice for Installation

Make sure that the hardware dongle is not inserted into the USB port before the entire installation procedure has been finished! This will ensure that the USB port driver for the dongle is installed correctly before it is inserted into the computer for the first time.


www.actix.com

2.3.1.1 Single Computer License

When using a hardware dongle for a single computer license, the dongle must be inserted into the USB port of that computer where Radioplan is used. So in this case, the number of purchased Radioplan licenses is equal to the number of hardware dongles shipped.

As long as Radioplan is running, the dongle should be kept inserted. Should the dongle become dislodged while calculations are being performed (e.g. an optimization), the calculations will continue and the user will be prompted to reconnect to the license at a later time.

In order to use a hardware dongle for license control on a single computer, make sure to have the following settings in the license.ini file, which is located in the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]):

[License] License = 0 Port = "USB" Server = "USB"

2.3.1.2 Floating License Management

The installation and administration of the floating license manager is described in [R-Admin].

2.3.1.3 Remote Update Procedure for a Hardware Dongle

If Radioplan is protected by a hardware dongle and all the necessary license information is retrieved from this USB hardware security device. When a customer licenses e.g. additional software modules– also for a limited time period – these modules can be activated remotely by reprogramming the hardware dongle. This section describes how the license information can be updated at the end user’s side without sending the USB dongle to Actix.

First, the customer generates a transaction file for the currently connected hardware dongle. This file must be sent to Actix, and in return an activation file is submitted to the end user. Using this activation file, the customer can update the respective hardware dongle, as schematically depicted in Fig. 2-1.

Fig. 2-1 General procedure of the hardware key update process

The necessary steps for creating a transaction key and updating the hardware security device using an activation code provided by Actix is described in detail in the following.


www.actix.com

The transaction necessary to start a license update can be generated with the utility rupdate.exe. This application was installed together with Radioplan and can be found in the %ApplicationPath%\licensing\RUpdate subdirectory, see also [R-Admin]. The application window of the Remote Update utility is shown in in Fig. 2-2.

Fig. 2-2 Remote update utility used for hardware dongle reprogramming

A transaction key is created by executing the New Transaction button. If successful, a new transaction key is shown in the upper field. This key can be exported to a file with the Export button. This transaction key is also stored onto the hardware dongle. Thus, it is only possible to create a new transaction key, if no transaction was initialized before or if the last transaction was already completed. However, it is still possible to overwrite a previously created transaction key which cancels the transaction started before. If an open transaction is detected, a warning appears and the user has the choice to cancel this open transaction.

Then, please send the following information via email to [email protected] or via the portal www.myactix.com:

• the serial number of the dongle (as found on the little badge attached on the dongle) and

• the transaction key file TrKey.rfp.

In return, the customer will receive a file that comprises the updated hardware dongle information, namely an activation code (default: ActCode.rfp). This file must be imported into the Remote Update utility by using the Import button. Finally, the update procedure executed by pressing the Update button will reprogram your hardware dongle.

Note that only that hardware dongle can be updated that the transaction key was created for. It is not possible to reprogram other hardware dongles using the submitted activation code.

2.3.2 Software License Files The alternative to hardware dongles is license files. In this case, all license information is stored in a file (wineslicense.lf) which is delivered on a separate diskette. Please, copy the license file into the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]) before you start Radioplan for the first time.

The license file must be saved before Radioplan is removed, reinstalled or an update is installed.

The license file mechanism distinguishes two states of the license. Initially, the license is in a locked status where the application can be executed a maximum of 30 times. During this period, the customer must contact our support in order to unlock the license, refer to the next Section for further details. Once the license has been unlocked, the application is bound to the hardware of a specific workstation. It is possible to transfer a registered license from one PC to another PC.


www.actix.com

When using a license file, it must be ensured that the following settings are valid in the license.ini file:

[License] License = 2

This file is located in the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]).

2.3.2.1 Registering Radioplan

It is necessary to unlock the Radioplan license for normal use. Without doing so, Radioplan can be executed a maximum of 30 times. Within this period, the customer must contact our technical support via email ([email protected]), and submit the computer ID number of the workstation where Radioplan shall be unlocked. Immediately, we return the registration codes to unlock the application.

The computer ID of your workstation is shown in the License Registration dialog, refer to Fig. 2-3. The dialog is reachable in Radioplan by the menu entry Tools License Management License Registration…. When you have received the registration code(s) from the technical support, you can enter these values in the fields Registration Code 1 and Registration Code 2 of the dialog. Then you press the button Process Registration Codes to update the license file. The current license status is shown in the lower part of the dialog.

Fig. 2-3 License registration dialog

2.3.2.2 License Transfer

From time to time, customers may want to move licensed software from one machine to another. This license transfer scheme can be accomplished without having the customer call for registration codes. In this case, a simple three-step procedure is performed utilizing a blank floppy disk. As an alternative, a shared directory can be used as transfer media as well, which initially contains no license file.

Do not use the original license file diskette that was delivered with Radioplan!


www.actix.com

Step 1:

To transfer a license from one computer to another, Radioplan must be installed on the new machine. This software will be locked, so it will not run for an unlimited time. Then choose the menu item Tools License Management Start License Transfer to create a blank license file on the floppy identified with the computer ID number of the new machine.

Step 2:

In the second step, the blank floppy disk is taken to the licensed (old) machine. Choose the menu item Tools License Management Transfer this license on the old machine which manipulates the license file stored on the floppy and de-authorizes the license on the current machine. During this step, the license file on the floppy is enabled and the license file on the current (old) computer is disabled.

Step 3:

The last step is to simply move the license file from the floppy disk onto the new computer to be licensed. This file has already been properly enabled for the target machine. The license file can be copied using the menu item Tools License Management Complete License Transfer on the target machine.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 27

www.actix.com

3 Radioplan Introduction The Radioplan application provides a comfortable graphical user interface for a variety of tasks in the radio network planning, deployment, and optimization workflows. In particular, it enables the user to

• manage/load/save projects

• view and evaluate configuration data in several ways

• configure a complete network setup incl. environment

• invoke and control modules of Radioplan as, e.g., the ACP module

• load/export network configurations and various measurement data

• view and evaluate network related data in a large variety of ways

Usually, Radioplan is started from the Windows start menu under a local installation. There are also other ways of invoking Radioplan, e.g. in a Citrix environment by double clicking an application icon or directly out of an RNP tool. The application window looks as in Fig. 3-1, however initially with an empty viewing area. As soon as a project has been opened, the viewing area is filled.

Status Bar

Message Window

Viewing Area (surface plot, chart graph, table, ...)Tree Window

Paint Toolbar

Components Toolbar

Standard Toolbar

Menu Bar

Views Toolbar

Module Toolbars

Cell Search Toolbar

Fig. 3-1 Window controls of the Radioplan application

In the following, the main window controls of Radioplan are introduced. A reference to the controls can be found in appendix 13.2.


www.actix.com

3.1 Coordinate System Radioplan, as a GIS-enabled platform, supports both geographical and Cartesian coordinate systems. To understand how Radioplan handles different coordinates, first a short introduction into types of coordinate systems and their transformation is given. Next, the orientation of the supported 3D coordinate systems is explained.

3.1.1 Geographical and Cartesian Coordinate Systems A geographical coordinate system describes a position in 3D space with respect to the earth by a longitude and a latitude, often given in degrees that are measured relative to a reference ellipsoid. This type of coordinate systems is frequently called an ECEF (earth centred, earth-fixed) system.

A Cartesian coordinate system defines the projection of a part of the earth’s surface onto a flat plane, the projection plane. Since the earth is not an ideal sphere, the projection of its surface onto a flat plane is done part wise. Many different coordinate systems exist in order to describe a small piece out of the earth’s surface by a flat plane as accurately as possible.

Some of the projections are defined relative to a set of common reference ellipsoids, given by a datum transformation. A datum transformation is the composite operation of a translation, a rotation, and a scaling of a point in 3D space. Such a transformation can be described by seven parameters in a way given by (3.1). Table 3-1 contains a description of the parameters.

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡⋅⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−−

−⋅⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++

++

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡=

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

0

0

0

11

1

100010001

zyx

rrrrrr

mm

m

dzdydx

zyx

xy

xz

yz

(3.1)

Table 3-1 Datum transformation parameters

Parameter Description Unit

dx translation dx to WGS84 m

dy translation dy to WGS84 m

dz translation dz to WGS84 m

m scaling factor to WGS84 ppm (parts per million)

rx rotation ro (rho) to WGS84 radian

ry rotation rf (phi) to WGS84 radian

rz rotation rk (kappa) to WGS84 radian

In order to represent a position in both Cartesian coordinates and geographical coordinates, a projection coordinate system must be defined. It constitutes the transformation of Cartesian coordinates into geographical coordinates and vice versa. Note that this projection coordinate system is used for all coordinates stored internally.

In some cases, it may be helpful to represent coordinates in a different coordinate system compared to the projection system. This can be done by choosing a second display coordinate system. This display coordinate system can be a Cartesian or a geographical coordinate system. Therefore, it is possible to represent display coordinates in a second projection or in a second geographical coordinate system. Fig. 3-2 explains the coordinate system transformation between a projection and a display coordinate system schematically:


www.actix.com

Projection Coordinate System

Cartesian Coordinates

Geographical Coordinates

WGS 84

Datum Transformation (optional)

Display Coordinate System




Projection Coordinate System



WGS 84


Display Coordinate System




Fig. 3-2 Principle of coordinate system transformation between projection and display coordinate systems

The coordinate systems can be chosen in the projection dialog, accessible via View Projection… from the menu bar.

Fig. 3-3 Projection settings dialog

From the upper list box in the coordinate settings dialog one of the coordinate systems for the projection can be selected. In the lower part, optionally a display coordinate system can be chosen. Depending on the selection buttons, the display coordinate system can be a Cartesian or geographical system.

The choice of a proper projection coordinate system is decisive for a correct import of georeferenced data or maps. Especially if geographical coordinates (e.g. GPS positions from drive test measurements) are imported, the right projection coordinate system must have been chosen before.

The coordinate system list itself can be modified by editing the wkt.ini file, located in the coordinatesystems subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]). Each coordinate system is defined by at least two lines. An optional third line can be used for a user-defined datum transformation. The format used in the ini-file is called Well Known Text (WKT) format. It can be handled by several GIS tools.

The snapshot below shows a definition of a standard projection coordinate system with a certain datum transformation to and from WGS84:


www.actix.com

EPSG=31494

PROJCS["DHDN / Germany zone 4",GEOGCS["DHDN",DATUM["Deutsche_Hauptdreiecksnetz",SPHEROID["Bessel 1841",6377397.155,299.1528128]],PRIMEM["Greenwich",0],UNIT["degree",0.0174532925199433]],PROJECTION["Transverse_Mercator"],PARAMETER["latitude_of_origin",0],PARAMETER["central_meridian",12],PARAMETER["scale_factor",1],PARAMETER["false_easting",4500000],PARAMETER["false_northing",0],UNIT["metre",1]]

TOWGS84=582.0,105.0,414.0,5.042e-6,1.696e-6,-1.4932e-5,8.3

Internally, the EPSG identifiers will be stored into the SQL database for the projection and optionally the display coordinate system. Therefore, it is necessary that all users who use the same database work with equal coordinate system definitions that can be simply achieved by using one identical wkt.ini file.

3.1.2 Euclidian Cartesian Coordinate Systems used in Radioplan Internally, Radioplan uses a 3-dimensional Euclidian coordinate system as depicted in Fig. 3-4. It consists of a horizontal x-y-plane and a vertical z-axis.

z

y

x

Fig. 3-4 Coordinate system used in Radioplan

Often the coordinates of the x-y-plane are denoted by means of the orientations North – South – West – East. They have the following meanings:

• North: positive y-direction

• South: negative y-direction

• West: negative x-direction

• East: positive x-direction

These relations are depicted in Fig. 3-5.

Especially when handling antenna diagrams, directions in the 3-dimensional coordinate system are given in terms of the angles ϕ and ϑ. The orientation of these angles is presented below.


www.actix.com

y

x

ϕ

North

South

West East

Alternative orientationNorth-to-East orientation

ϕ = 0°

ϕ = 0°

Fig. 3-5 Horizontal x-y-plane of the coordinate system

The angle ϕ in the horizontal x-y-plane is defined in the range [0° … 360°). However, there are two possible orientations of ϕ (refer to Fig. 3-5).

• In the standard case, horizontal antenna patterns are given in a North-to-East alignment. Then the angle ϕ starts counting at the y-axis (North). It is counted clockwise such that an angle of ϕ = 90° denotes the direction of the x-axis (East).

• Alternatively, the angle ϕ could be counted counter-clockwise. An angle of ϕ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis (East); an angle of ϕ = 90° denotes the direction of the y-axis (North).

By default, the North-to-East alignment is used. The antenna orientation used in a project is shown for information in the project settings dialog with the checkbox Use Horizontal North-To-East Orientation, see section 6.2. Naturally, this setting cannot be changed.

The vertical x-z-plane is shown in Fig. 3-6. The angle ϑ is counted downward and is defined in the range [-90° … 90°]. An angle of ϑ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis, i.e. positive angles represent a corresponding downtilt of an antenna. An angle of ϑ = -90° denotes the direction of the z-axis. As an example, an antenna with ϑ = 10° means that the antenna has 10° downtilt.

z

xϑ

Fig. 3-6 Vertical x-z-plane of the coordinate system

In contrast to this, vertical antenna patterns are usually defined for a range of ϑ = [0° … 360°) where an angle of ϑ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis, i.e. with the same orientation as described above. The rear hemisphere of the pattern is then in the range ϑ = [90° … 270°) from bottom to top. It is also involved in the 3-dimensional antenna pattern interpolation algorithm as described in section 6.5.8.

3.2 Menu Bar Most of the functionality of Radioplan can be reached from the menu bar, see Fig. 3-7. Besides the general functions, also the distinct modules (e.g. Measurement Module, ACP Optimization Module, WiNeS Simulation Module) can be accessed there.

Fig. 3-7 Radioplan menu bar


www.actix.com

3.3 Toolbars Several toolbars are provided for easy access to frequently used functions. When positioning the mouse pointer over a toolbar icon, a tooltip with a short description of the corresponding function appears. An explanation of the respective function is also shown in the status bar. All toolbars can be freely moved inside the application window by dragging and dropping with the mouse.

• The standard (or default) toolbar offers functionality that is mainly contained in the File, Edit, and partly the View menus. They embrace, among others, functions to load, and save configurations and network data, and to print and to zoom active views.

• The views toolbar provides quick access to the network layers and some surface plot views of configuration and network data. These plots can also be called from the View Configuration Data Plots submenu among others.

• The cell search toolbar offers easy access to a text based search function for cells in the network. Cells are identified both in the map and in the hierarchical data tree.

• The module toolbars summarize the main controls for the different modules of Radioplan as, e.g., the WiNeS network simulator. For each of the modules, also a dedicated menu is provided.

• The components toolbar has some checkboxes to show or hide the distinct configuration data items in surface plots. The same functionality is also contained in the View Visible Components submenu. In particular, the presentation of sites, cells, simulation/analysis area boundaries, streets, labels of the sites and the cells, and an optional legend can be toggled.

• The paint toolbar defines the mode that controls the actions of the mouse pointer. It comprises the same functionality as the View Paint submenu. In the default paint mode, the window controls can be used in the normal way. In all the other modes, the mouse pointer is used to perform special actions.

• The graphics toolbar allows to draw certain graphical objects (e.g. lines, polygons, or text) in graphics layers to produce e.g. annotations for surface plots. This toolbar is undocked by default and is only visible if the graphics mode is active, refer to section 3.6.

More information about the toolbars and their customization can be found in appendix 13.2.2.

3.4 Layer Concept Radioplan supports an arbitrary number of layers for surface plots. These layers can be displayed in arbitrary order and with freely definable transparency. All created layers are collected in the Layers tab of the tree window. An example set of different layers is shown in Fig. 3-8.


www.actix.com

Fig. 3-8 Sample view of the Layers tab

Layers can be created from several things. They are summarized in Table 3-2 along with the symbols as they appear in the Layers tab.

Table 3-2 Different layer types

Symbol Layer Contents

configuration data

measurement data

result data (network performance data from different Radioplan Modules)

optimization plots

images

post-processing layer (created by coinciding two layers)

post-processing layer (created by manipulating a single layer)

cell visual

graphics layer

A layer is not recalculated if the underlying data are modified (e.g. a configuration matrix is moved). Only if the corresponding layer is created anew, the layer presentation is updated.

3.4.1 Configuration Data Layers Several configuration data can be presented in layers. Most of these data can be shown by clicking the respective icon from the views toolbar. More configuration data plots are available from the View Configuration Data Plots submenu where also some technology specific plots can be visualized. The only exception is the traffic data that cannot be viewed


www.actix.com

from a toolbar icon or menu entry because it is service specific. Read more details about the distinct configuration data layers in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3 General configuration data layers

Data Views Toolbar Icon

Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots

Use Plot Settings Dialog?

Comment

pathloss — Composite Pathloss

— Creates a layer of the composite pathloss distribution in the network from all active sites, if pathloss matrices are available.1

Alternatively, a single pathloss matrix can be shown by selecting Show this Matrix from the corresponding pathloss matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.5.8.5).

pathloss incl. antennas

— Composite Pathloss with Antennas

— Creates a layer of the composite pathloss distribution including antenna patterns in the network from all active sites / cells, if pathloss matrices are available.1,2

Alternatively, a single pathloss matrix can be shown including the currently active cell antennas by selecting Show this Matrix incl. Antenna Diagrams from the corresponding pathloss matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.5.8.5).

best cell received power

Best Cell Received Power

Creates a layer of the best cell received power distribution in the network from all active cells of the currently active network layer(s). Since this plot is generated from the pathloss distribution, the antenna patterns, and the cell pilot powers, it can only be created if pathloss matrices are available.1,2

1 A pathloss, a best pilot received power, an RSSI, or an interference ratio layer is interpolated by default, i.e. the Interpolate Image checkbox is selected in the layer settings dialog, see section 3.5.4. 2 When creating a surface plot that utilizes antenna diagrams (like pathloss incl. antennas, best cell received power, interference ratio, cell overlap, RSSI, or all cell area mapped plots) for the first time, a caching procedure is done. This accelerates any further creation of such plots.


www.actix.com




Comment

interference ratio

Interence Ratio Creates a layer of the relevant signal-to-interference measure depending on technology for the active network layer(s). For CDMA-type networks (UMTS, CDMA2000) an Ec/I0 plot of the pilot signals is shown; for GSM or iDEN networks a C/I plot of the BCCH signals is shown; for WiMAX networks a CINR plot of the pilot signals is shown.1,2

best serving cell

Best Serving Cell

Creates a layer of the best serving cell plot considering all active cells of the currently active network layer(s), where each cell area is assigned a certain color. The best serving cell areas are derived from the best cell received power, i.e. this layer can only be created if pathloss matrices are available.2,3

cell overlap

Cell Overlapping

Creates a layer of the cell overlap under the assumption of 0dB hysteresis and a configurable HO margin below the best pilot for the currently active network layer(s). This margin can be configured as the Cell Overlap Window in the plot settings dialog, see below.2

Active Set size

— Active Set Size Creates a layer of the Active Set size under the assumption of 0dB hysteresis, with a HO margin below the best pilot and a maximal Active Set size for the currently active network layer(s), configurable in the plot settings dialog, see below.2

frequency plan

— Frequency Plan Creates a layer of the frequency plan of the network for the currently active network layer(s). It shows the cell areas in colors that correspond to the carrier frequencies of the cells. The determination of the cell areas is based on the best serving cell plot, i.e. it can only be created if pathloss matrices are available.2

RSSI — RSSI Creates a layer of the RSSI under the assumption of a certain network load for the currently active network layer(s).1,2

3 A best serving cell plot layer is presented with discrete colors to make adjacent cell areas better distinguishable. Thus the Discrete Colors checkbox is selected in the layer settings dialog, see section 3.5.4.


www.actix.com




Comment

C/A — C/A Creates a layer of the carrier-to-adjacent channel interference for all active cells of the currently active GSM or iDEN network layer(s).1,2

clutter

Clutter Data — Creates a layer of the clutter matrix. It shows the clutter class indices by colors according to the current color palette. This layer can also be created by choosing Show this Matrix from the clutter matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.4.1.5).

DEM matrix

DEM Terrain Data

— Creates a layer of the DEM matrix (if available). The different ground height levels are displayed according to the current color palette. This layer can also be created by choosing Show this Matrix from the DEM matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.4.2.4).

traffic — — — Since every service has its own traffic matrix, it is not expedient to generate a composite traffic plot. Instead, each traffic matrix can be shown for itself in a separate layer. To accomplish this, choose Show this Matrix from the respective traffic matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.6.6.5).

All the configuration data layers that do not just represent a direct mapping of matrix configuration data (such as e.g. clutter or DEM), require some further parameters to be specified before the plot is created. So for all layers that have the corresponding checkbox ticked in the Use Plot Settings Dialog? column in Table 3-3, a plot settings dialog is shown before the actual plot is created. The plot settings dialog is given in Fig. 3-9, the plot parameters are described in Table 3-4. The default settings in the dialog are initialized from the general surface plot settings dialog that can be accessed from the Tools menu.


www.actix.com

Fig. 3-9 Plot settings dialog (here: for Best Pilot Power plot for UMTS)

Table 3-4 Plot creation parameters


Plot Title The plot title for the layer to be created. This field is initialized with the proper layer name depending on the chosen layer type and active network layer.

—

Pixel Size The pixel size of the layer to be created. m

Minimum DL Rx Power The assumed minimum required DL Rx power of the pilot to be considered for the plot. Pixels where the Rx power is lower than this threshold will by empty in the created layer.

dBm

Options

Overwrite existing Layer

If this checkbox is active, a possibly existing layer of the same type would be re-used and overwritten. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the layer functions, this flag will be disabled initially.

—

Use Pathloss Clutter Offsets (= Indoor Coverage)

If this checkbox is active, additional pathloss offsets as defined in the clutter classes definition are applied in relation to the Minimum DL Rx Power. This effectively models indoor coverage thresholds.

—

Restrict Plot to Simulation Area

If this checkbox is active, the new layer will be restricted to the simulation area. This setting is by default active, if the corresponding flag in the general surface plot settings is set.

—


www.actix.com


Mask Area by Traffic If this checkbox is active, the new layer will be masked with the traffic matrix, i.e. areas with zero traffic will be empty in the layer.

—

Use Color of Primary Cell for Additional Antennas and Repeaters

If this checkbox is active, additional antennas and repeaters will use the same color in best cell area plots as their associated primary cell.

—

Special Plot Settings

Evaluate Nth Best Server

Defines the Nth best server for the creation of a received power / RxLev plot. The user can choose between the 1st and 5th best server.

—

Interference

Noise Floor The total noise threshold that is used as the thermal background noise incl. any shadowing margin or mobile terminal noise figure (sensitivity) to create an interference ratio plot.

dBm

Constant Network Load A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming a constant network load in all cells. The network load can be specified by the Network Load parameter.

for UMTS, CDMA2000 only

—

Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming a constant cell Tx power in all cells. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The total cell power can be specified by the Cell Tx Power parameter.


—

Individual Cell Tx Power

A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming individual cell Tx powers. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool.


—

Frequency Plan If this checkbox is active, the frequency plan is considered in the interference calculation for an interference ratio plot. The resulting plot then represents the actual interference situation on the BCCH.

for GSM, iDEN only

—

Co-Channel Network If this checkbox is active, all BCCH and TCH channels would be assumed on the same frequency. The resulting plot then represents the general overlap / interference situation between all cells.

for GSM, iDEN only

—

Expected Interference If this checkbox is active, the interference ratio plot is created using an expected interference approach. In this case the interference depends on the total number of available frequencies in the network and the forbidden frequencies at each cell/radio.

for GSM, iDEN only

—


www.actix.com


Network Load The DL network load for data traffic that is used to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Network Load option is selected. A network load of 0% corresponds to DL control channel power only; 100% of network load mean that all cells transmit at their maximum output power.

%

Cell Tx Power The constant DL transmit power assumed for all cells to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Cell Tx Power option is selected.

dBm

# of Available Channels The assumed number of available channels in the network to be considered for creating an interference ratio plot if the Expected Interference option is selected.

#

Cell Overlapping / Active Set

Cell Overlap Window The cell overlap margin below the best received pilot where cells are counted for the cell overlap and Active Set size plots.

dB

Max. Active Set Size The maximal Active Set size applied for creating the Active Set size plot.

#

All layers created by help of the plot settings dialog represent the current setting of active network layer(s). Read more about the network layer management in section 5.2.

In case the Constant Network Load option is selected in the plot settings dialog, the Ec/I0 at each pixel of the best pilot Ec/I0 plot for UMTS is calculated in the following manner:

43421thresholdnoisetotalicellsall

itrafficdedicatedicellsall icellsall

iCCCHipilot

pilotbestc

NFNLRSCPnlRSCPRSCP

RSCPI

E⋅⋅+⋅++

=∑∑ ∑ ,,,

0 %100

with ieffective

iCCCHpilotiCCCHpilot PL

PRSCP

,

],/[],/[ = and

∑∑−−

+−−

=jcellsother jeffective

jCCCHjpilotjtotal

cellbesteffective

cellbestCCCHcellbestpilotcellbesttotal

icellsallitrafficdedicated PL

PPPPL

PPPRSCP

,

,,,

,

,,,,

where nl is the presumed total DL network load, Ptotal, i is the maximal transmit power of cell i (given by the cell parameter Maximum Power or Output Power), Ppilot, i is the PCPICH transmit power of cell i, PCCCH, i is the compound transmit power of the other common control channels in cell i, PLeffective, i is the effective pathloss from cell i (incl. e.g. cable losses, body loss, antenna gain, antenna directivity, etc.), L is the compound loss factor (including e.g. cable losses, body loss and any additional attenuation), N is the thermal noise floor, and NF is the (average) noise figure at the terminals. The default values for the network load nl and the total noise threshold NFNL ⋅⋅ (noise floor) can be configured in the general settings dialog, refer to section 3.5.2. Interference ratio plots of other technologies are calculated in a similar way.


www.actix.com

Usually, a certain configuration data layer is reused if the layer is created anew. This means that the previous layer presentation is lost because its data is overridden. However, in some cases it is useful to retain older layers of the same configuration data, especially if so-called ‘before – after’ comparisons shall be made. To accomplish this, one can hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the corresponding toolbar icon or menu entry, respectively. Then a new layer is created containing the current status of those configuration data.

Remember Holding down the <Shift> key while creating a layer will add a new layer even if another layer of the same nature already exists. Otherwise, the previous layer would be overridden.

3.4.2 Measurement Data Layers All network related data imported from a measurement device are displayed in measurement data layers. This classification is used both for online measurement data during a drive test and for measurement data post-processing, although their appearance in the surface plots is slightly different in order to distinguish between them. Measurement data layers are only available in the Measurement Module, described in [R-Meas].

3.4.3 Result Data Layers It is possible to create layers from all result parameters. For UE specific parameters (as e.g. a DL C/I), the result data are mapped to the respective UE positions to create a pixel matrix. For cell/site specific parameters, however, the result data are mapped homogeneously to the corresponding best cell areas. Also plots created from values in a table are result data layers. Read more about the creation of result data surface plots in chapter 12.

3.4.4 Optimization Data Layers The network optimization process is visually supported by some special surface plots. These surface plots represent either optimization results or auxiliary measures that help to understand and asses the progress of the network optimization. Optimization data layers are only available in the ACP Optimization Module, described in [R-ACP].

3.4.5 Image Layers An arbitrary number of images from raster or vector data files can be imported as distinct layers by using the entries Raster Image… and Vector Data… from the File Import submenu. Alternatively, raster images can also be imported by clicking the icon from the standard toolbar (tooltip: Import Raster Image …). This type of layer could serve as background images. A file open dialog appears where the user can select the file name(s) of the image(s); multiple file selection is supported. A large variety of file formats is supported, an overview is provided in appendices 13.5 (raster formats) and 13.6 (vector formats).

The image file must be georeferenced in order to be properly loaded and displayed at the desired coordinates. Some data formats directly support georeferencing information, others (such as e.g. *.gif or *.jpg) can be georeferenced by using an ESRI world file with the same name and commonly the extension *.wld. See appendix 13.5.1.1 for details on the georeferencing capabilities of the distinct file formats.

Once an image file has been loaded into a project, a reference to it is stored in the database. Whenever the same project is opened again, all respective images are loaded automatically.


www.actix.com

3.4.6 Post-Processing Layers Any layer containing values can be manipulated by a mathematical function (e.g. inversion or adding a value etc.). Also, any pair of two layers (except image layers or graphics layers) can be coincided using various functions to generate a new, post-processing layer. Even post-processing layers themselves can be manipulated or coincided again.

Accessing the manipulating and coinciding layers function is described below in section 3.4.9; more details about this function can be found in chapter 12.

3.4.7 Graphics Layers Graphics layers can be used to add arbitrary graphical objects as e.g. annotations for surface plots. Such objects could be lines, polygons, or text objects with different properties for color, size, fill color, thickness, line style, etc. The usage of these graphical capabilities is described in section 3.6.

By creating new graphics layers, assigning graphical objects to these layers, and choosing an appropriate order of the layers, the user has a powerful tool to add arbitrary annotations and marks for surface plots.

Another application of graphics layers is displaying cell neighbor list relationships graphically or highlighting a site in a surface plot.

All graphics layers once created in a project are retained in the database when the project is closed. Thus when re-opening the project previous graphics layers are still available and can be used for flexible graphical annotation of surface plots.

3.4.8 Cell Visuals Any kind of cell related data can be displayed in cell visuals. In this layer type, the cell symbol (normally a simple arrow) is replaced by a wedge-like form which is colored according to the associated cell value and the chosen color scale.

Cell visuals represent an alternative to mapped surface plots – both of them visualize cell related values. Cell visuals can easily be overlaid on normal surface plots, so various parameters can be displayed simultaneously. Tooltips are also enabled for cell visuals.

Any pair of two cell visuals can be coincided using various functions to generate a new, post-processing cell visual.

3.4.9 Working with Layers All created layers are presented in descending order in the Layers tab of the tree window. A newly created layer will be placed topmost, i.e. it will appear as first layer in the Layers tab. The only exception from this rule is image layers that are always appended below all other layers. Thus it is always ensured that they lie in the background and could be permanently visible even if some other layers are, e.g., swapped in a layer slide show.

The layers can be selected in the tree window by clicking on them with the left mouse button. Alternatively, key commands are available to navigate in the layer list; in particular, the < > and < > arrow keys can be used to step up or down in the list. To rename a layer, its tree item has to be clicked another time once it is selected. Then the layer name can be edited. A selected layer can be deleted by pressing the <Delete> key.

A layer is visible if the checkbox left of the layer is marked. Checking a layer automatically selects that layer, too. In turn, a selected layer need not be visible, though. A double-click on a layer selects that layer and makes it the only visible one; the same function can be chosen from the layer’s context menu by clicking Activate only this Layer. Also, the key command <RETURN> can be used to invoke this function for the currently selected layer item.

In general, the order of the layers in the Layers tab decides upon the visibility of the layers, if several layers are displayed simultaneously. Higher ordered layers are always


www.actix.com

displayed above lower ordered layers. The order of the layers can be changed either by means of the context menu functions or by moving layers with the mouse. For the first option, see the description of the different move functions in Table 3-5 below. For the latter option, click on a layer icon and hold the left mouse button pressed down. Then drag and drop that layer to the desired position in the hierarchy of the Layers tab. The layers are automatically reordered then.

The black legend shown to the left of the viewing area always belongs to the currently selected layer (not immediately visible). Its properties can be set in the layer settings dialog (see section 3.5.4) by clicking into the legend or selecting Settings… from the context menu of the layer. It is especially useful to modify the opacity (alpha blending) of layers to visually overlay several of them. If the checkbox of the currently selected layer is not checked, the display of the layer color scale in the black legend to the left is suppressed.

There is a difference between the visible view in the viewing area and the color scale and layer captions shown in the black legend.

• The viewing area can show an arbitrary number of overlaid layers simultaneously. Which layers are shown is solely controlled by the checkbox left of the layer item in the tree window. By properly using alpha blending and transparent colors, several layers can be presented at the same time. The only exception are cell visuals – only one of them can be visible simultaneously.

• The legend can, of course, only belong to a single layer. This is always the selected layer in the tree window. If the selected layer is not visible (i.e. checkbox not set), the color scale etc. is suppressed. The currently selected layer can be lower than other visible layers in the tree window. Then the visible view in the viewing area and the shown color scale in the black legend might not be matching!

All the functions of the layer context menu are summarized in Table 3-5. The context menu can be reached by right-clicking the respective layer in the Layers tab. Note that the context menu of graphics layers is shorted because certain functions are not necessary for them as, e.g., Manipulate this Layer….

Table 3-5 Layer functions

Layer Function Description

Settings… Opens the layer settings dialog of the layer. Can be used to define all graphical properties of a layer as, e.g., alpha blending, scaling, color palette, etc.

Legend Colors… Opens the color palette dialog of the layer. This is a separate access to the color palette settings of the layer which are also accessible from the layer settings dialog.

Settings Overview… Shows the layer settings overview dialog that summarizes the graphical presentation settings of all layers. Despite the overview, this dialog can be used to modify the layer properties in a single step (see below).

Activate only this Layer Selects the layer and makes it the only visible one, i.e. all other layers are unchecked.

Zoom to Layer Boundaries

Performs a zoom command that shows the entire layer contents in the viewing area.

Lock Layer A flag to lock a layer. A locked layer is stored permanently in the project and is retained even if the project is closed.

Lock All Layers Locks all layers in one step after a confirmation query.

Unlock All Layers Unlocks all layers in one step after a confirmation query.

Remove Removes the layer. The same function is also available by pressing the <Delete> key for the currently active layer item.


www.actix.com

Layer Function Description

Remove All Removes all layers.

Remove Layers of this Type

Removes all layers of the same type as this one. This function is useful if many layers of a certain type have been created that consume a large amount of memory. Thus selecting this function frees the memory again.

Manipulate this Layer… Opens a dialog to select a function to manipulate this layer (see below).

Coincide with other Layer…

Opens a dialog to select a function to coincide the layer or cell visual with another one (see below).

Layer Navigation Submenu to move layers in the Layers tab tree. This changes the order of layers which has an impact on visibility. Available moving commands are Move to Foreground, Move to Background, Move one Layer Up, Move one Layer Down.

Vector Layer Submenu for vector layer functions. A vector layer can be converted into a raster layer by using the entry Convert to Raster Layer… (see section 3.4.11 below). The resulting layer is ready for further use, e.g. as clutter or traffic matrix.

Export Submenu for various layer export functions. For more detailed information about layer export please refer to section 3.4.12 below.

In order to get a better overview of the graphical presentation settings of all layers together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary layer’s context menu, refer to Fig. 3-10. The settings overview dialog can be maximized such that the whole screen size can be used to view the layer settings.

Graphics overlays are excluded from the layer settings overview dialog because of their different properties.

Fig. 3-10 Layer settings overview dialog

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the layer properties. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:


www.actix.com

• Individual parameter values can be changed.

• Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of layers in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).

• Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function).

• Multiple layers can be erased in one action.

For a practical example on how to make efficient use of the table filter functions to modify some settings in the overview dialog, read more later in section 6.5.3.5 regarding the site settings overview dialog.

To delete layers, simply mark the left checkbox of all the layers that shall be removed and then choose Remove Marked Layers from the Tools pulldown menu in the upper left corner of the dialog. The layers will eventually be deleted as soon as the action is committed by pressing the OK button of the dialog.

An interesting option is to manipulate the data of a layer. Choose the entry Manipulate this Layer… from a layer’s context menu to show a dialog where the required settings can be made, Fig. 3-11.

Fig. 3-11 Layer manipulation dialog

Another interesting option is to coincide the data of one layer or cell visual with that of another one. Choose the entry Coincide with other Layer/Visual… from a layer’s or cell visual’s context menu to show a dialog where the required settings can be made, Fig. 3-12.

Especially for the result analysis this function can unveil relations between different parameters that otherwise would be difficult to discover. The basic principle is to relate the pixel-oriented data of two layers by means of a certain operation (e.g. DIFFERENCE, SUM, QUOTIENT, PRODUCT, etc.) to produce a new layer. It is also possible to derive an x-y scatter analysis (as graph or table) or scatter statistics (as surface plot or table) from two layers. Read more about the layer manipulation and coincidence functions in chapter 12.


www.actix.com

Fig. 3-12 Layer coincidence dialog

3.4.10 Locking Layers Normal data containing layers (configuration/measurement/result/optimization/post-processing data layers) can be locked in a project. A locked layer will be preserved when closing the project, so it will still be in the project when it is opened again. This function is particularly useful to preserve layers that have been created by coinciding other layers etc. This function is not available for measurement layers because they are only temporarily shown while MCollect is active.

In order to lock a layer, the Lock Layer function from that layer’s context menu must be invoked. Then the layer icon gets a small lock symbol to indicate the locked status of the layer as shown in Fig. 3-13. To unlock a layer, the same context menu function has to be selected again.

Fig. 3-13 Locking a layer

It is also possible to lock or unlock all layers at a time in one step. In order to do this, the user has to choose either of the functions Lock All Layers or Unlock All Layers from the context menu of an arbitrary layer item.

Optionally the user can choose to have all layers initially locked when they are created by editing the Display Settings dialog (see section 3.5.3).

Image layers and graphics layers (overlays) cannot be locked because they are permanently available in a project. It should be noted that in the case of background images (as image layers), these image files are loaded into the project whenever the project is opened.

Caution It should be clear for the user that especially a locked layer which possibly was created some time ago need not immediately reflect the current status of the network. When changing the network configuration, the layers are not automatically updated. This should be borne in mind when locking layers.


www.actix.com

3.4.11 Converting Vector into Raster Layers Sometimes it can be useful to convert a vector layer into a raster layer which then can be further used as e.g. a traffic matrix or a clutter matrix.

It is assumed that a vector layer was imported using File Import Vector Image…. Then the conversion dialog can be opened from the context menu of the imported vector layer by choosing Vector Layer Convert to Raster Layer…. This dialog is shown in Fig. 3-14, the settings are described in Table 3-6.

Fig. 3-14 Vector to raster layer conversion dialog

Table 3-6 Vector to raster layer conversion settings


Data Selection

Use values from a data field

If this option is selected, the polygons of the vector layer are filled with the associated values given by a certain data field of the vector layer.

—

Data Field The data field that shall define the values of the surrounded pixels in the raster layer to be created.

—

Use fixed value If this option is selected, the polygons of the vector layer are all filled with the same given value.

—

Fixed Value The fixed value that all surrounded pixels in the new raster layer shall be initialized with.

—

Area Filter

Whole Area Selecting this radiobutton, the resulting raster layer will comprise the entire rectangle that is spanned by the extents of the original vector layer.

—

Simulation Area Selecting this radiobutton, the resulting raster layer will be clipped to the simulation area.

—

Analysis Area Selecting this radiobutton, the resulting raster layer will be clipped to the analysis area.

—

Resolution

Pixel Size The pixel size of the resulting raster layer. m

After committing the settings in the dialog, a new raster layer is created as result layer. It contains pixels with values as specified. The new layer could be saved or, e.g., be used as a traffic matrix by using the context menu function Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… at a service profile in the Configuration tab. For more information please refer to section 6.6.4.


www.actix.com

3.4.12 Import/Export of Layers The distinct layer export functions are listed in Table 3-7.

Table 3-7 Layer Export Functions

Export Function Description

Export… Saves this layer in native Radioplan format. All layer properties (values, color palette, scale, transparency, etc.) are preserved. The layer can later be loaded again by choosing the menu entry File Import Layer from File… or File Import

Graphics Overlay from File….

Export to MapInfo/Shape File…

Saves this layer as a georeferenced vector file.

Export to Raster Image… Saves this layer as a georeferenced raster file.

Save as TIFF File… Saves the current layer presentation into a TIFF file. Shows a file save dialog to select a file name. The layer is saved together with a TFW file. The TIFF file is created in a format definition that is compatible with the import capabilities of Forsk’s ATOLL.

A layer can be saved to a file in native Radioplan format. This function is invoked by choosing Export Export… from the layer’s context menu. All information of the layer is stored then into a file incl. the layer type, values, legends, captions, color palette, ranges, transparency settings, georeferencing, etc.

A layer that was saved to a file can be imported into a project by choosing either of the menu functions File Import Layer from File… or File Import Graphics Overlay from File…. All settings of the layer are restored then.

Data containing layers (configuration/measurement/result/optimization/post-processing data layers) can also be exported to file in other formats. For example, they can be saved as a vector file in Shape or MapInfo format. This function is invoked by choosing Export Export to MapInfo/Shape File… from the layer’s context menu. Alternatively, such layers can be saved as a raster file by using the context menu functions Export Export to Raster Image… or Export Save as TIFF File….

3.5 Personal Workspace This section introduces the options to modify the graphical presentation in the viewing area. Such presentation properties are collectively called the workspace that can be adjusted by each user individually.

The first subsection describes the workspace handling in Radioplan, whereas the following subsections highlight different aspects of the workspace.

3.5.1 Workspace Handling The workspace is the conglomeration of all properties that affect the appearance of the graphical elements in the viewing area. In particular, it contains:

• general surface plot settings,

• display settings, and

• individual layer templates.

The workspace settings are initially set to default settings that can be defined globally for all users at a customer. However, every user can individually adjust his workspace settings in the respective dialogs of the Radioplan application.


www.actix.com

When Radioplan is shut down, all workspace settings – including any user specific adjustments – are automatically saved to a winesworkspace.ini file in the applicable Radioplan user folder, which is:

• the WINESHOME path defined in the wines.ini file, which is located in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]);

• if the WINESHOME path is not defined in the wines.ini file: the WINESHOME path defined as Windows environment variable;

• if no WINESHOME path is defined at all: the Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Actix\Radioplan\ folder.

Accordingly, on start of Radioplan, the system tries to read workspace settings from winesworkspace.ini files, which may be located at one or more different locations. The order of their consideration is specified in Table 3-8.

Table 3-8 Order of workspace import on start of Radioplan

Order Checked Location Comment

1 the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin])

A central workspace is always loaded during Radioplan startup. If the winesworkspace.ini file does not exist at this location, Radioplan-internal factory defaults apply.

This central workspace can be overridden by a consecutively loaded workspace file with user-specific workspace settings.

2 WINESHOME path as defined in the wines.ini file

In the wines.ini file, WINESHOME may define the location of user-specific Radioplan settings such as the workspace.

If it is defined and the winesworkspace.ini file is found there, the central workspace settings are overridden by that.

3 %WINESHOME%\ A Windows environment variable WINESHOME can be created to define the location of user-specific Radioplan settings such as the workspace.

If step 2 was not successful, but this variable is defined and the winesworkspace.ini file is found there, the central workspace settings are overridden by that.

4 Documents and Settings\<username>\ Application Data\ Actix\Radioplan\

If neither step 2 nor 3 were successful, Radioplan tries to load the winesworkspace.ini from this location.

This option might not work if Radioplan is run on a remote server (e.g. Citrix server).

Thus, specific workspace settings defined by the user in the application, are automatically re-applied when opening Radioplan, thereby overriding the installation defaults.

3.5.1.1 Importing a Workspace

In addition to the predefinition of the workspace by the winesworkspace.ini file as described above, the user can at any time import another *.ini file. After the workspace import, the new workspace settings are active and will be used for newly created layers.

A workspace can be imported by choosing the menu entry Tools User Settings Import Workspace…. Then the user is prompted for the workspace ini file in a open file dialog.


www.actix.com

3.5.1.2 Exporting a Workspace

The current workspace settings can be exported to an ini file at an arbitrary location. Such a workspace definition could later be retrieved as described in the Subsection above.

The workspace export is initiated by choosing the menu entry Tools User Settings Export Workspace…. Then the user is prompted for the workspace ini file in a save file dialog.

3.5.1.3 Resetting the Workspace to Default Settings

All workspace settings can be reset to installation defaults by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Reset Workspace…. In order to avoid unintended deletion of any settings, the user is prompted with a query dialog to commit the workspace reset action.

If a winesworkspace.ini file is available in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]), the installation defaults are taken from there.

If no winesworkspace.ini file has been installed, factory defaults are applied, which are defined internally in Radioplan.

3.5.1.4 Handling of Legend Presets

Similar to the workspace, also the legend presets (defining the available color palette templates to be applied for layers) can be stored in a legend.ini file. As such, the legend presets are not a part of the actual workspace.

The legend.ini file(s) are handled in the same way as described above for the workspace file (see section 3.5.1).

Thus, specific legend presets defined by the user in the application, are automatically re-applied when opening Radioplan, thereby overriding the installation defaults.

Legend presets can also be imported and exported separately by using the according commands in the Tools User Settings submenu. Read more about the handling of legend presets in section 3.5.5.

3.5.1.5 Managing Layer Templates

In order to get an overview of all the individual layer templates that are stored in the workspace, one can use the layer templates overview dialog, see Fig. 3-15. This can be opened by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Manage Layer Templates….

Fig. 3-15 Layer templates overview dialog

Besides the overview, this dialog gives the opportunity to delete layer templates that shall no longer be stored in the workspace. When a layer template is selected, the Delete button gets enabled which can be used to permanently erase that layer template from the workspace.

Read more about how to add new layer templates to the workspace in section 3.5.4.


www.actix.com

3.5.2 General Application Settings Some general settings for the entire application can be specified in the general settings dialog that is opened by using the Tools General Settings… menu entry. If the creation of a surface plot can be further specified in a plot settings dialog (refer to section 3.4.1), then the parameters of the plot settings dialog is initialized with the general settings. The general settings dialog is shown in Fig. 3-16, its parameters are described in Table 3-9.

Fig. 3-16 General settings dialog

Table 3-9 General application parameters


Raster Matrix Display Settings

Default Minimum Plot Pixel Size

This parameter defines the minimum pixel dimensions for the generation of surface plot layers.

m

Restrict Plots to Simulation Area

If checked, all created plots are clipped to the simulation area. This option is particularly useful if network data are available for a large area, and the simulation area cuts out a smaller area of interest.

—

Noise Floor for Interference Calculations

(Nt + MS Noise Figure)

The total noise floor for downlink transmission as defined as the thermal background noise Nt incl. any shadowing margin or mobile terminal noise figure (sensitivity) for various technologies.

dBm

Default Settings for Interference Plot

Constant Network Load

A radio button to preselect the usage of a constant network load in all cells for interference ratio plot creation. The default network load can be specified by the Network Load parameter.


—


www.actix.com


Constant Cell Tx Power

A radio button to preselect the usage of a constant cell Tx power in all cells for interference ratio plot creation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The default total cell power can be specified by the Cell Tx Power parameter.


—


A radio button to preselect the usage of individual cell Tx powers for interference ratio plot creation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool.


—

Total Downlink Network Load

The default DL network load for data traffic that is used to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Network Load option is selected. A network load of 0% corresponds to DL control channel power only; 100% of network load mean that all cells transmit at their maximum output power.

%

Cell Tx Power The default constant DL transmit power assumed for all cells to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Cell Tx Power option is selected.

dBm

Default Settings for Cell Overlap Plot

Cell Overlap Window

The overlap margin below the best pilot for cell overlap and Active Set size plots. All pilots receivable within this margin below the best pilot are counted in the (potential) Active Set or as pilot polluters.

dB

Message Logging

Log Messages to File

If this checkbox is active, all messages that are printed in the message window of the application are also logged into a file. This logfile is located in the Radioplan user folder (see section 3.5.1 and also [R-Admin]).

—

Explore Log Folder… A button to open an explorer window with the folder where the logfile is saved.

—

Storage Location of Temporary Files

Store Temporary Files in Shared File System

Choosing this option will store temporary files, that are created and maintained by the memory management of the application, in a TEMP directory location in the shared file system. This setting is recommended if the disk quota on the local machine are very restricted for the user.

—

Store Temporary Files in Local TEMP Directory

Choosing this option will enforce the storage of temporary files in the user’s TEMP directory on the local machine, i.e. where the application runs. This setting is recommended to enhance the efficiency of Radioplan.

—

Multithreading

Number of Processors

The number of threads to be exploited for parallel processing. The available maximal number corresponds to the number of processor cores of the underlying hardware. The setting ‘Auto’ chooses the value according to the system variable NUMBER_OF_PROCESSORS.

—


www.actix.com

3.5.3 Display Settings The general display settings can be configured in the display settings dialog which is shown in Fig. 3-17. This dialog is opened by choosing the menu entry Tools Display Settings…. Its configuration is described in Table 3-10.

Fig. 3-17 Display settings dialog

Table 3-10 Display settings options

Parameter Description

Rendering of Sites

Radiation Pattern This radiobutton enables the display of sites by using the horizontal antenna patterns with their respective orientations at each cell.

Simplified Alternatively, this radiobutton enables a simplified display of sites, presenting the cells by arrows that point towards their respective antenna orientation.

Use Halo Effect Setting this flag displays a white halo in the background of the site symbol. Thus it can be better distinguished on a speckled background.

Size The display size of sites can be regulated in 10 steps.

Opacity The opacity (alpha blending factor) of the site symbols can be smoothly changed between 0% and 100%.

Hide cells with inactive transmitters

A checkbox to suppress the display of inactive transmitters.


www.actix.com


Site Labels

Show Labels A checkbox to generally switch on or off the display of site labels. The same function is controlled by the icon in the components toolbar. The same opacity (alpha blending factor) as for the site symbols applies.

Show Site Names A checkbox to optionally show the site name in site labels. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active.

Show Cell Names A checkbox to optionally show the cell names incl. scrambling codes in site labels. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active.

Background Box A checkbox to optionally show site labels in a box with selectable background color. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active.

Text Size The text size for site labels given in points.

Text Color The text color for site labels.

Background Color The background color for site labels.

Rendering of Streets

Color The color for displaying streets.

Opacity The opacity (alpha blending factor) for displaying streets.

New Layers

Default Opacity The default opacity (alpha blending factor) for all newly created layers.

Lock all Layers Initially A checkbox to optionally have all layers being locked when they are first created.

Options

Shading for Simulation/Analysis Area

A checkbox to active the shading in the outside regions of simulation and analysis areas.

Enable WYSIWYG If this checkbox is active, the viewing area settings (e.g. scaling factor, visible area, text size, etc.) are derived from the printer settings. This means that when choosing to print a surface plot, exactly the same area will be printed.

Double Buffered Display This feature can be activated (which is recommended) to improve the viewing of tooltips.

Shading for Cell Visuals A checkbox to activate the color shading for cell visuals. If this is inactive, cell visuals are drawn with a plain color corresponding to their value according to the color scale.

Data Tooltips Tooltips are displayed in surface plots that contain data if this option is activated.

Tiny Legend The black legend is drawn with half the usual width.

Imprint Watermark A watermark can be faded in at the bottom of the viewing area. This watermark can consist of an image and a text message. In particular, it will appear on all printouts of the viewing area plots. The appearance of the watermark can be configured by using the Configure… button, see below.

Grid Size for Editing The grid size in [m] applied for all editing operations, such as drawing simulation/analysis areas, drawing streets, modifying clutter/traffic matrices, etc.

Restore Defaults A button to restore the factory settings of the display options.


www.actix.com

For selecting a color (e.g. for label text or streets) the user can simply click on the respective color button. Then a small color chooser is shown the usage of which is explained in section 3.5.5.

A watermark can be faded in at the bottom of the viewing area which then would also be visible on all printouts. The customer can specify an image (e.g. a logo) and a text (e.g. a copyright message) in the watermark configuration dialog which can be opened by using the Configure… button from the display settings dialog. The watermark configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 3-18, an exemplary viewing area with imprint watermark can be seen in Fig. 3-19.

Fig. 3-18 Watermark configuration dialog

Fig. 3-19 Viewing area with imprint watermark

3.5.4 Layer Settings Besides the general display settings, each layer has its own settings for presentation. The layer settings dialog summarizes those settings. It has a subdialog for a flexible configuration of the color scale for the layer. Both dialogs can be quickly accessed by clicking into the respective sensitive areas in the black legend of the currently active layer as apparent from Fig. 3-20.

The layer settings dialog (see Fig. 3-21) can also be opened by selecting the entry Settings… from the respective layer item’s context menu. Its parameters are explained in Table 3-11.


www.actix.com

Fig. 3-20 Quick access to the layer settings

Fig. 3-21 Layer settings dialog


www.actix.com

Table 3-11 Layer settings parameters


Content Description

Caption The layer caption. This name is shown in the black legend in the viewing area.

Tree Label The label of the layer item in the tree window.

Unit The unit applied for the layer. If this field is left empty, no color scale will be shown in the upper part of the black legend. If the color scale shall still be shown, a white space should be entered for the unit.

Layer Details Additional comments for the layer. They are displayed in the lower part of the black legend.

Options

Customize Colors and Ranges…

A button to open the color palette dialog.

Interpolate Image A checkbox to choose interpolation between adjacent pixels of a layer.

Use High-Contrast Pixels A checkbox to choose display of a slim border line around each individual layer pixel. This option is particularly suited for displaying measurement data.

Draw Contour Lines A checkbox to display contour lines instead of the actual layers. The number of contour levels and their colors are determined by the color palette of that layer (see section 3.5.5).

Discrete Colors A checkbox to apply a discrete color representation to the layer. This feature is useful for assigning each cell a dedicated color for mapped surface plots (plots with cell-specific values mapped onto the best server cell areas). On the contrary, for normal surface plots with specific values in each pixel, this option should not be used.

Gray Scale Image A checkbox to switch the layer presentation to gray scale. Only available for image layers.

Transparent Color Range A checkbox to apply a transparent color range (spun between two colors) to a layer. All pixels of the current layer that belong to the specified color range according to the active color palette are presented transparently.

Color 1/2 The two colors that span the transparent color range for the layer presentation. Make sure that the colors are not too different – otherwise the color space could not be properly delimited.

Opacity A slider to define the opacity (alpha blending factor) between 0% and 100% for the layer.

Scale Factor The scale factor of the layer. The displayed scale factor is automatically adjusted whenever the display is rescaled by a zoom operation. It can be set to some dedicated scale factors by using the pre-defined list field entries. The latter option is recommended for true-to-scale printing of the viewing area.

Information

Legend Scale Limits The legend scale limits are shown here for information. They can be modified in the color palette dialog.

Orientation and Resolution The position of the upper left corner and the pixel resolution of the layer are given here for information.


www.actix.com


Layer Template / Layer uses template ‘LayerTemplate’

Save these Settings as Template for all layers of this type / Update Layer Template to these settings

If this checkbox is active when the OK button of the dialog is pressed, then the settings of the current layer are stored in the workspace as template for all layers of the same type. In the sequel, all plots of this type will adopt these layer settings.

Open Display Settings… A button to open the general display settings dialog.

Open Vector Settings… A button to open the vector layer settings dialog (only enabled for vector layers).

If the layer settings dialog of a vector layer is opened, the Open Vector Settings… button is enabled. By clicking it the vector layer settings dialog is opened as shown in Fig. 3-22. In particular, if the vector layer contains data fields, the user can specify a field name to be visualized. Furthermore, for point data a symbol and a symbol size can be chosen.

Fig. 3-22 Vector layer settings dialog

Several layers can be overlaid and displayed simultaneously. To this end, the alpha blending factor (opacity) and transparency of a color range can be controlled for each layer individually. By reducing the opacity of a layer it becomes more and more transparent such that lower layers can shine through.

Furthermore, certain colors of a layer can be set completely transparent by defining a proper transparent color range. Then lower layer get visible at the respective pixels. The transparency feature can also be used to selectively mask a certain value range of a parameter which is very helpful especially for the analysis of network related data in a surface plot.

If the checkbox Save these Settings as Template for all layers of this type / Update Layer Template to these settings is active when the layer settings are confirmed by clicking the OK button of the dialog, these settings are stored in the workspace as template for layers of the same type. This way the user can define his own layer appearance settings and store them in his workspace. As an example, the user may define special color palette settings for a Best Pilot Power plot and remember those settings. Whenever a new Best Pilot Power plot will be created after that, the previously stored layer settings will be retrieved from the workspace and are applied for the new layer.

The layer settings include the color palette definition which is described in the following section. After a user-defined layer definition has been added to the workspace, the workspace can be saved into a winesworkspace.ini file as described in section 3.5.1.2. Furthermore, the workspace is automatically saved on shutdown of Radioplan, so all user-defined layer settings are retrieved when Radioplan is restarted next time.

3.5.5 Color Palette Data in surface plots is displayed using a color palette. A value at a certain position is shown in that color that corresponds to its scaling in the color palette between the maximum and minimum values.


www.actix.com

3.5.5.1 Inspecting the Color Palette of a Layer

The color palette of the currently active layer can be configured in the color palette dialog that is shown in a separate window when clicking the Customize Colors and Ranges… button, refer to Fig. 3-23. Alternatively, a quicker access to this dialog is provided by clicking into the upper part of the black legend area where the color scale is shown (see Fig. 3-20). The usage of this dialog is described in Table 3-12.

Fig. 3-23 Color palette dialog

Table 3-12 Color palette configuration


Scale Limits

Autoscale A flag to automatically retrieve the scale limits from the extreme values of the current layer.

Minimum The minimum value of the scale limits.

Maximum The maximum value of the scale limits.

Colors

Insert Entry Inserts a new color entry in the color palette below the currently marked entry.

Append Entry Appends a new color entry at the end of the color palette.

Delete Entry Deletes the currently marked color entry. The same function can also be performed by typing <Delete>.

Move Up Moves the currently marked color entry one step up.

Move Down Moves the currently marked color entry one step down.


www.actix.com


Use Shading A radiobutton to use a shaded color palette. The colors of the color palette are equally spaced between the scale limits. Moreover, values between the discrete interpolation values of the palette colors are smoothly shaded between the corresponding colors.

Use Color Steps A radiobutton to use discrete color steps. The distinct colors of the color palette each cover certain value ranges that are defined by giving a minimum value for each color. The colors are not shaded; instead, the discrete colors are used for all values in the respective ranges.

Create Transition… A button to define a color palette by transition over a certain color range.

A button to mirror the currently defined color palette.

Legend Presets

Load Loads the selected color legend preset into the color palette table in the upper part of the dialog.

Update Updates the currently selected user-defined color legend preset with the current contents of the color palette table in the upper part of the dialog.

Delete Deletes the currently selected user-defined color legend preset.

Add… Adds a new user-defined color legend preset. All current color palette settings are stored in the new preset.

Replace Current Default with these Colors

If this flag is selected when the dialog is closed by clicking the OK button, the currently active color palette is stored as default in the user’s registry.

In case the option Use Color Steps is chosen, the spacing between the discrete color ranges can even be non-linear. In order to specify the minimum values for each color range, another column appears to the right of the colors. This situation is shown in Fig. 3-24.

Fig. 3-24 Defining an individual color scale with discrete colors

Each color of the color palette can be modified by clicking on the corresponding color field in the table and choosing the desired color from the appearing color dialog, see Fig. 3-25.


www.actix.com

Fig. 3-25 Color dialog

3.5.5.2 Creating a Transition Color Palette

In addition to the manual definition of the distinct colors of a palette, it is also possible to automatically create a color transition with a defined number of values. This function can be invoked by pressing the Create Transition… button in the color palette dialog. A dialog is opened which is shown in Fig. 3-26. Here all parameters of the color transition can be specified as described in Table 3-13. The new color palette is immedialy created when the Create button is hit; the previous palette is overridden then.

Fig. 3-26 Color transition dialog

Table 3-13 Color transition settings


Max. Threshold The maximum value of the color palette.

Max. Threshold Color The color that is associated with the maximum value.

Min. Threshold The minimum value of the color palette.

Min. Threshold Color The color that is associated with the minimum value.

Step Size The step size from one color entry to the next between maximum and minimum. The range between maximum and minimum divided by the step size determines the number of colors in the palette.

Color Wheel Direction

Clockwise or Counter-Clockwise

A radio button to move clockwise or counter-clockwise from the maximum to the minimum color through the hue/saturation/brightness color space.

3.5.5.3 Using Legend Presets

In order to ease the definition of a color palette, the dialog offers some pre-defined color palettes in the Legend Presets pane. There are three types of legend presets as shown in Table 3-14. The preset “Current Default” contains the color palette settings that were latest stored in the user’s registry when having the Replace Current Default with these Colors flag being set. Factory preset are delivered with the Radioplan installation; later users can add their own legend presets.


www.actix.com

Table 3-14 Legend preset types

Symbol Legend Preset Type

Current default

Factory preset

User-defined preset

A legend preset can be chosen by either double-clicking on the respective entry or by selecting a preset and then press the Load button. All previous manipulations of the color palette will be overridden in that case.

The user can add an arbitrary number of user-defined color legend presets. These settings are persistently stored in the user’s registry. This is very useful for often used parameters that shall always be shown with the same scaling (i.e. to compare between plots).

In order to create a new color legend preset, first the desired settings should be adjusted. Then press the Add… button and specify a legend name in the appearing dialog. This name will then be appended in the legend presets list. An existing entry can be updated by pressing the Update button; it can be deleted by pressing the Delete button.

3.5.5.4 Import and Export of Legend Presets

It is possible to store the currently defined legend presets in an ini file in order to retain them for future use. This can be accomplished by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Export Legend Presets…. The default location for the legend.ini file is the Radioplan user folder (see section 3.5.1 and also [R-Admin]).

Likewise, a legend.ini file can be imported into Radioplan by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Import Legend Presets…. Immediately, the newly loaded legend presets

are available as legend templates in the color palette dialog.

3.6 Paint Module for Graphics Layers

3.6.1 Creating a Graphics Layer All graphics layer functions are controlled by the graphics toolbar. This toolbar can be displayed by entering the graphics painting mode using the icon (tooltip Draw Graphics Overlays) from the paint toolbar to the left. The graphics toolbar is shown in Fig. 3-27. This toolbar window can be freely moved on the screen and could even be docked at the preferred toolbar places of the application window.

Fig. 3-27 Graphics toolbar

As long as the graphics painting mode is active, a snapping grid is shown in the viewing area. The distance between the grid points is determined by the configured grid size which could be changed by using the icon (tooltip Grid Size) from the paint toolbar to the left.

Before any graphics element can be drawn in the graphics painting mode, first a graphics

layer needs to be created. This is done by clicking the left icon in the graphics toolbar (tooltip Add Overlay). Then a small dialog is shown where the user can specify a name for the new graphics layer, see Fig. 3-28.


www.actix.com

Fig. 3-28 Specifying a name for a graphics layer

Once the creation of the new graphics layer has been confirmed by pressing the OK button in this dialog, the layer is created and listed on top of the Layers tab in the tree window. The new layer is initially empty; its alpha blending factor (opacity) is 100%.

Graphics layers are also used e.g. for showing neighbor list relationships of a cell or for highlighting a certain site for finding it. Such special layers are like normal graphics layers that could even be used for drawing, if needed. However, they initially have a lower alpha blending factor.

The graphics painting mode can be left by changing to another painting mode (one of the other icons of the painting toolbar) or leaving any painting mode by using the icon (top most icon of the painting toolbar). Then the graphics toolbar and the snapping grid disappear. Any graphics layers and their content that have been produced so far are retained.

3.6.2 Drawing in a Graphics Layer The graphics toolbar offers several paint functions (lines, polygons, and text) as well as different property controls for graphics elements. These icons are described in Table 3-15.

Table 3-15 Graphics toolbar controls

Icon Description

Create a new graphics layer, refer to section 3.6.1. This is a prerequisite for any drawing action.

Draw a straight line.

Draw a polygon.

Insert arbitrary text.

Toggle arrow heads for line ends.

Toggle filled status for polygons.

Shows the drawing settings dialog, refer to section 3.6.2.1.

Any graphics element that is drawn is appended to the currently active graphics layer. In order to select one of the drawing functions for line, polygon, or text, it is required that a graphics layer is both active (i.e. selected) and visible (i.e. checkbox set). If no graphics layer is active or if the active one is not visible, the icons of the drawing functions remain gray and cannot be chosen.

3.6.2.1 Drawing Settings

The properties of the graphics elements to be drawn can be influenced by the three icons to the right of the graphics toolbar. The two left of them are just toggle buttons to add an arrow to the end of a line and to fill a drawn polygon.


www.actix.com

The last icon opens the drawing settings dialog that can be used to set the line width and the color used for lines and polygons. To change the color, just click on the color button and select the new color from the appearing color chooser. The drawing settings dialog is shown in Fig. 3-29.

Fig. 3-29 Drawing settings dialog

All currently active property settings are thenceforth applied to any graphics drawing action.

3.6.2.2 Drawing a Line

To draw a straight line, select the icon in the graphics toolbar. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. The start and end vertex of the line are then set with the left mouse button while their positions are snapped to the chosen grid size. The drawing command can be aborted by pressing the <ESC> key as long as the end vertex has not been set yet.

After the second (i.e. end) vertex has been set, the new line is shown with the selected properties in terms of color, line width, and arrow status.

3.6.2.3 Drawing a Polygon

To draw a polygon, select the icon in the graphics toolbar. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. The distinct vertices of the polygon are then set with the left mouse button while their positions are snapped to the chosen grid size. The last vertex is marked with a double click of the left mouse button. The drawing command can be aborted by pressing the <ESC> key as long as the last vertex has not been set yet.

After the last vertex has been set, the polygon is closed automatically to the first vertex and is shown with the selected properties in terms of color, line width, and fill status.

3.6.2.4 Inserting Text

To insert text in the graphics layer, select the icon in the graphics toolbar. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. The upper left corner of the text to be inserted is then set with the left mouse button according to the snapping grid. Then a dialog is shown that can be used to enter the text and to define its properties, see Fig. 3-30.

Fig. 3-30 Text insertion dialog


www.actix.com

The big text field in the lower part of the dialog is for text label itself. The other controls in the upper part of the dialog are for determining the text properties. So the font, the font size (in points), the text color (upper color button) and an optional background color (lower color button) can be specified. If the flag Draw Background Box is set, the text would be surrounded by a box that is filled with the background color.

After the label settings have been commited by pressing the OK button of this dialog, the text is inserted at the defined position.

3.6.3 Deleting Graphics Layers Once a graphics layer has been created, it is retained persistently in the project. So after closing and re-opening the project, all its contents is still available.

A graphics layer can be deleted by using the according entries from the layer context menu. Further, all graphics layers can be deleted in one step by using the menu entry View

Remove All Overlays.

3.7 Tree Window The tree window lets the user control all project data. It consists of four tabs: Projects tab, Configuration tab, Results tab, and Layers tab.

In general, each tab presents its data in a tree structure. Each tree item (leaf) has a context menu that can be accessed by right-clicking the item. It is possible to drag and drop items to a different position in the tree if the data structure allows this. For example, a cell can only be dragged from one site to another; but it cannot be dragged to a network controller (RNC/BSC). All changes that are made in the tree structure are directly updated in the underlying database.

3.8 Viewing Area The viewing area can display data in three different kinds:

• surface plot (simulation/analysis area, pixel-based input/output data),

• chart graph (diagram, histogram), or

• table (measurement data, result parameters, summary report, etc.).

These viewing options are used to present all kinds of network related data. More details on the different viewing options can be found in conjunction with the explanation of the network data evaluation in section 12.3.

The standard toolbar provides a quick access to switch between the different viewing options. The respective icons are listed in Table 3-16. These buttons are only active if a view of the corresponding kind has already been created.

Table 3-16 Icons for different viewing options

Icon Description

Show surface plot

Show diagram chart

Show histogram chart

Show table (not result summary report)

Show result summary report


www.actix.com

3.9 Zoom Functions The scaling of the presented data in the viewing area is basically controlled by the zoom functions, irrespective of the type of presentation (surface plot, chart graph, or table). The following functions are available:

• Zoom In: Shows an enlarged (thus smaller) portion of the current view by selecting View Zoom Zoom In or by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom In) from the standard toolbar. Alternatively, the shortkey <F2> can be used.

• Zoom Out: Shows a down-scaled (thus larger) portion of the current view by selecting View Zoom Zoom Out or by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom Out) from the standard toolbar. Alternatively, the shortkey <F3> can be used.

• Default Zoom: In surface plots, this function shows the complete area that is covered by configuration data (e.g. pathloss matrices). If there are configuration data placed outside the simulation area, then this view will also show these regions. It can be chosen by selecting View Zoom Fit to Window or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Window) from the standard toolbar. Alternatively, the shortkey <F4> can be used.

In surface plots, two additional default zoom actions are supported: Zooming on the simulation area or the analysis area. These functions are helpful to quickly focus on these regions that are especially important for the network data analysis. They can be accomplished as follows:

• Zoom on simulation area: This view is shown by selecting View Zoom Fit to Simulation Area or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Simulation Area) from the standard toolbar. Alternatively, the shortkey <Shift-F4> can be used.

• Zoom on analysis area: This view is shown by selecting View Zoom Fit to

Analysis Area or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Analysis Area) from the standard toolbar. Alternatively, the shortkey <Ctrl-F4> can be used.

Additionally, there is a graphical zoom mode for surface plots that can be entered by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom) from the paint toolbar to the left. The user can then draw a dragbox with the mouse pointer by holding down the left mouse button. When releasing the mouse button, the viewing area is scaled to the just drawn dragbox.

For tables, it is also possible to zoom in and out using the mouse wheel while holding down the <Ctrl> key.

Any zoom actions in surface plots can be undone by using the icon (tooltip Zoom to previous scaling) from the standard toolbar.

If a chart graph is displayed in the viewing area, then zooming with the mouse pointer also works in the default mode, i.e. the zoom mode need not be chosen to scale the diagrams.

3.10 Message Window and Status Bar The message window is for showing messages including warnings, errors, and status indications of the distinct modules during the usage of Radioplan. For example, messages originating from the underlying database or simulator output messages are displayed in the message window.

The different types of messages have according prefixes: ERR for errors, WRN for warnings, and MSG for other messages.

The status bar shows the current status of Radioplan. If the mouse pointer is located in the viewing area, relevant data as, e.g., the current position is shown there. The status bar is also used to display the tooltip texts when the mouse pointer is positioned over an item providing tooltips. If an action is started that takes some moments as, e.g., loading data into the database, a progress bar is shown in the statusbar that informs the user about the current working status.


www.actix.com

3.11 Online Help Radioplan has a context sensitive online help system. The help dialog can be accessed from any situation (in particular in dialogs) in Radioplan by typing <F1>. This leads to the relevant help page.

Furthermore, the GUI elements of Radioplan can be investigated with the help function

available from the icon (tooltip Help) in the standard toolbar. Then the mouse pointer turns into a symbol. When clicking on a GUI element, the help system is opened with the relevant page.

The general help page can be opened by using the menu entry ? Help Topics.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 67

www.actix.com

4 Getting Started with Radioplan The main focus of this chapter is to demonstrate the ease of working with Radioplan. This tutorial is instructive for understanding the handling of the different network configuration items while setting up a complete network layout.

A project with a simple network configuration is created and properly configured. Then the project is ready for usage with the different Radioplan modules. The entire demo project configuration can also be found in the provided examples directory, see appendix 13.4.1.

4.1 Setting Up a Demo Project On start of the Radioplan application, the viewing area to the right is initially empty (light gray). To create a new project, type Ctrl-N, or click the icon in the standard toolbar beneath the menu bar, or choose File New Project. The new project will have an initial size of 1 km2. The default project name is “New Project” which appears in the project list to the left. This situation is depicted in Fig. 4-1.

Fig. 4-1 A newly created project

Open the project settings dialog by double-clicking on the project item in the Projects tab of the tree window to the left. The project dialog appears where you should change the project title to “Demo Project”.

Now the dialog should look as in Fig. 4-2.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-2 Project settings dialog of the demo project

Next, the whole network setup to be investigated has to be configured. The configuration data can be inspected in the Configuration tab of the tree window. As apparent from the configuration data treeview in Fig. 4-3, the network setup is divided into four groups:

• areas (polygons),

• environment,

• user behavior, and

• RAN setup.

Fig. 4-3 Configuration tab of the tree window giving the hierarchical configuration data structure

4.2 RAN Configuration We start configuring the RAN setup. A simple UMTS network with two sites with three-sectored cells shall be defined. Please note that initially only a UMTS network layer was generated in the new project. It is shown in the left part of the views toolbar as “UMTS::0::Default”. For the purpose of this demo project, we do not need to add further network layers.

4.2.1 First Site To set a site at a certain position in the simulation area, you must enter the Site and Cell Add Mode. This is accomplished by clicking the icon (tooltip Add Sites and Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. Then a snapping grid is shown.


www.actix.com

You should change the grid size to 50m by clicking the icon (tooltip Grid Size) in the paint toolbar. In the appearing dialog, you can modify the grid size as shown in Fig. 4-4.

Fig. 4-4 Changing the grid size to 50m

Now you can place the first site at the position (250m, 250m). Locate the mouse pointer at the given position and hit the right mouse key. A context menu appears where you choose the entry Add Site + 3 Cells. Immediately, the new site is shown in the viewing area, and the hierarchical network setup in the Configuration tab of the tree window is updated accordingly. The current situation is shown in Fig. 4-5. The cells of the site are currently symbolized by orange arrows because no antenna has been chosen yet for them.

Fig. 4-5 Network setup with first site

Note that together with the site, also three associated cells and a superordinate network controller have been created. This is apparent from the tree window as shown in Fig. 4-6.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-6 Hierarchy of network controller, site, and cells

4.2.1.1 Network Controller Configuration

For this demo, the parameter settings of the newly created network controller do not need to be changed. If desired, the configuration dialog for the network controller can be opened by double clicking the network controller item in the tree window. The dialog should look as shown in Fig. 4-7.

Fig. 4-7 Network controller configuration dialog

4.2.1.2 Site Configuration

Next the site settings are to be adjusted. Open the site configuration dialog by double clicking the respective item in the tree window and make the following simple change:

• Change the ID to “Site 1”.

The resulting site configuration should look as given in Fig. 4-8.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-8 Site configuration dialog

4.2.1.3 Antenna Import

Prior to configuring the cells, first an antenna has to be imported. Antennas are like templates that are referenced from a cell. The import is done by choosing Import Antenna… from the context menu of the Antennas node in the tree window. Then a file open dialog appears that shows all available antennas in the library by default. You should choose the Antenna_6deg_Tilt.cfg file. The new antenna is added to the Antennas node in the tree window below the No Family category. You can inspect both the horizontal and the vertical diagrams from the antenna settings dialog which can be opened by double clicking the antenna item. Then the antenna diagrams can be displayed by pressing either of the Show Diagram buttons. Fig. 4-9 shows the vertical diagram of the dipole antenna.

Fig. 4-9 Vertical antenna diagram of a sector antenna

4.2.1.4 Cell Configuration

After the antenna has been imported, the cells can be configured. For this you should first leave the Site and Cell Add Mode and return to the normal mode by clicking the icon in the paint toolbar to the left.


www.actix.com

The cell configuration dialog is opened by double clicking the respective cell symbol in the viewing area. This is shown in Fig. 4-10. In addition to opening the cell configuration dialog this way, the cell symbol is selected on the screen and the according cell item highlighted in the tree window to the left.

Fig. 4-10 Opening a cell configuration dialog by double clicking a cell

You should make the following adjustments for the cell:

• Modify the ID to “Cell 1-1”.

• Choose the sector antenna from the antenna pattern list field. This is the antenna that has just been imported.

• Set the height over ground to 25m. This value is interpreted relative to the altitude value in the site which was set to 0m previously (default).

All other settings may remain unchanged for now. The resulting cell configuration should look as given in Fig. 4-11.

Fig. 4-11 Cell configuration dialog

The cell is shown then as a black arrow in the surface plot instead of an orange one. Now the other two cells can be configured accordingly. Their names should be “Cell 1-2” and “Cell 1-3”.


www.actix.com

4.2.2 Second Site Likewise, a second site shall be created in the very same way as the first one. Place the second site at the position (750m, 750m). Make sure that you are in the Site and Cell Add Mode , otherwise you could not graphically create the new site. Make similar adjustments of the configurations of the second site and its associated cells. In the IDs you should denote them by “Site 2” and “Cell 2-1”, “Cell 2-2”, “Cell 2-3” accordingly. Of course, the network controller need not be changed because there is only a single network controller in the network that all sites are connected to. After the second site has been configured properly, the network setup should look as shown in Fig. 4-12.

Fig. 4-12 Demo network setup with two sites

Now you can leave the Site and Cell Add Mode and return to the normal mode by clicking the icon in the paint toolbar.

4.2.3 Pathloss of the Cells Each cell needs an associated pathloss matrix. To import one for the first cell, choose Import Pathloss Matrix… from this cell’s context menu. The file open dialog for the pathloss matrix is shown. Select the pathloss matrix freespace_pathloss_pl3.cfg that is located in a subdirectory of the Node B configuration data in the library. This pathloss matrix models free space propagation with a pathloss exponent of 3.

Now the resulting best received pilot power can be displayed in the simulation area by clicking the icon (tooltip Plot Received Power) in the views toolbar. The plot settings in the appearing dialog can simply be confirmed by pressing the OK button. As you will notice, the pathloss matrix is still misaligned. Open the settings dialog of the pathloss matrix by double clicking its item in the configuration data tree. Please make sure to hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the menu entry. In the appearing dialog there is a button Synchronize Position with Site/Cell. Click this button to align the lowest attenuation value in the pathloss matrix with the cell position. Note that the coordinates of the upper left corner of the pathloss matrix are changed. After leaving the settings dialog again, the best received pilot power plot must be recreated and the new situation as in Fig. 4-13 is reached.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-13 Cell 1-1 with pathloss matrix

The pathloss matrix of the other cells is created by copying the first one and dragging it to the other cell items in the configuration data tree. Just hold down the <Ctrl> key and drag the new matrix with the mouse to the next cell and drop it there as soon as that cell item is selected under the mouse pointer. Notice the small + sign beside the mouse pointer that indicates the simultaneous duplicating action while dragging the matrix item. This operation is shown in Fig. 4-14.

drag&drop

copying

Fig. 4-14 Dragging&dropping + copying the pathloss matrix

This action shall be repeated until all cells have their pathloss matrices. Make sure that the pathloss matrices of the cells at the second site are properly positioned. You can center them to the antenna position in the way as described above. If all pathloss matrices have been configured correctly, the network setup will look as shown in Fig. 4-15.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-15 RAN setup of the demo project

4.3 User Configuration The user behavior is summarized in the UE profile that consists of three subprofiles: equipment profile, mobility profile, and service profile. The subprofiles are like templates that are referenced from a UE profile. Now we will create two different UE profiles with the following specifications:

Table 4-1 UE profiles for the demo project

UE Profile

Subprofiles Description

Speech UE

R99 Terminal

Street Movement Vehicular

Speech

User with a circuit-switched speech service at 12.2kbit/s, moving on streets at vehicular speed.

Internet UE

R99 Terminal

Straight Movement Pedestrian

Internet

User with a packet-switched web browsing service at 384kbit/s, moving straight forward at pedestrian speed.

For demonstration purposes, the user configuration in this sample project uses several services. Such a detailed configuration is usually only needed for network simulations. For network optimization, typically a simplified user modeling with a single, generic service is sufficient.

4.3.1 Equipment Profile Import the equipment profile that is specified in Table 4-1 from the library by choosing Import Equipment Profile… from the context menu of the Equipment Profiles item of the configuration data tree. This is shown in Fig. 4-16. The correct subdirectory in the library is already preselected in the file open dialog. The configuration file is called R99.cfg. Once this equipment profile has been loaded, you can inspect the parameter settings of it by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-16 Importing an equipment profile

4.3.2 Mobility Profile Likewise, import the mobility profiles from the library by choosing Import Mobility Profile… from the context menu of the Mobility Profiles item of the configuration data tree. In the appearing file open dialog, choose the movement models Street Movement Vehicular.cfg and Straight Movement Pedestrian.cfg for importing. You can inspect the parameter settings of the mobility profiles by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree.

4.3.3 Service Profile Import the service profiles from the library by choosing Import Service Profile… from the context menu of the Service Profiles item of the configuration data tree. The service profiles for the demo project are called Speech.cfg and Internet.cfg. You can inspect the parameter settings of the service profiles by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree.

4.3.4 Traffic Each service profile shall have an own associated traffic matrix. A traffic matrix contains pixel-based relative/absolute traffic density values.

We will create a new traffic matrix each for the service profiles and define a simple traffic distribution in the matrix. The first traffic matrix is assigned to the service profile “Speech” by choosing Add new Matrix from the context menu of the service profile. In the appearing matrix resolution dialog the pixel size for the new matrix can be specified. You should enter 25m as a reasonable setting. The new matrix is added to the configuration data tree below the service profile. Note that this matrix is initialized with ones, corresponding to a traffic of 1user per square kilometer. The traffic can be displayed by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix.

Now let us draw a rectangular region in the traffic matrix where users should be created. It is recommended that this region should cover almost the complete simulation area and only leave the areas close to the margins empty. For this one has to enter the traffic region drawing mode by clicking the icon (tooltip: Add Traffic Region) from the left toolbar. The rectangle is drawn vertex by vertex with the left mouse button. The final vertex is set with a double click. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key. After the last vertex was set, a dialog appears where you have to specify a (relative) traffic value for the drawn polygon in the lower field. Since the initial matrix was filled with ones, you should change the setting to e.g. 40 Erl/km2, see Fig. 4-17.

Fig. 4-17 Setting the traffic value for a new traffic region

The resulting traffic matrix should look approximately as in Fig. 4-18.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-18 Traffic matrix of the “Speech” service profile

Repeat the procedure for the second service profile “Internet”. Now the region where UEs are activated should be confined to the right half of the simulation area around Site 2. Here the traffic density in the drawn polygon should be set to e.g. 5 Erl/km2. The matrix should look approximately as in Fig. 4-19.

Fig. 4-19 Traffic matrix of the “Internet” service profile


www.actix.com

4.3.5 UE Profile Create a first UE profile by choosing Add UE Profile from the context menu of the UE Profiles item in the configuration data tree. The new profile called “Added UE” immediately appears beneath the UE Profiles item. Enter its settings dialog by double-clicking the item. Change the ID to “Speech UE” and select the three profiles (equipment, mobility, and service) as indicated in Table 4-1. The settings are shown in Fig. 4-20.

Fig. 4-20 Defining the UE profile “Speech UE”

To define the second UE profile, just duplicate the first one by choosing Duplicate Profile from its context menu. Change its name to “Internet UE” and choose the other subprofiles as indicated in Table 4-1. The settings for this UE profile are shown in Fig. 4-21.

Fig. 4-21 Defining the UE profile “Internet UE”

4.4 Environment Configuration The environment consists of clutter data, DEM matrix, and optionally streets. Usually such data come from geographic databases and can be imported from there into Radioplan. So here it shall only be demonstrated to draw some streets.


www.actix.com

4.4.1 Streets

Normally streets are only needed for network simulations. There they can be used for the street movement model. Otherwise, street vectors could simply be imported as a background image.

Streets can be drawn as polylines in the streets drawing mode. Enter this mode by clicking the icon (tooltip: Add Streets) from the paint toolbar to the left. Before you start drawing make sure that the grid is fairly rough. Possibly modify the grid by clicking the icon from the left toolbar. In the appearing dialog you can enter the new grid size (e.g. 50m).

Try to draw a rectangular street quarter with the mouse. Each street corner (vertex of the polyline) is set with the left mouse button. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key. The last corner is set with a double-click. Then a dialog appears where the street category of the street just drawn must be given. Select the only available street category “Category1” (default street category) as shown in Fig. 4-22.

Fig. 4-22 Selecting a category for a newly drawn street

The street categories can be edited in the street settings dialog. Open this dialog by double-clicking the Streets item in the configuration data tree. Here you can change the category name, enter a description, and specify the street width of that category. Modify the default category as shown in Fig. 4-23.

Fig. 4-23 Defining a street category

The resulting street could look like in Fig. 4-24.


www.actix.com

Fig. 4-24 The “Highway”

4.5 Next Steps Now your first little sample network is completely set up and ready for more. You can use the different Radioplan modules (e.g. simulation or optimization) to further explore Radioplan. Detailed information on the usage of these modules you can find in the corresponding chapters of this user guide or in the specialized documentations.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 81

www.actix.com

5 Project Handling Working with Radioplan is basically working with projects. A project comprises all configuration, measurement, or result data of a certain investigation scenario and is embedded in the entire network planning and operation workflow.

5.1 General Project Setup

A project defines the general radio network setup in a certain geographic region. The complete network configuration is managed in the project, and so are the simulation results and performance measurements. In order to obtain an improved network setup, the project management supports loading and comparing different results from slightly modified configurations within the same project or even between different projects.

Projects are stored in a database. All available projects are shown in the Projects tab of the tree window. The project titles need not immediately be unique. However, it is good practice to choose unambiguous project titles. For the currently open project, the network configuration data are accessible from the Configuration tab, all loaded network performance data are contained in the Results tab, and all created surface plot layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window.

5.1.1 Project Folders Projects can be hierarchically organized in the Projects tab. New folders and subfolders can easily be created by using the New Folder entry from the main node’s or any other folder’s context menu. A new folder has the default name “New Folder”. Project folders can be renamed by using their context menu entry Rename Folder or by simply clicking the folder item twice in the tree window. Then the new name can be edited. A sample project hierarchy is shown in Fig. 5-1.

Fig. 5-1 Sample project hierarchy

The hierarchy of the project tree can be reordered according to the user’s requirements. Folders and projects can easily be shifted by the mouse pointer inside the tree with a simple drag&drop action. Thus it is possible to properly group projects in nested folders


www.actix.com

with arbitrary depth. Unused folders can be deleted by using the context menu entry Delete Folder(s). The complete context menu of the projects folders is shown in Fig. 5-2.

Creates a new project folder below this oneDeletes this project folder incl. subfoldersRenames this project folder

Refreshes the tree presentation

Fig. 5-2 Project folder context menu

Please note that in case of using the function Delete Folder(s), the respective folder will be deleted including all subfolders and projects contained in it. In order to avoid undesired deletion, the user is prompted with an alert dialog to confirm the action.

5.1.2 Project Actions Due to the complex nature of mobile communications systems, the construction of a project right from scratch would be very tedious. Moreover, a frequent requirement is to use existing data from other entities of the radio network planning/configuration workflow in the network simulation. Thus working with projects in Radioplan means to use and rely on predefined configuration components. This way the convenience of usage is increased remarkably. In particular, the following opportunities are offered to the user:

• Build a new project by using preconfigured items from the library.

• Import/load a project into the database:

▫ from a Radio Network Planning (RNP) tool,

▫ from another Radioplan database, or

▫ from configuration files (in the proprietary Radioplan format).

• Use and modify an existing project from the built-in database.

• Merge projects inside the built-in database.

• Save/export a project or single network items from the database.

Read more about the different ways of working with projects in the subsequent sections. Most of the project handling actions are available from the context menu of a project, too. The menu items are described in Fig. 5-3.

Shows the project settings dialog (only for open project)

Opens this project (only for another project)Duplicates this projectCreates Sub-project based on this projectDeletes this project

Updates the project and shows a parameter overview (only for open project)Opens a wizard for manipulating various project dataOpens a dialog to merge this project with another oneOpens a dialog to choose which Sub-Project to use for Synchronization

Shows project statistics overview (only for open project)

Deletes the result data stored in this project

Refreshes the tree presentation

Fig. 5-3 Project context menu


www.actix.com

5.2 Multi-Layer/Multi-Technology Projects Radioplan supports hierarchical cell structures (HCS) consisting of network layers. Each project can contain several of such network layers. A network layer is characterized by a radio technology.

Radioplan projects can generally manage multiple network layers and even multiple technologies simultaneously. A possibility to create a multi-layer project is to merge projects containing different network layers, see section 5.6.3 for details. Another possibility is to duplicate a network layer while choosing a different technology for the copied layer, see section 5.2.3 below.

5.2.1 Network Layer Management The network layers of a project are managed by the elements in the left part of the views toolbar.

The general network layer management is done in the network layer management dialog which can be opened by pressing the icon (tooltip Manage Network Layers) from the views toolbar. Alternatively, the user can choose File Current Project Manage Network Layers from the menu to open this dialog. A sample network layer setup is shown in Fig. 5-4, the various configuration items are described in Table 5-1.

Fig. 5-4 Network layer management dialog

Table 5-1 Network layer properties

Property Description

System The system technology of the network layer. The user can choose between ‘UMTS’, ‘CDMA’, ‘GSM’, ‘iDEN’, and ‘WiMAX’.

Frequency Band The frequency band of the network layer. This could be the ARFCN used by the network layer.

HCS The network layer ID. Within the same project, each network layer ID must be unique.

Priority For iDEN and GSM layers a priority can be set in order to support traffic assignment for concentric cells (Capital Planning Module)

Cells The number of cells currently assigned to the network layer (for information only).


www.actix.com

For the definition and management of network layers, the following rules should be followed:

• A new network layer can be created by pressing the Add… button on the lower left of the dialog.

• Always select a system technology and enter proper values for the frequency band and HCS.

• Only empty network layers (no cells assigned) can be deleted by pressing the X button to the right.

• It is possible to activate several network layers in a project simultaneously using the checkboxes at the left side of the dialog. However, all active network layers must belong to the same system technology.

• The currently active network layer is shown in the combo box to the left of the views toolbar. If several network layers are active, the string “Multiple Layers” is shown there. If only a single network layer shall be active, it can also quickly be selected from the combo box directly.

• At least one network layer must be active at any time.

5.2.2 Multi-Layer Project Structure Multi-layer/multi-technology projects are modeled in Radioplan by having common sites across technologies and network layers. A site is mainly characterized by its position and can have various system specific hardware parameters.

Each site can have cells of various technologies. And each cell is assigned to a network layer according to technology and frequency band. A cell contains all relevant system specific parameters. By having cells of different systems at the same site, site sharing and even antenna sharing can be modeled.

Table 5-2 shows the available system technologies with their associated cell symbols.

Table 5-2 Available cell symbols

Cell Symbol Description

UMTS cell

CDMA2000 cell

GSM cell

iDEN cell

WiMAX cell

The selected network layer(s) determine the network elements that are considered for any actions in Radioplan:

• All configuration plots (see section 3.4.1) only consider the currently active network layer(s).

• Network optimization is only performed for the currently active network layer(s).

• Network simulation is only performed for the currently active network layer(s).

• Measurement analysis and pathloss tuning can only be performed for the currently active network layer(s).


www.actix.com

In addition to the selection of the active network layer(s), the visibility of the network elements in the various layers can be controlled separately. This is done by the icon (tooltip Show only Active Layers) from the views toolbar. If this button is active, the visibility of the network elements is filtered to the currently active network layer(s). Otherwise, all network elements in the project are visible. Both the network elements in the configuration data tree to the left as well as in the viewing area are controlled by this visibility flag. The filter status is also indicated by a special icon at the Network Elements node item in the tree window.

5.2.3 Duplicating a Network Layer The network elements (cells, repeaters, additional antennas) of a network layer can be duplicated. During this action, the technology of the new network layer can be freely chosen. This function is particularly useful if a different technology network shall be rolled out based on the site configurations of an existing network.

The duplicate function is invoked by selecting the menu entry File Current Project Duplicate Network Layer…. Then the duplicate network layer dialog appears as shown in Fig. 5-5. The usage of this function is explained in Table 5-3.

Fig. 5-5 Duplicate network layer dialog

Table 5-3 Duplicate network layer setup


Source Network Layer

The user can choose a single network layer out of all existing ones in the project to be duplicated.

Target Network Layer

System The technology of the new network layer. One can choose from ‘UMTS’, ‘CDMA2000’, ‘GSM’, ‘iDEN’, and ‘WiMAX’.

Frequency Band The frequency band of the new network layer. This could be e.g. the ARFCN of the new network.

HCS The name of the HCS for the new network layer.

5.2.4 Applying Network Configurations from other Network Layers Similarly, network configurations can be copied from one network layer to another one. Initially, the target network layer must be active. Then this function can be invoked by selecting the menu entry File Current Project Apply Cell/Antenna Parameters from other Network Layers…. The according dialog appears that is shown in Fig. 5-6.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-6 Dialog for copying network configurations from other network layers

In the upper part of this dialog, one or more network layers can be chosen to retrieve their configurations. Multiple selection is possible by using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys. In the lower part of the dialog, different aspects of the network configuration can be chosen for being applied to the current network layer.

If no sector alias is defined for the cells of source and target network layer(s), the cells need to have identical names in order that the specified parameters can be copied from one network layer to another. If, however, cells of different network layers are associated by identical sector aliases (irrespective of their names), then this association is used for applying the cell parameters to the target network layer. Such sector aliases can be imported from Atoll, refer to [R-ASM].

5.3 User Rights Management In general, Radioplan is project oriented, which means that at a certain time only one project can be open. If the user wants to work with another project, the current project is closed. All project data are saved in the database automatically. The database is multiuser enabled such that several users can work with the same project data. It is possible to restrict the access to a certain project to a single user. The current access status of a project is symbolized by the project icon in the Projects tab according to the key given in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 Access restrictions of projects

Project Icon Description

Project with unrestricted access for all users

Project with unrestricted access for the owner (within brackets) only

Project access restricted to the user given in brackets (different user). The current user has no access to this project. However, it is possible to duplicate the project and work with the copy.

Sub-project (see section 5.11) with unrestricted access for all users. This icon can also appear together with the green or red lock symbol for showing the above mentioned access restrictions.

Currently open project (unrestricted access)

Read how to specify the owner of a project and how to select the access policy in section 6.2.

If the user wants to work with two or more projects simultaneously, Radioplan can be opened several times while using the same underlying multi-user enabled database.


www.actix.com

As another aspect of the user rights management, different user levels are available to allow or restrict the access to certain functions and controls of the application on a user individual basis. User levels and their special access rights can be configured by *.ini files. Read more on Radioplan user rights and their configuration in [R-Admin].

5.4 Creating a New Project For the case that no preconfigured project data are available, the user has the opportunity to build a new network configuration from scratch. In order to create such a new project, one has to perform the following steps:

• Choose File New Project from the menu. Alternatively, you can click the icon from the standard toolbar or type Ctrl-N.

• A new list entry in the Projects tab of the tree window appears.

The initially empty project will immediately be transferred to the Radioplan database. The project is automatically initialized with a default simulation area of 1 km2. However, no network elements are contained in the project yet. If an owner of the project was specified, the name is given within brackets behind the project title. By default, the login of the user who created the new project is taken as the owner.

Read more about how to edit the general project settings in section 6.2.

5.4.1 Library Integration If all parameters of a network configuration had to be configured manually this would be a tedious and error-prone work. In order to greatly simplify and automate this process, a representative set of preconfigured project items is provided with the installation in the library subdirectory of the Radioplan installation folder (see section 2.1.2 and also [R-Admin]).

When importing a new item into the network configuration, the user is prompted with a file open dialog that presents the available library items by default. Please, refer to chapter 4 where it is shown how to use the library to easily build a simple example configuration.

Furthermore, most of the configuration settings dialogs have a Default button that can be used to reset all parameters of that profile to pre-configured default values. These parameter settings are contained in the defaultparameters.ini file located in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]).

It is possible to extend the library by exporting certain simulation items into it that have been identified for future/general use. Especially the RAN items like network controller, sites, cells, and antennas, and the three user profiles for equipment, mobility, and service can be exported. Refer to section 5.8.5 for a more detailed description on this.

5.5 Project Data Import Usually, a radio network setup that has been previously planned in Radioplan or another RNP tool can be imported into the current Radioplan database to further improve and optimize it, to validate the radio network quality and to adjust the RRM algorithm parameters. A network configuration can also be imported from the OSS. As an alternative, it is possible to load a network configuration from Radioplan’s own file format.

5.5.1 Importing a Project from an RNP Tool Radioplan provides several interfaces to import entire project configurations from other RNP tools. The simplest form of import is just a file based import, but e.g. in case of the


www.actix.com

ATOLL Synchronization Module (ASM), also a fully integrated COM based bidirectional data exchange is supported. The project import can be invoked from the File Import submenu. Further import interfaces can be added at short notice.

5.5.2 Importing Network Configuration Data from the OSS Radioplan supports the import of network configuration from the OSS in certain formats. The benefit of this function is that the imported network configuration would directly reflect the parameter settings in the live network without the need to maintain the data in an RNP tool.

OSS network configuration data does not contain any map data (e.g. clutter, DEM, pathloss matrices etc.). Still the network configuration data available from the OSS is sufficient for several Radioplan Modules. In conjunction with performance measurement data from the live networks (e.g. MMR data or switch counters), such Radioplan Modules allow to perform network optimization entirely based on live network data.

Please refer to the Automatic Parameter Optimization Module and the Automatic Neighbor List Planning Module, for example.

An OSS network configuration is imported by choosing the menu entry File Import OSS Network Configuration…. A dialog appears where the user can select a network configuration file and an optional filter polygon for the network cluster. This dialog is shown in Fig. 5-7.

Fig. 5-7 OSS network configuration data import dialog

If this dialog is confirmed without further option, the selected network configuration will be imported as a new project. On the other hand, the network configuration of the currently open project can be updated with the selected network configuration file by checking the option Update Current Open Project. In case of creating a new project, next the user is prompted with the projection settings dialog where the projection and display coordinate systems can be selected. After that the network configuration is imported.

5.5.3 Importing a Project from another Radioplan Database Sometimes it might be necessary to transfer a Radioplan project between databases. This can be accomplished by choosing the menu entry File Import Project from other Database…. Then a dialog appears where the user can specify the database that contains the project(s) that shall be imported as apparent from Fig. 5-8.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-8 Project import from database dialog

Once the database specified by the wines.ini file has been recognized, all available projects from that database are listed in the dialog. The user can select an arbitrary number of projects for import. Multiple selection in the list is possible by using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys.

The project import starts by pressing the OK button. Depending on the setting of the flag Change owner of project(s) to myself, the project owner is either retrieved from the original project(s) or set to the user who performs the import. The project(s) will be imported including their folder hierarchy of the original project tree.

5.5.4 Loading Configuration Data in Radioplan Format If the specific network configuration to be investigated is not yet contained in the Radioplan database, the user has the possibility to load a configuration that is stored in a hierarchical file structure. The network configuration must be available in the Radioplan configuration format that is briefly described in appendix 13.1. In the course of the loading process, a new project is created.

In order to load an existing project from an external configuration directory into the Radioplan database, the following steps must be conducted:

• Choose File Load Project Data… from the menu. Alternatively, you can click the icon from the standard toolbar. A file open dialog appears.


www.actix.com

• Select the main configuration file from the appropriate configuration directory of the project you want to load. The project is loaded into the Radioplan database as soon as you choose the main configuration file.

• While the project is loaded, the progress of the action is shown in the progress bar that appears in the status bar. When loading is finished the simulation area is shown in the viewing area.

The user rights of the new project are automatically confined to the current user (owner). To change the access rights, one can modify them in the project settings dialog, refer to section 6.2.

5.5.5 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Import A network plan from Actix Cellopt AFP can be imported as a project into Radioplan. This function is invoked by choosing the menu entry File Import Cellopt AFP Project…. A dialog is shown where the user can select the Cellopt AFP file. Import of both CellOpt AFP 2 and 3 formats is supported. In case of the Cellopt AFP 2 format, the user can select several files that would be combined into a Radioplan project.

5.6 Working with Existing Projects A usual case of working in the network planning/configuration process is to improve the network setup by performing recursive investigations in basically the same scenario. Typically only a very small number of parameters is changed in this type of investigations. The clear choice in this case is to use a predefined network environment. Here it is described how a network configuration is used that has already been loaded into the internal database of Radioplan. See section 5.5 for loading an externally stored network configuration into the Radioplan database.

In order to open an existing project, one has to perform the following steps:

• Select the Projects tab of the tree window by clicking the corresponding clip in the lower part of that window. A hierarchical list of all projects that are available in the database appears in the tree window. Project folders in the tree can be expanded/collapsed by clicking the +/- sign left of them.

If currently any project is open, that one is highlighted in the list with the symbol. When you then open another project, the previous one will be closed at the same time, i.e. it is assured that only a single project is active at any time.

• To open the desired project, just double-click on the respective list item or choose Open Project… from the item’s context menu, alternatively.

Then the project is opened and the simulation area is shown in the viewing area. The extent of configuration items shown there depends on the settings of the viewing options, see the section on the Components toolbar in appendix 13.2.2. Additionally, the project title is displayed in the title bar of the application window.

5.6.1 Duplicating a Project In the case that a certain project configuration shall be preserved before modifying it, a project in the database can also be copied. This is done by selecting Duplicate Project from the corresponding project’s context menu. Immediately, the new copied project appears in the tree window, denoted by an appropriate suffix. This preliminary title can be changed in the project settings dialog, refer to section 6.2. Although it is permitted to have projects


www.actix.com

with identical titles in the database, it is recommended to assign each project an unambiguous name in order to distinguish them from one another.

Even if a certain project is not accessible due to the user rights management, it is possible to duplicate such a project and work with the copy. Thus it is assured that the configuration data of other users are not disturbed while enabling access to the very same data in copied projects. This is especially useful if several users work with the same database.

5.6.2 Using the Project Maintenance Wizard In order to reduce the memory consumption of a project and to strip the project data taylored to a certain area, the project conversion wizard can be used. It can be invoked from the project context menu by using the entry Maintenance Wizard…. The first wizard dialog appears which allows to remove unnecessary sites and cells from the project. This dialog is shown in Fig. 5-9, its usage is explained in Table 5-5.

Fig. 5-9 Project maintenance wizard: site removal

Table 5-5 Site removal options in the project maintenance wizard

Function Description

Remove Sites from Project General flag to enable the subsequent site removal functions.

Remove Sites and Cells located outside of Simulation Area

If this checkbox is activated, all sites and cells outside the simulation area will be removed from the project.

Remove Inactive Cells If this checkbox is activated, all inactive cells will be removed from the project.

Remove Sites with no cells attached

If this checkbox is activated, all sites that have no attached cells will be removed from the project.

Pressing the Next button leads to the second wizard dialog. Here the user can convert the pathloss matrices into multi-resolution matrices and possibly clip them to the extensions of the simulation area. This dialog is shown in Fig. 5-10, its usage is explained in Table 5-6.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-10 Project maintenance wizard: pathloss conversion

Table 5-6 Pathloss conversion options in the project maintenance wizard


Convert Single Resolution into Multi-Resolution Pathloss

If this checkbox is activated, all single resolution pathloss matrices in the project will be converted into high/low resolution matrices.

—

New HighRes Radius The radius of the highres part of the new pathloss matrices. In order to reduce the memory consumption, this value should be chosen smaller than half the original matrix extension.

m

New LowRes Resolution Factor

The resolution reduction factor per dimension for the lowres part of the new pathloss matrices. As an example, a value of 4 reduces the pixel resolution outside the highres area by a factor of 4, i.e. the memory consumption for that part is reduced by a factor of 42=16.

—

Clip Pathloss to Simulation Area

If this checkbox is activated, all pathloss matrices are clipped to the extensions of the simulation area.

—

In the last wizard dialog, it is possible to configure antenna families or to remove unused antenna families. This dialog is shown in Fig. 5-11, its usage is explained in Table 5-7.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-11 Project maintenance wizard: antenna configuration and removal

Table 5-7 Antenna family options in the project maintenance wizard

Function Description

Configure and Remove Antennas from Project

General flag to enable the subsequent antenna conversion functions.

Create Antenna Families

If this checkbox is activated, the antennas in the project are grouped into antenna families according to the naming convention of the antennas. See section 6.5.9 for details on the antenna family definition.

Remove Unused Antenna Families

If this checkbox is activated, all antenna families are stripped from the project that are not referenced by any cell, additional antenna, or repeater.

Pressing the Run button in the final wizard dialog will start the project conversion. At any time before pressing the Run button, the user can navigate back and forth through the wizard using the Back and Next buttons.

5.6.3 Merging Projects In general it is possible to handle multi-layer projects in Radioplan. However, as the case may be, such different network layers might only be available in separate projects. This is particularly the case if the RNP tool which is used as the data source does not support multi-layer projects including the corresponding cross-layer constraints (e.g. shared antennas).

In order to merge another project into the current one, the function Merge Projects… from the project’s context menu is to be selected. Then a dialog is shown where the other project can be chosen that shall be merged into the current one. This dialog is shown in Fig. 5-12.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-12 Merge projects dialog

There are a few flags that can be used to customize the project merging. So the user can choose to confine the merging to only the active network elements, the network elements in the simulation area, and only the used antenna families. Sites can be merged either according to their location or their name. Furthermore, a suffix can be specified that is added to all cell names of the imported network layer(s).

Only network elements (sites and cells with their associated antennas, additional antennas, repeaters, and pathloss matrices) are copied from the other project into the current one. Any network layers that did not yet exist in the current project and that are associated with any network elements copied from the other project are also copied.

It is in the responsibility of the user to update and maintain the cross-layer contraints, in particular the shared antenna flags. Please refer to [R-ACP] for a description on the usage and configuration.

5.7 Project Database Management

5.7.1 Project Update A complete overview of all configuration data settings of the current project including an update of possibly missing or obsolescent parameters can be obtained by choosing the entry Update Project from the project’s context menu or, alternatively, selecting File Current Project List Project Parameters from the menu bar. The parameter settings of all configuration items are shown then in a table in the viewing area. Parameters that were unset and that are thus filled with a default value, are highlighted in red. A blue background color indicates that the respective parameter was filled with a value based on another parameter. An example view of the configuration parameters overview is given in Fig. 5-13.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-13 Complete parameter overview of a project

Previously unset parameters (backed blue or red) are set to the displayed default values as soon as the Parameter Report & Update function is invoked. These default values are taken from the defaultparameters.ini file in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.2 and also [R-Admin]). Hence this function is perfectly suited to update old project configurations to the latest version (presumed the defaultparameters.ini file is up-to-date).

5.7.2 Complete Project Update of the Database Especially in the case when upgrading to a new Radioplan release, it might be necessary to update all projects in the database in one step. Then each project would be updated in the same way as done with the ‘Update Project’ function in the previous subsection.

The complete project update of the database can be invoked by using the Tools Database Update All Projects menu entry. Then the project update is started immediately.

Depending on the number and size of projects in the database, the processing of the database update can take some minutes.

Make sure that the latest and up-to-date *.ini files are installed when starting the database update. This will be automatically ensured if the new Radioplan release was correctly installed.


www.actix.com

5.7.3 List of Projects in the Database In order to get an overview of all projects in the database with their current access rights and memory consumption, a list of projects can be created. This function is invoked by using the menu entry Tools Database List All Projects. An example of a project list is given in Fig. 5-14.

Fig. 5-14 Project overview list

5.7.4 Project Statistics A report with project statistics about the memory consumption, the different areas, and the number of sites/cells inside the areas can be created from the entry Project Statistics when right-clicking on the currently active project’s item in the Projects tab of the tree window. When holding down the <Shift> key while choosing the menu entry, the statistics report is opened in a separate window. Fig. 5-15 shows a sample statistics report.

Fig. 5-15 Sample project statistics report

If there are multiple network layers in the project, first a summary of the entire project is given in the project statistics report. Below that the figures for each network layer are given separately.

5.7.5 Direct Comparison Between Project Configurations Besides the configuration overview of a single project, a comparison between the configuration of two different project can be done. This makes particular sense e.g. after a network optimization to compare the original with the optimized network setup.


www.actix.com

The project comparison function can only be called for an open project. Then the parameters of the current project are compared to those of another project that can be selected from all projects in the database. The project comparison function can be invoked by choosing File Current Project Compare with Other Project… from the menu bar. Then a dialog is shown where the other project for the comparison can be selected. This dialog is presented in Fig. 5-16.

Fig. 5-16 Project selection dialog for project comparison

As soon as the selection of a project has been confirmed, the configuration comparison overview is determined. This operation can take a moment. The progress is indicated in the status bar. After all necessary data have been collected, a similar table is displayed as the parameter overview in section 5.7.1 above. If certain configuration parameter values differ between the projects, the respective fields are highlighted with a turquoise background. Additionally, the deviating value of the other project is given in parentheses. An example of a project comparison overview is given in Fig. 5-17.

Fig. 5-17 Project comparison overview


www.actix.com

5.8 Project Data Export Projects are normally held in the Radioplan database. A project can also be saved entirely to external files. For example, this is necessary to exchange a network configuration between independent platforms/workstations.

Besides saving a complete project it is also possible to export single configuration items into external configuration files. Both of these alternatives are described in the following subsections.

5.8.1 Backward Synchronization of an RNP Project from Radioplan If the current Radioplan project was imported from an RNP via an integrated interface (e.g. via COM API or direct database access), modifications in the network layout can also be transferred back to the original project in the RNP in order to keep them synchronized. This is accomplished by opening the project update dialog and possibly selecting the cells to be updated.

Details of the backward synchronization with different RNP tools can be found in the according documentation material. For example, see [R-ASM] for details on the ASM.

5.8.2 Saving a Project into Files A project can be saved into a hierarchical directory structure in a file system. Before saving the project, it must be open in Radioplan. Then, by clicking the icon (tooltip Save Project Data) or by choosing File Save Project Data… from the menu, a dialog is shown where the user can specify the main configuration file name. A sample view of the dialog is shown in Fig. 5-18.

Fig. 5-18 Save dialog for the configuration data

In order to enter a proper path, select “Browse…” in the upper list field to display a file select dialog. The main configuration file must have the extension *.cfg (e.g. project.cfg). If the determined destination directory still contains some older configuration data, the user is informed in the center list field which files must be deleted before saving the current project configuration.


www.actix.com

In the lower part of the dialog, several options can be chosen:

• By default, the flag Check validity of project configuration is inactive to just store the project data as is. If it is checked, however, a completeness check of the project data will be performed during export. This check would only have importance if the network configuration is intended to be simulated which requires a complete set of configuration data.

• Using the Restrict Environment data to Simulation Area option allows to limit the amount of data stored in the project to minimum. Typically, a smaller area from a large master project can be cut out effectively with the help of this option.

• The option Use Primary Keys as File Names instead of Name of Network Elements is activated by default, meaning that the filenames of the configuration files are directly derived from the primary keys of the respective items in the database. On the contrary, the filenames would be derived from the IDs of the distinct items.

• For a network simulation, the option Export for Simulator must be selected.

The configuration data are saved eventually by clicking the Proceed button. If the user would like to abort the saving action, he could click the Cancel button instead. The progress of the saving action is shown as a progress bar in the status bar.

The hierarchical directory structure of the configuration data and the configuration file format are further described in appendix 13.1.

5.8.3 Actix CellRefs Export It is possible to export a network plan in Actix CellRefs format. Such information can be used in the ActixOne Platform and related products such as Actix Viewpoint or Actix Analyzer as references of cell and site names, locations, and some further parameters.

In order to export a CellRefs file, the menu entry Tools Actix CellRefs File Export can be used. In the appearing file save dialog the user can choose the filename of the exported CellRefs file. In conjunction with the actual CellRefs file also an *.ini file with the same name is stored. This *.ini file can be utilized by Analyzer when the CellRefs file is read.

Even if another projection system is used in the project, the site locations given in the CellRefs are always exported in WGS84 projection.

5.8.4 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Export A network plan can also be exported in Cellopt AFP 2/3 format in order to be further used in Actix Cellopt AFP. This function is invoked by choosing the menu entry File Export Export Cellopt AFP Plan…. Then a dialog is shown where the user can select the filename incl. path and the version of the Cellopt AFP file.

5.8.5 Configuration Item Export Likewise, single configuration items can be exported to external configuration files. To accomplish this, one has to choose the entry Export <Item Name>… from the respective item’s context menu in the Configuration tab of the tree window. A file open dialog appears where the user can specify the filename and path where to store the item configuration.

This function can be used to, e.g., exchange certain configuration items of a network setup between different projects or to extend the library by user-defined items.


www.actix.com

5.9 Managing Network Performance Data in a Project Network performance data from measurements or simulations can only be loaded into an existing project in the database. This way it is assured that they are always tied to a certain network configuration. The network performance data management is briefly described in the following sections. For a more detailed description, refer to chapter 12.

5.9.1 Structure of Network Performance Data The network performance data of a project are listed in the Results tab in a hierarchical tree structure. The data are ordered in several hierarchical levels that are explained below. In order to compare network data from different projects (with possibly similar network configuration), the user can also display the data of other projects from the same database in the Results tab and use them for an evaluation.

All network performance data originating from a single measurement or simulation is collectively called a result set. Inside each result set, the network data (parameters) are grouped in certain Categories. Each parameter contains a set of values that have an associated time stamp, position, network element, etc.

According to the different types of network performance data, the result sets are symbolized by different icons that are summarized in Table 5-8.

Table 5-8 Types of result sets

Result Set Icon Description

Measurement result set

Dynamic simulation result set

Snapshot simulation result set

Performance counter data result set

Generic result set (converted from table data)

5.9.2 Network Performance Data Import The direct import of measurement data from different measurement devices is supported. Measurement data are loaded by using the menu entry File Import Measurements…. Such data are always incrementally imported to the project, i.e. newly loaded measurement data are added as a new result set.

In order to load simulation results, one can click the icon from the simulator toolbar, or select Simulation Import Results from the menu. In the appearing dialog the desired parameters can be chosen for loading. By default, simulation results are imported non-incrementally, i.e. newly loaded data override all existing network performance data in the project.

It is also possible to load results from several simulation runs incrementally into the project for the purpose of comparison. To add new simulation results data to the already existing ones in the database, the checkbox Add Results – Existing Result Sets will not be removed in the import dialog must be selected. The simulation results loading process is described in greater detail in [R-Sim].

5.9.3 Deleting Network Performance Data To remove simulation results or drive test data from a project, the user has the choice to either delete just a single parameter, a whole result set, or all results together. This can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding Delete <…> entries in the context menus of the project (in the Projects tab) or an item in the Results tab, respectively. The removal of result parameters is described in greater detail in chapter 12.


www.actix.com

5.10 Deleting an Existing Project It is possible to delete an existing project from the Radioplan database. The following steps have to be performed to accomplish this.

• Choose Delete Project from the project’s context menu.

• The user is asked to confirm the deletion of the current project.

If the question is negated the project will be preserved. Otherwise it is completely deleted from the database including all results or drive test data that might have been loaded into it. The according project item in the tree window is removed. A project can only be deleted if the current user has access permission to that project.

Caution! The deletion of a project cannot be undone.

Several projects can be deleted in one step by first marking them in the Projects tab and then choose Delete Project from the project context menu. In the appearing confirmation dialog, the user can select Yes to all in order to delete all projects together.

5.11 Handling of Master/Sub-Projects It is possible to create one or more ‘Sub-projects’ from a given ‘Master Project’. All pathloss data as well as GEO data (e.g. clutter matrices, DEM) will only be contained in the master project. A sub-project would then be a copy of the network configuration including the user configuration and the traffic matrices of the master project.

This saves disk space when several sub-projects are in use since all the pathloss and GEO data is contained in the one master project.

Sub-projects are useful for various purposes. As one example, they can be used in the Capital Planning process to calculate different scenarios for a network and compare the solutions to the initial master project. As another option, a larger master project could be divided into sub-projects of smaller clusters that can be optimized separately. After the optimization, cluster results are synchronized back and combined in the master project.

5.11.1 Deriving Sub-Projects from a Master Project To create sub-projects from the currently open (master) project, open the context menu in the Projects tab and select Create Sub-Project(s)…. A dialog appears where the user can select a filter area for the sites to be copied to the sub-project(s), refer to Fig. 5-19.

Fig. 5-19 Create sub-projects dialog


www.actix.com

In this dialog, all area polygons available in the project are listed. If the option Filter Sites by Area is chosen, a new sub-project for each selected area from the list would be created. Otherwise just a single sub-project as a full copy of the master project would be generated. If in addition also the option Copy only the selected filter area is activated then for each new sub-project only the respective area polygon will be copied as the new simulation area.

If the new sub-projects shall be made available for more users than just the owner of the master project, the option Create without assigning an owner should be activated. This could be the recommended setting for a typical workflow of a super user assigning the sub-projects to different engineers for further processing.

After the filter selection is committed, the new sub-projects are created. They appear as new entries in the Projects tab of the tree window with a special sub-project icon (possibly amended by the green or red lock symbol) and having the same name as its master project, amended by the name of the filter polygon they were created for. In addition, the projects are identified as a sub-project by ‘<Sub Project>’ behind the name. The user may want to adjust the sub-project name accordingly for better identification, especially in the case where more than one sub-projects were derived from the same master project.

5.11.2 Working with Sub-Projects Since the pathloss matrices would be contained in the original master project, this would mean that pathloss tuning would only have to be performed once (i.e. in the master project).

Multiple sub-projects can be made from a given master project that allows, e.g. the investigation of different optimization scenarios or neighbor list optimization, using separate sub-projects.

In order to determine the corresponding master project for a given sub-project, simply open the project settings dialog of the sub-project. The corresponding master project is shown below the project title, see Fig. 5-20.

Fig. 5-20 Project settings dialog of a sub-project

It is not possible to merge a sub-project with any other project – the respective entry in the project context menu is grayed out. The reason for this is that merging the sub-project would have an impact on the master project, so this is prohibited. Likewise, it is excluded to call the project maintenance wizard from a sub-project for the same reason.

5.11.3 Synchronizing a Sub-Project with its Master Project After different optimization scenarios have been perfomed it is then possible to perform a synchronization of the site and cell settings between the master and sub-project. This synchronization can be accomplished by opening the context menu of the master project in


www.actix.com

the Projects tab and selecting Synchronize from Sub-Project…. This will open a dialog to choose which sub-project should be used for applying the network settings to the master project as shown in Fig. 5-21.

Fig. 5-21 Selecting a sub-project for synchronization with its master project

This dialog lists all existing sub-projects of the currently open master project. After the user has confirmed the selected sub-project, all parameters that have changed in that sub-project since the branching are updated in the master project.

During the master/sub-project synchronization only network parameters of cells that exist in both projects are updated. Sites/cells that would have been added afterwards to the master project would not be touched.

Alternatively, it is also possible to apply the network settings of the master project to the sub-project. There are two different ways to accomplish this:

• Synchronization: A parameter synchronization in the sense as described above can be done by opening the context menu of the sub-project in the Projects tab and selecting Synchronize from Master Project…. In this case, the sub-project is updated immediately because it has only a single master project.

• Fresh-up: The complete sub-project can be refreshed from its master project by selecting Refresh from Master Project… from the sub-project’s context menu. In this case the network plan in the entire simulation area of the sub-project is refreshed from the master project. This means that, in contrast to a simple parameter synchronization, also new or deleted sites/cells will also be updated to the sub-project.

5.11.4 Deleting a Sub-Project A sub-project is deleted like any normal project. Please refer to section 5.10 for details.

If a master project is deleted then automatically all its sub-projects will be deleted as well. In this case the project deletion dialog contains a Detail… button as shown in Fig. 5-22. When pressing this button, all the affected sub-projects are listed in the lower part of the dialog.


www.actix.com

Fig. 5-22 Project delection dialog with sub-projects

Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 105

www.actix.com

6 Multi-Layer Project Configuration This chapter describes the general configuration of multi-layer/multi-technology projects in Radioplan. Projects can be used for various planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization, site selection, neighbor list planning, RRM parameter optimization, measurement analysis, pathloss tuning, and dynamic or snapshot network simulation.

The configuration of system technology specific elements for UMTS, CDMA2000, GSM, iDEN, or WiMAX is described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.1 Configuration Overview The Configuration tab of the tree window contains all configuration data of a project. The structure and particular meaning of the configuration data is explained in detail in this chapter. An example configuration is shown in Fig. 6-1.

Fig. 6-1 Configuration data tree view

The project configuration data are separated into four major categories:

• areas (polygons),

• environment data,


www.actix.com

• user profile, and

• RAN configuration.

These groups are further subdivided as appropriate to ease the intuitive understanding of the configuration data structure. Altogether they constitute a hierarchical structure of configuration items that is represented in a tree.

In order to make the data items in a tree branch visible, just expand the corresponding folder by either double-clicking the folder icon or single-clicking the +/- sign in front of it. Repeating the same action will collapse the branch items.

In general, all data items in the tree can be manipulated in several ways. Most of these options can be reached via the context menu of an item (right-click on the item). The options are summarized in the following:

• Settings dialog: Choose Settings… from the item’s context menu to display the settings dialog. It shows all of the configurable options of the particular item.

• Import: A new item can be imported from a configuration file (from the library by default) by choosing Import <Item Name>…. The new item is added to the database then.

• Export: Certain configuration items (UTRAN items and user profiles) can be exported into single configuration files by choosing Export <Item Name>…. This way items can be exchanged between projects, or they can be retained in the library.

• Creation: For some types of configuration items (especially matrices or network elements), new objects can be created by choosing Add <Item Name>. They are initialized with default settings.

• Copy: New items can be created by duplicating existing ones. Choose Duplicate <Item Name> from the context menu of an existing item. A new item will be added to the tree. This can be renamed and manipulated in its settings dialog. If required, it can be dragged to another position in the tree.

• Removal: Existing items can be deleted from the tree by choosing Delete <Item Name>.

• Show Matrix: If the tree item is a matrix, it can be shown in the viewing area by choosing Show this Matrix.

The following sections treat all the above mentioned major configuration data categories.

6.2 Project Settings The overall settings of a project can be configured in its project settings dialog. This can be opened from the project’s context menu (either in the Projects, Configuration, or Results tab in the tree window) by clicking the entry Settings… or by simply double-clicking the project item. The user can specify the project title along with a description, and can configure the user rights management. The dialog is shown in Fig. 6-2, and the distinct fields are described in detail in Table 6-1.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-2 Project settings dialog

Table 6-1 Project settings


Project Title An arbitrary project title that need not immediately be unique among all project titles in the Radioplan database. However, it makes things easier to choose unambiguous titles for different projects.

In case of a sub-project, the associated master project is given below the project title.

—

Description Arbitrary description of the project —

Owner Owner of the project. This is a login name of the user who has single access rights for this project.

—

Take Ownership A button to take ownership of this project by assigning the user ID to it.

—

Grant Access for all Users

If this checkbox is selected, also other users can access this project. This is especially important if no owner is specified in the field above. If the checkbox is not selected, the project access is restricted to the given owner.

—

By default, the current user login is taken as the owner of a new project. If Radioplan is deployed in a computer network (LAN), special care should be taken with the user rights management. The Grant Access for all Users option can be used to make the project available to all users.

Especially in conjunction with sub-projects, the Take Ownership button can be used. If on creation of sub-project no initial owner is assigned, the user in charge of that sub-project could take ownership by pressing this button. After that the button will be grayed out, so the project ownership cannot be changed any more. Read more on the handling of sub-projects in section 5.11.

6.3 Area Management Radioplan provides functions for managing area polygons to be used as simulation or analysis area. All available areas are listed below the Areas node in the hierarchical configuration data tree. The meaning of the area symbols is described in Table 6-2; an exemplary view of the area polygons used in a project is given in Fig. 6-3.


www.actix.com

Table 6-2 Available area polygon symbols

Area Polygon Description

The currently assigned simulation area.

The currently assigned analysis area.

An alternative spare polygon for simulation/analysis area.

Fig. 6-3 Simulation/analysis area and alternative area polygons in the configuration data tree

The particular purposes of the simulation and analysis areas are described in the following sections 6.3.2 and 6.3.3.

6.3.1 Rules for the Shape of Areas A valid area can consist of an arbitrary number of subpolygons. Naturally, there must be at least one polygon for an area, and each polygon must have at least three vertices. All subpolygons of an area are equitably considered; there is no weighting order among the subpolygons of an area.

Note: A single area polygon may have an arbitrary shape. It may even be concave as shown in the left part of Fig. 6-4. However, make sure that no border line is intersecting with another one – such a simulation area is not allowed (right part of Fig. 6-4).

forbiddenpermissible

Fig. 6-4 An area (sub-) polygon may be concave; however, border lines must not be intersecting.

There are certain rules how the polygons can be combined to form an area which can either be a simulation or an analysis area. Generally, all polygons of the area are allowed to overlap each other. Depending on the number of overlapping polygons in a certain region, this region either belongs to or is excluded from the area. In particular, the following rules apply:

• A region covered by a single polygon (more general: by an odd number of polygons) is included in the area.

• A region covered by two polygons (more general: by an even number of polygons) is excluded from the area.

This means that overlapping polygons are combined by an XOR function to form the resulting area. The above rules can be used to construct an area in a very flexible way. For example, the area can be combined of several independent “islands”. Or certain areas


www.actix.com

inside a larger area can be excluded from it by inserting proper subpolygons to e.g. avoid optimizing an area around a hospital with sensitive ICNIRP requirements. Some of these examples are demonstrated in Fig. 6-5.

polygon inside polygon:exclusion

two overlapping polygons:exclusion

extra polygon island:inclusion

Fig. 6-5 Possible constellations for exclusion and inclusion regions of an area

6.3.2 Simulation Area The simulation area defines a region that represents the main geographic filter in a project. In a surface plot, the simulation area is presented by auburn lines. Outside this area the display is shaded slightly gray. Generally, the simulation area determines the region that certain actions are confined to. Depending on the particular Radioplan Module used, it can have different meanings that are summarized in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 Impact of the simulation area

Module During Execution of Module During Result Analysis

Measurement Module

— In the results selection dialog, the analysis of measurement parameters can be confined to the simulation area.

Network Simulator The creation and movement of UEs during a network simulation is confined to the simulation area.

In the results selection dialog, the analysis of simulation result parameters can be confined to the simulation area.

ACP and other Optimization Modules

The considered area where the objective function of the optimization is calculated and evaluated is identical with the simulation area.

[see Measurement Module or Network Simulator]

In a project there must always be a simulation area. When a new project is created, the default simulation area is a square area with the extensions (0m, 0m) (1000m, 1000m).

There are two ways to edit the simulation area. It could either be drawn graphically with the mouse pointer or its vertices could be edited in the area settings dialog. See section 6.3.4 for more details.

6.3.2.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Simulation Area

An existing area polygon in the area management can be set as simulation area by choosing Set as Simulation Area from the respective area item’s context menu in the ocnfiguration data tree. Then the area symbol is changed into and the viewing area is


www.actix.com

updated showing the new simulation area. The previous simulation area polygon is converted into a spare area symbolized by .

6.3.3 Analysis Area The analysis area is an optional region that can be used for additional geographic filtering for various purposes. In case there is no analysis area defined, functions requiring an analysis area would work on the simulation area instead. In a surface plot, the analysis area is presented by yellow lines.

Outside the valid analysis area the display is shaded slightly gray. Generally, the analysis area determines the region that certain (analysis) actions are confined to. Depending on the particular Radioplan Module used, it can have different meanings that are summarized in Table 6-4.

Table 6-4 Impact of the analysis area

Module During Execution of Module During Result Analysis

Measurement Module

— In the results selection dialog, the analysis of measurement parameters can be confined to the analysis area.

Network Simulator

— During simulation results import, the imported data can be confined to the analysis area.

In the results selection dialog, the analysis of simulation result parameters can be confined to the analysis area.

ACP and other Optimization Modules

The selection of reconfigurable and considered cells is determined in relation to the analysis area.

[see Measurement Module or Network Simulator]

Similar to the simulation area, also the polygons of the analysis area can be edited either graphically with the mouse in the viewing area or by editing the coordinates in the area settings dialog. For more details, please refer to section 6.3.4.

6.3.3.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Analysis Area

An existing area polygon in the area management can be set as analysis area by choosing Set as Analysis Area from the respective area item’s context menu in the ocnfiguration data tree. Then the area symbol is changed into and the viewing area is updated showing the new analysis area. If previously there was a different analysis area, it is now converted into a spare area symbolized by .

Since it is not immediately necessary to have defined an analysis area in a project, the analysis area can also be unset by choosing the Set as Analysis Area context menu entry when the tick sign is set. Then the analysis area is converted into a spare area again, symbolized by .

6.3.4 Working with Area Polygons Areas can be edited and modified in various ways. This section describes all available functions of the area management.

6.3.4.1 Importing an Area

An area polygon can be imported into the area management by using the Import… function in the context menu of the Areas node in the configuration data tree. Once other areas are available in the area management, this entry can also be accessed in the context menu of any area polygon. A file open dialog is shown where the polygon can be selected. Refer to appendix 13.6 for a short documentation of the supported vector data formats.


www.actix.com

Initially, the new polygon is added as a spare area, symbolized by the icon, below the Areas node in the configuration data tree. The area name is derived from the filename.

Once a new area has been imported, it is ready to be used as simulation/analysis area, to change the name, or to modify their shape as explained in the following subsections.

6.3.4.2 Exporting an Area

Any of the areas can be exported into commonly used vector format files. This function is invoked by choosing the Export… entry from the context menu of the respective area. A file save dialog is shown where a filename for the export can be determined. After confirming with the OK button, the area including all its subpolygons is saved into the file. For example, it can be saved as a vector file in Shape or MapInfo format, refer to appendix 13.6.

6.3.4.3 Duplicating an Area

An area can be duplicated in the area management by using the Duplicate function from that area’s context menu in the configuration data tree. The copy of the area is added as a new spare area with a name derived from the original area, preceded by “Copy of“. The new area is symbolized by the icon.

6.3.4.4 Inspecting Area Polygon Settings

The settings of an area can be inspected in the area settings dialog. It is opened by either double-clicking an area item in the configuration data tree or by selecting Settings… from the area item’s context menu. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6-6.

Fig. 6-6 Area settings dialog

The dialog can be used to change the name of the area in the title field. Furthermore, the distinct vertices that are listed in the table can be modified. In this table, each subpolygon is denoted by an index in the Subpolygon column, starting from 0. The table is fully editable, the following actions are possible:

• A new vertex can be simply added in the last (empty) row of the table. Then automatically a new row is appended for another addition of a vertex.

• A vertex can be moved by editing its coordinates accordingly.


www.actix.com

• For deleting a vertex, the according row in the coordinates table must be selected by clicking the field left of the coordinates and then pressing the <Delete> key.

It should also be noted that for each subpolygon, the first vertex is repeated at the end of the vertex list.

6.3.4.5 Drawing an Area (Sub-) Polygon

In order to define the simulation/analysis areas graphically in the viewing area, make sure that currently a surface plot is shown. One has to enter the corresponding drawing mode by selecting either of the or icons (tooltip: Modify Simulation/Analysis Area) from the paint toolbar or by using the menu entries View Paint Modify Simulation/Analysis Area, respectively. As soon as this special drawing mode is activated, the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair and a drawing grid is shown in the viewing area (if a surface plot is chosen). The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. See section 3.5.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. Alternatively, the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x- and y-direction) can be specified, see Fig. 6-7.

Fig. 6-7 Grid size settings dialog

It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw the new simulation/analysis area. Section 3.4.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. So if the background image is a map, it is easy to surround the area in the map with the mouse that shall be considered for investigation.

A polygon of the simulation/analysis area is drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. The last vertex is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. The polygon is then automatically closed to the first vertex. At least 3 points must be added. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set.

When the polygon is closed and it is not the first subpolygon of an area, a dialog appears that asks the user whether this new polygons shall just be added as a subpolygon, or whether it shall replace the existing area. Then the newly added polygon is immediately shown in the surface plot.

It is possible to undo all drawing actions of an area polygon by typing <Ctrl-Z>. A redo is possible by typing <Ctrl-Y>. Also multiple undo and redo commands can be performed.


www.actix.com

6.3.4.6 Editing an Area (Sub-) Polygon

The vertices of the simulation/analysis area can be edited in either of the respective drawing mode. In particular, new vertices can be added and each vertex can be freely moved or even be deleted. Also, subpolygons or the entire area can be removed.

It is also possible to add, move, or delete a vertex graphically with the mouse. To add a vertex on an existing edge of a polygon, the mouse pointer should be placed above the respective edge. A right mouse click on the edge will highlight it, and a context menu appears. Choose Insert Vertex from that menu. A dashed auxiliary line appears between the adjacent vertices, spanning the path via the current mouse pointer position. Now the mouse pointer can be moved to the desired new vertex position. A left mouse click determines the new vertex.

Moving a vertex is initiated by placing the mouse pointer above the vertex to be moved until it is highlighted by a purple circle around it. Then the left mouse button must be clicked in order to start the moving action. When then moving the mouse pointer, a dashed auxiliary line is drawn from the old vertex position to the current one. In order to determine the new vertex position, the left mouse button needs to be clicked another time. Then the dashed line disappears, and the simulation area is redrawn with the new vertex position.

In addition, vertices and subpolygons can be removed graphically with the mouse. When approaching a certain vertex with the mouse pointer in the according area drawing mode, the respective vertex is highlighted by a purple circle around it. Then the right mouse button can be pressed to show the context menu of that vertex/subpolygon. This action is presented in Fig. 6-8.

Fig. 6-8 Editing a vertex/subpolygon of an area

The following functions can be called from this context menu:

• Remove Vertex: The highlighted vertex is removed from the (sub-)polygon. After removal, the two adjacent vertices will be directly connected by a straight line.

• Remove Subpolygon: When called for a subpolygon, the respective polygon will be removed from the area.

• Extract Subpolygon: In order to extract a subpolygon out of a multi-polygon area, this function can be called.


www.actix.com

An extracted subpolygon can either form a new area or it can be added to an existing area as another subpolygon. The user can choose between these options in the pulldown list of the extract subpolygon dialog:

6.3.4.7 Controlling the Visibility of Areas

Each area can be individually displayed. The visibility of an area is controlled by the checkbox left of its item in the tree as shown in Fig. 6-3 above. So the spare areas can be displayed occasionally by setting their checkbox in order to envision their position.

In addition to that, the visibility of all areas together can be toggled by using the icon (tooltip Draw Areas) from the components toolbar to the left.

The visibility status of an area does not impact its validity as simulation/analysis area.

Optionally, the areas can be displayed with a shading of the regions outside the respective area. This is a general display setting which can be configured in the according dialog as described in section 3.5.3.

6.3.4.8 Deleting an Area (Sub-) Polygon

An area polygon that is currently not in use (symbolized by the icon in the configuration data tree) can be deleted from the area management. This is accomplished by choosing the Delete entry from the respective area polygon’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the polygon.

It is also possible to delete a single subpolygon in a combined area graphically. This is described in subsection 6.3.4.6.

6.4 Configuration of the Environment The environment comprises all items that do not directly belong to the mobile network. However, they have an impact on the behavior of the network. In particular, the following items define the network environment:

• clutter matrix,

• DEM matrix, and

• streets (for dynamic simulation movement models).

These items are explained in more detail in the subsequent sections.

6.4.1 Clutter Depending on different environmental conditions, each local region in the simulation area is ruled by different propagation and reception properties. These distinct regions are categorized in clutter classes. Typical examples for such clutter classes are terms like rural, suburban, or urban environments.

The clutter is represented in form of a matrix. A clutter matrix defines a certain clutter class for each position that is covered by the matrix. Such a matrix can be imported from an external file or from an RNP tool, or the user can define his own clutter matrix.

A clutter matrix is always linked with a clutter classes definition. Consequently, importing a clutter matrix in Radioplan format automatically loads the corresponding clutter classes


www.actix.com

definition. When loading another format or creating a new clutter matrix, it is required to define the clutter classes separately.

6.4.1.1 Clutter Matrix Format

The clutter matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. 6-9. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. Each pixel contains a single value representing a clutter class. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. The alignment of a clutter matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix, i.e. the Northwestern corner. The covered area of a clutter matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.

R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 ...

R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 ...

...

PixelWidth

RnCm

n = Rows (Number of Rows)m = Cols (Number of Columns)

North

West

South = North - PixelHeight * (n – 1)

East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1)

PixelHeight

Storage Format

Fig. 6-9 Clutter matrix format in Radioplan

6.4.1.2 Defining Clutter Classes

To inspect and modify the clutter classes settings, double-click the Clutter Classes item in the configuration data tree or, alternatively, select Settings… from its context menu. The clutter data in the configuration data tree are shown in Fig. 6-10 (clutter classes highlighted).

Fig. 6-10 Configuring the clutter in the configuration data tree

Then the clutter classes settings dialog is opened. An example of a typical set of clutter classes is shown in Fig. 6-11. As apparent from this figure, a clutter class is characterized by

• an index, a description, and a presentation color,

• a pathloss offset and an interference ratio offset for plot generation and optimization (see [R-ACP]),

• several additional properties needed for network simulation (see [R-Sim]):

▫ the standard deviation of the shadowing,

▫ the fading profile (one of the four available profiles given in Table 6-6),


www.actix.com

▫ three different DL intracell code orthogonality factors subdivided according to the user speed, and

▫ three different DL intracell inter-scrambling code orthogonality factors subdivided according to the user speed.

The corresponding parameters are summarized in Table 6-5.

Fig. 6-11 Clutter classes configuration dialog

Table 6-5 Clutter class parameters (gray part only for simulation)


Class This is an integer that uniquely represents a clutter class. Usually this is a running number.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the respective clutter class.

—

Color An arbitrary color to represent this clutter class in surface plots.

—

Pathloss Offset (Optimization)

An optional clutter specific offset which is only considered in the network optimization in relation to the pilot RSCP target.

dB

Ec/I0 or C/I Offset (Optimization)

An optional clutter specific offset which is only considered in the network optimization in relation to the interference ratio target (can be Ec/I0 or C/I depending on system technology).

dB

StdDev. The standard deviation of the shadowing distribution for this particular clutter class.

dB

Fading Profile The fading profile of this clutter class. see Table 6-6

OF alpha IntraCell v < 2m/s

The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v < 2m/s for this clutter class.

—

OF alpha IntraCell v = 2…15m/s

The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v = 2…15m/s for this clutter class.

—

OF alpha IntraCell v > 15m/s

The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v > 15m/s for this clutter class.

—


www.actix.com


OF alpha Inter-Scrambling-Code v < 2m/s

The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v < 2m/s for this clutter class.

—

OF alpha Inter-Scrambling-Code v = 2…15m/s

The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v = 2…15m/s for this clutter class.

—

OF alpha Inter-Scrambling-Code v > 15m/s

The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v > 15m/s for this clutter class.

—

The color can be easily edited by clicking with the left mouse button on the respective color field in the table. Then the Radioplan color chooser appears where the user can select the desired color. Its usage is similar as for modifying the legend colors which is explained in section 3.5.5. The default clutter class color is black. All clutter classes that have black color would be presented in a surface plot with a color that is derived from the standard color palette.

Usually, the standard deviation of the shadowing is the higher, the more obstacles there are in the corresponding region. Thus, typical values for built area (urban, suburban) lie between 6dB and 8dB; in extreme, heavily obstructed, environments it could be 10dB to 12dB. For open areas, like water or snow, the shadowing standard deviation is considerably lower.

It is only necessary to consider shadowing if the pathloss matrices used are very coarse and represent a mean pathloss as can be determined by e.g. empirical pathloss models. If, however, a more accurate pathloss model is used that takes the shadowing caused by buildings and other obstacles into account (e.g. ray launching), the standard deviation of the shadowing can be chosen much smaller or can even vanish.

For the fading profile, only a coarse mapping to general environment categorizations can be recommended. They are given in Table 6-6.

Table 6-6 Recommendation for the deployment of fading profiles (for simulation only)

Fading Profile Title Applicable Environment

RA Rural Area rural, open areas; water; snow; non-densely built areas (partially)

TU Typical Urban suburban and urban areas

BU Bad Urban urban areas; densely built areas

HT Hilly Terrain hilly areas (if applicable)

The intracell OVSF code orthogonality factor αc in DL generally depends on the local propagation conditions and the user speed. Thus there should be a close relationship to the fading profiles. Table 6-7 gives a recommendation for the intracell orthogonality factor αc split up for three speed ranges, directly associated with the fading profiles.


www.actix.com

Table 6-7 Recommendation for intracell OVSF code orthogonality factors (for simulation only)

Fading Profile Orthogonality Factor α

v < 2 m/s 2 m/s ≤ v < 15 m/s v ≥ 15 m/s

RA 0.1 0.1 0.1

TU 0.06 0.25 0.4

BU 0.1 0.25 0.4

HT 0.1 0.25 0.4

Some system vendors offer more than one scrambling code per cell. Also in Compressed Mode, a second code tree with another scrambling code might be used. In order to account for a reasonable interference portion between different scrambling codes in the same cell, an additional orthogonality factor αsc has been introduced. Its values are typically between 0.7 and 0.9, slightly depending on the environment and the user speed.

Generally, if no values are given for any of the orthogonality factors in the clutter classes settings, they are automatically filled with the preconfigured default values. Since the orthogonality factors only have an impact on the network simulator, their default values can be specified in the simulator settings, refer to [R-Sim].

The clutter class definitions in the settings dialog can be edited in various ways. The usage of the table is similar to applications as MS Access or MS Query.

• A new clutter class definition can be added.

• An existing clutter class definition can be modified.

• Parameter values can easily be copied.

• A clutter class definition can be deleted.

• Arbitrary, contiguous fields in the table can be selected and copied to the clipboard.

• Columns in the table can be easily sorted by double-clicking the header field.

• Columns in the table can be moved.

• Rows in the table can be filtered with respect to arbitrarily chosen field values.

The deletion of a clutter class does not change the current clutter matrix. Make sure that you do not delete a clutter class that is used in the matrix. If a class definition is missing, the parameters of clutter class 0 (presumed default class) is used. If even class 0 is not defined, the overall default values from the simulator settings (see [R-Sim]) are used.

6.4.1.3 Importing a Clutter Matrix

There are two possibilities to import a clutter matrix. One can import

• either a predefined Radioplan clutter matrix,

• or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13.5 for supported file formats).

In a project, only a single clutter matrix is supported. Otherwise, there could occur confusion about which matrix data to use, especially if there would be several clutter classes definitions. Hence, when a new matrix is imported, a possibly existing one is replaced.


www.actix.com

A clutter matrix stored in the library or a project is inseparably combined with its clutter classes definition. Thus on loading the clutter matrix, the associated clutter classes are loaded, too. To import a matrix, select Import Clutter Data… from the context menu of the Clutter Classes tree item. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a clutter configuration file. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog, the clutter matrix is imported.

Alternatively, an arbitrary georeferenced raster data file can be imported as clutter matrix. This is done by selecting Import Clutter Matrix from Raster Image… or Import Clutter Matrix from Planet Raster Image… from the context menu of the Clutter Classes tree item. In the latter case, a tiled matrix can be imported. If a TIFF file is being imported, the attribution of color values to clutter classes is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. Since there is no separate clutter classes definition for the TIFF file, the mapping is simply accomplished such that the first color entry in the palette is assigned clutter class 0, the second color is assigned clutter class 1, etc. Generally, a clutter classes definition from a previously loaded matrix is retained.

Defining clutter classes for an imported raster data file

There are two possibilities to accomplish this. One choice is to manually define the clutter classes in the clutter classes settings dialog as it is described in subsection 6.4.1.2. The alternative choice is to first import another clutter matrix from the library with a clutter classes definition that shall also be used for the raster data file. When the raster data file is loaded afterwards, the existing classes definition is adopted. In both cases, the clutter class indexing must start at 0.

After the import, the configuration data tree is simultaneously updated such that the new matrix appears beneath the Clutter Classes item.

The range of admissible clutter class indices is generally restricted to [0, 1, ..., 254]. Indices outside this range are ignored by Radioplan and are mapped to the (presumed) default class 0.

6.4.1.4 Exporting a Clutter Matrix

A clutter matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export Clutter Matrix to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the clutter matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active, the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area.

6.4.1.5 Viewing a Clutter Matrix

To inspect the clutter matrix settings the user can open the clutter matrix configuration dialog by double-clicking the matrix item in the tree or, alternatively, choosing Settings… from its context menu. This configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-12; the matrix settings parameters are explained in Table 6-8.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-12 Clutter matrix configuration dialog

Table 6-8 Clutter matrix parameters


West The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the clutter matrix. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

m

North The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the clutter matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.

m

Pixel Width The expansion of a clutter matrix pixel in West-East direction. m

Pixel Height

The expansion of a clutter matrix pixel in South-North direction. m

Cols The number of columns in the clutter matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

Rows The number of rows in the clutter matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

A surface plot layer can be created from the clutter matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the clutter matrix item. The same result can be obtained by clicking the icon (tooltip: Plot Clutter Data) from the views toolbar or by using the menu entry View Configuration Data Plots Clutter Data. The newly created clutter layer is shown then in the viewing area by using the colors assigned to each clutter class. An example is given in Fig. 6-13. Clutter classes with the (default) black color are shown in a color derived from the standard color palette. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling, the color palette, and the alpha blending factor appropriately. See section 3.5.4 how to adjust these settings.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-13 Sample clutter matrix with custom colors

6.4.1.6 Defining a New Clutter Matrix

If no clutter data are available, they could also be created in Radioplan. For this purpose, add a new empty clutter matrix by choosing Add new Matrix from the context menu of the Clutter Classes item in the configuration data tree. The user can then choose a pixel resolution in the grid settings dialog (see Fig. 6-14). The configured pixel resolution is used for both the pixel width and height. The new matrix is immediately added to the configuration data tree below the corresponding Clutter Classes item. It is rectangular and spans the total simulation area. In case of an arbitrary polygonal simulation area, the matrix covers the encompassing rectangle.

Fig. 6-14 The grid settings dialog is shown prior to creating a matrix to determine the pixel resolution.

The resulting matrix settings can be inspected in the matrix configuration dialog as described in subsection 6.4.1.5. In the beginning, the new clutter matrix is totally empty, i.e. it is filled with zeros only (presumed default clutter class). The clutter classes definition for the new matrix is retained from the previous matrix, if there was one. Otherwise, the classes definition is empty. You can define own class definitions as described in subsection 6.4.1.2. A valid clutter classes definition is the precondition to specify the clutter matrix. The reason for this is that every clutter region that is drawn must be associated with a clutter class.

In order to modify the initially empty matrix, Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i.e. polygons) in the new clutter matrix with a certain clutter class with the mouse. To do so, one has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the clutter matrix item. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state.


www.actix.com

The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified. Also the distance measure mode is available. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode, simply click the icon again.

As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated, the chosen clutter matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid, and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. See section 3.5.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. Alternatively, the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x- and y-direction) can be specified, see Fig. 6-15. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions.


It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw clutter regions. Section 3.4.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. So if the background image is a map, it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. Thus clutter regions can be drawn very quickly.

The clutter regions are drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify a clutter class that is assigned to the region just drawn. It is depicted in Fig. 6-16.

Fig. 6-16 Clutter class selection dialog

After choosing the appropriate clutter class, the new clutter region is shown in the surface plot.

The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon (by clicking on it). Alternatively, the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing mode or by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar.

6.4.1.7 Creating a Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers

In cases when the clutter is given in terms of vector layer(s) instead of a raster matrix, it is possible to automatically convert those vector layers into a clutter matrix. First the


www.actix.com

available vector layers that define the areas of each clutter class must be loaded. Please note that each vector layer (i.e. vector file loaded into the Radioplan project) can only define the areas (closed polygons) of a single clutter class. This means that as many vector data files must be loaded as there shall be clutter classes. An example of the Layers tab with 5 loaded vector layers is given in Fig. 6-17.

Fig. 6-17 Clutter vector layers loaded into the project

Then the areas defined by the vector layers can be converted into a clutter matrix. This function can be invoked from the context menu of the items below the Clutter node in the Configuration tab of the tree window by choosing the entry Create Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers…. A dialog is opened where all loaded vector layers are shown. The user can select each vector layer individually for inclusion in the clutter matrix creation by checking the according flag. Further, each vector layer can be assigned a clutter index (i.e. clutter class). The dialog with some exemplary settings is shown in Fig. 6-18.

Fig. 6-18 Clutter matrix creation dialog

After having chosen a proper pixel resolution for the clutter matrix, the conversion can be started by pressing the OK button. Then all selected vector layers are processed which is documented by a progress bar on the bottom of the application window. When the conversion is completed, the new clutter matrix is added in the Configuration tab of the tree window.

All pixels of the resulting clutter matrix that are not covered by any polygon from the vector layers are filled with clutter class 0 which is assumed being the default class. Further, the size of the created matrix is confined to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area.

6.4.1.8 Deleting a Clutter Matrix

A clutter matrix can be deleted from the configuration by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the clutter matrix. When the clutter matrix is deleted, its clutter class definition is retained, however.


www.actix.com

6.4.2 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) The terrain shape of the environment is represented by a digital elevation model (DEM) in Radioplan. The DEM is actually a matrix that contains height values of the ground surface for each matrix pixel. The DEM matrix is used to better represent the investigated environment and to provide additional height information for e.g. site placement.

6.4.2.1 DEM Matrix Format

The DEM matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. 6-19. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. Each pixel contains a single value representing a terrain elevation (height). The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. The alignment of a DEM matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix, i.e. the Northwestern corner. The covered area of a DEM matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.

R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 ...

R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 ...

...

PixelWidth

RnCm


North

West



PixelHeight

Storage Format

Fig. 6-19 DEM matrix format in Radioplan

6.4.2.2 Importing a DEM Matrix

There are two possibilities to import a DEM matrix. One can import

• either a predefined Radioplan DEM matrix,


In a project, it is possible to have several non-overlapping DEM matrices. These matrices can be saved to a single larger matrix that then could be reimported.

To import a Radioplan DEM matrix, select Import DEM Data… from the context menu of the DEM tree item or an existing DEM matrix item. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a DEM configuration file. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog, the DEM matrix is imported.

Alternatively, an arbitrary raster data file can be imported as DEM matrix. This is done by selecting Import DEM from Raster Image… or Import DEM from Planet Raster Image… from the context menu of the DEM tree item or an existing DEM matrix item. In the latter case, a tiled matrix can be imported.


www.actix.com

After the import, the configuration data tree is simultaneously updated such that the new matrix appears beneath the DEM node.

6.4.2.3 Exporting a DEM Matrix

A DEM matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export DEM to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the DEM matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active, the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area.

If several DEM matrices reside in the DEM node of the hierarchical configuration tree that are tiled to form a larger matrix, there is also the possibility to store them together in a larger raster data file. This function can be invoked by using the Export all DEM to Single Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the DEM node (above the actual DEM matrix items). The usage of the appearing file save dialog is identical to the above description of the single matrix case.

6.4.2.4 Viewing a DEM Matrix

To inspect the DEM matrix settings the user can open the DEM matrix configuration dialog by double-clicking the matrix item in the tree or, alternatively, choosing Settings… from its context menu. This configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-20; the matrix settings parameters are explained in Table 6-9.

Fig. 6-20 DEM matrix configuration dialog

Table 6-9 DEM matrix parameters


West The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the DEM matrix. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

m

North The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the DEM matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.

m

Pixel Width The expansion of a DEM matrix pixel in West-East direction. m

Pixel Height

The expansion of a DEM matrix pixel in South-North direction. m

Cols The number of columns in the DEM matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

Rows The number of rows in the DEM matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#


www.actix.com


Height Offset

With the help of this offset, the entire DEM matrix can be vertically shifted.

m

Scaling Factor

This scaling factor is multiplied with the elevation values in the DEM matrix.

—

A surface plot layer can be created from the DEM matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from

the context menu of the DEM matrix. The same result can be obtained by clicking the icon (tooltip: Plot DEM Terrain Data) from the views toolbar or by using the menu entry View Configuration Data Plots DEM Terrain Data. The newly created DEM layer is shown then in the viewing area. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling, the color palette, and the alpha blending factor appropriately. See section 3.5.4 how to adjust these settings.

6.4.2.5 Deleting a DEM Matrix

A DEM matrix can be deleted from the configuration by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the DEM matrix.

6.4.3 Streets (for Simulation Only) Generally, streets represent geographic data belonging to the network environment. Regarding dynamic network simulations, the streets define corridors where users can move, provided that the street movement model is applied. In the snapshot network simulator, users are exclusively created on the streets if the according movement model is chosen. Refer to section 6.6.3 for more details on the available movement models. A street consists of one or several straight street segments that are combined to a polyline without any forks. Generally, the height of the streets follows the terrain profile, i.e. the DEM layer. If no DEM layer is defined, the streets are situated in the horizontal x-y-plane, i.e. the height of all streets is z = 0m.

Streets are organized in street categories. So it is possible to distinguish e.g. different street widths. Usually there are several streets belonging to a certain category. Together they form a street map. Upon start of a network simulation, the streets of each category are checked for hidden crossings that are not contained in the street map yet. That is, the real street map used in a simulation is constructed then with all forks that it might have.

6.4.3.1 Inspecting Street Data

Fig. 6-21 shows the streets configuration dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking the streets item in the configuration data tree or by selecting Settings… from its context menu. The configuration dialog contains a table with all available street categories. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-10. One can edit the street categories in various ways:

• A new street category can be added.

• An existing street category can be modified.

• Parameter values can easily be copied.

• A street category can be deleted.

• Rows in the table could be filtered with respect to arbitrarily chosen field values.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-21 Streets configuration dialog

Table 6-10 Street category parameters


Category The identifier of the street category. This is a string that is unique in the environment configuration such that it can be distinguished from other street categories. White spaces are not allowed.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the street category. It is filled with the street category by default.

—

Width The street width of that street category. m

6.4.3.2 Importing Streets

There are two possibilities to import street data. One can import

• either a Radioplan street category from the library or another project,

• or a georeferenced vector data file containing street data (see appendix 13.6 for supported file formats).

Importing a Radioplan street category is accomplished by selecting Import Streets… from the streets item’s context menu. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a street configuration file. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog, the streets are imported and added to those streets that already exist in the current project.

Alternatively, a vector data file containing polylines can be imported as a new streets category by selecting Import Streets from Vector Data… from the streets item’s context menu. A file open dialog appears that lets the user choose the vector data file. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog, the vector data are imported and added as new street category to those streets that already exist in the current project.

6.4.3.3 Drawing Streets

Radioplan offers the possibility to simply edit a street map by drawing streets (i.e. polylines) with the mouse. To do so, one has to enter the streets drawing mode by selecting the icon (tooltip: Add Streets) from the paint toolbar to the left. As soon as the


www.actix.com

streets drawing mode is activated, the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair and a drawing grid is shown in the viewing area (if a surface plot is chosen). The default grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. See section 3.5.2 how to adjust the default grid size in the display settings dialog. Temporarily, the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x- and y-direction) can be specified, see Fig. 6-22.


It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw streets. Section 3.4.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. So if the background image is a map, it is easy to follow the streets in the map while drawing with the mouse. Thus an accurate street map can be drawn very quickly.

New streets are always assigned a certain street category. So it is useful having defined appropriate street categories in the street settings dialog prior to drawing new streets (refer to subsection 6.4.3.1). If the street is drawn then, one of the available categories can instantly be assigned to it. However, it is even possible to draw streets without having defined any street category before. Then a default category is created automatically.

The streets are drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. The last vertex of a street is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify a street category that is assigned to the street just drawn. It is depicted in Fig. 6-23. As mentioned before, if there are no street categories defined previously, a default category ‘Category1’ with a street width of 10m is created automatically which can be chosen for the recently drawn polyline.

Fig. 6-23 Street category selection dialog

After choosing the appropriate street category, the new street is shown in the surface plot with the predefined width. An example of a surface plot with a newly drawn street is shown in Fig. 6-24.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-24 Street (here: red polyline) drawn in a map. The color and the alpha blending factor of the streets can be modified in the display settings dialog.

6.4.3.4 Deleting Streets

Streets can be graphically deleted with the mouse pointer when the streets drawing mode is active. In order to remove a polyline from the street map, hit it with the right mouse button. Choose Remove Street from the appearing context menu to delete it. After confirming the deletion in the following dialog, the whole selected polyline is removed. This action is shown in Fig. 6-25.

Fig. 6-25 Deleting a street (polyline)

It is also possible to delete a complete street category in the streets configuration dialog. This implies that all streets that belong to the particular street category are removed. Refer to subsection 6.4.3.1 above for details about how to delete a complete street category.

6.5 Configuration of the RAN

6.5.1 Overview The radio access network (RAN) configuration data consist of the hierarchically arranged network architecture data. The RAN configuration comprises the following items in a top-down order:

• Network Controller: In every network configuration, there is a single network controller item. Depending on the system technology it can be called RNC or BSC or similar. All sites of an investigation scenario belong to the network controller. The network controller can have relevant Radio Resource Management parameters.

• Site: A site has a position such that it can be displayed in a surface plot. Additionally, it can comprise some system technology specific hardware parameters. Cells, repeaters, and additional antennas of different technologies can be placed at a site.

• Cell: A cell embraces many system technology specific RAN and RRM parameters. Furthermore, a cell has one or more antennas.


www.actix.com

• Repeater: A repeater has some system technology specific parameters. It is always associated with a donor cell. Furthermore, a cell has one or more antennas.

• Antenna: There is a pool of antenna templates that can be deployed at the cells. Antennas of the same type with different tilt angles are arranged in antenna families.

All these configuration data items are explained in more detail in the following sections.

6.5.2 Network Controller In every Radioplan project, there is exactly one network controller object. It just serves as the superordinate item of all sites and cells of the network(s). Furthermore, it can have technology specific parameters. Depending on the system technology, the network controller object could also be called RNC or BSC or similar.

6.5.2.1 Creating the Network Controller

In general, the creation of a new network controller is only necessary, if a completely new network setup is constructed from scratch. There are two opportunities to create the network controller. Either a default network controller can be added, or the network controller can be imported from the library. Note that, according to the hierarchical network architecture, the network controller embodies the topmost level and exists exactly once in a network configuration.

Creating the network controller from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Network Controller from the context menu of the Network Elements node of the configuration data tree. The new network controller is added then to the tree directly beneath the Network Elements.

Alternatively, it is possible to import a network controller configuration from the library. This is done by selecting Import Network Controller… from the context menu of the Network Elements node of the configuration data tree. A file open dialog is opened where the desired network controller configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the network controller is imported and added to the tree directly beneath the Network Elements.

Since only a single network controller is allowed per network configuration, it can only be created once. If there is already a network controller in the project then the network controller add/import functions are disabled. If one would like to use another network controller, the existing one has first to be deleted.

6.5.2.2 Network Controller Settings

The technology specific parameters of the network controller configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.5.2.3 Exporting the Network Controller

The network controller can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Network Controller… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the network controller available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.2.4 Deleting the Network Controller

The network controller can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Network Controller from the network controller’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the network controller.

If there are other subordinate elements in the network configuration like sites and cells, the network controller cannot be deleted. All sites and cells must be deleted first before the network controller can be deleted.


www.actix.com

6.5.3 Site The site basically defines the site location and some technology specific hardware parameters. Each site can have an arbitrary number of cells or repeaters that each can have a freely configurable positioning offset against the site location. Also, the cells and repeaters can belong to different sytem technologies.

6.5.3.1 Creating a Site

In general, there are two possibilities to create a new site in a network configuration. Either a default site can be added, or a site can be imported from the library. Note that, according to the hierarchical network architecture, all the sites of a network configuration reside below the network controller. Hence it is a precondition that the network controller has already been created.

Creating a site from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Site from the superordinate network controller’s context menu. The new site is added then to the tree beneath the network controller.

Alternatively, to import a site, select Import Site… from the superordinate network controller’s context menu. If there are already other sites in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired site configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the site is imported and added to the tree beneath the network controller.

A further possibility is to graphically place a complete pre-configured site including one or three cells at a given position in a surface plot. To use this function, the Site and Cell Add Mode must be entered by clicking the icon (tooltip Add Sites and Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. A snapping grid is shown the grid size of which can be adjusted in the known manner by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. Then to set the site, click the right mouse button at a position in a surface plot where a site with cells shall be added. A context menu will pop up. Choose Add Site + 1 Cell or Add Site + 3 Cells from this context menu to insert a new site with the respective number of cells at the closest grid vertex. Both the site and the cell(s) are initialized with default values. The site is visualized as a small black circle that the cells are attached to (if the cells are not offset from the site position). Note that no antenna template has been referenced in the cell(s) yet, hence the cells are shown as orange arrows, see Fig. 6-26.

Fig. 6-26 A new site with three cells (without antennas) added in the Site and Cell Add Mode

6.5.3.2 Exporting a Site

A site can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Site… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the site available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.3.3 Duplicating a Site

Usually, a network configuration in an investigation scenario contains a larger number of sites. These sites typically differ in only very few parameters (as, e.g., the IDs and positions). For this reason the opportunity is provided to duplicate an existing site. Then the parameter changes are quickly made. So it is not necessary to import all the sites of the network configuration from the library.


www.actix.com

To duplicate a site, choose Duplicate Site from an existing site’s context menu. A new site with the same name, amended by “(Copy)” is added then to the hierarchical network configuration tree on the same level as the existing one. By opening the configuration dialog of the new site its parameters can be modified as appropriate. This is explained in section 6.5.3.5.

6.5.3.4 Moving a Site

In the Site and Cell Add Mode ( icon in the paint toolbar), the position of a site can easily be changed with the mouse in a surface plot. To initiate this function, select Move Site…

from the site’s context menu in a surface plot. Then the mouse pointer is turned into a symbol. Click the left mouse button at the desired site position. After an affirmation dialog the site is placed at the new position with respect to the current snapping grid. All pathloss matrices that are linked to that site (either at the site directly or at its cells) must be moved manually, if appropriate.

Caution! Possibly existing pathloss matrices associated with the moved site should only be moved, if their pathloss data is independent of the surroundings. In realistic environments with many irregular obstacles in the propagation channel this is usually not the case. Thus the move function for sites should be used with care. In general, associated pathloss matrices must be recalculated in a radio propagation prediction tool.

6.5.3.5 Access to Site Settings

The configuration data of a site can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective site’s context menu (by right-clicking the site item) or double-click the site item in the tree, alternatively. Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a site symbol in the viewing area to display the site configuration dialog by choosing Site Settings… from a site’s context menu. Then the site configuration dialog is opened.

The technology specific parameters of the site configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. Here only the general parameters are discussed.

6.5.3.6 General Site Settings

The General tab of the site configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-27. Refer to Table 6-11 for a description of the general site parameters.

Table 6-11 General site parameters


ID The identifier of the site. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other sites.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the site. —

Position

X The x-coordinate of the site. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

m

Y The y-coordinate of the site. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.

m

Longitude The longitude of the site position. This is only displayed if a display coordinated system is chosen.

° ’ ”

Latitude The latitude of the site position. This is only displayed if a display coordinated system is chosen.

° ’ ”


www.actix.com


Altitude The absolute altitude of the ground at the site position. This value should be set to the height of the DEM matrix at the site position.

m

Optimization

Is Reconfigurable If this flag is set, the cells at this site are reconfigurable by optimization.

Network Optimization Module only

—

Is Removable during Site Selection

If this flag is set, this site is removable by Site Selection.


—

Lock Angle between Cells during Azimuth Optimization

If this flag is set, the azimuth of all cells at this site would be changed by the same offset. This means that a three-sectored site would be treated like a fixed “star” and twisted as a whole during azimuth optimization.


—

Rollout Status The rollout status of the site. Different pre-defined values can be selected from the list field. These values can be used for prioritization during Site Selection


—

Site Candidate Group

For group site selection [R-ACP], the site can be assigned to one of 10 candidate groups. All sites assigned to the same candidate group are regarded as candidates for one site position.


—

Fig. 6-27 General tab of the site configuration dialog

Almost each tab of the site configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all its parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a site is created with the context menu entry Add Site at the network controller item in the configuration data tree.


www.actix.com

6.5.3.7 Additional Site Status Info

A site can be assigned additional information in a separate tab of the site configuration dialog. Fig. 6-28 shows the Status Info tab of the site configuration dialog. These 10 additional database fields can be freely used, e.g. for status information.

Fig. 6-28 Status Info tab of the site configuration dialog

6.5.3.8 Site Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all sites together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Current Project Site Settings, refer to Fig. 6-29. Alternatively, one can select Settings Overview… from an arbitrary site’s context menu to open this dialog. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the site settings.

Fig. 6-29 Site settings overview


www.actix.com

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the site configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:

• A parameter can simply be displayed in a cell visual by using the context menu item Visualize.

• Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the upper left part


• Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of sites in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).


Export to or Update from File

As for all overview settings tables in Radioplan, the contents of the entire Site Settings Overview table including the column headers can be exported to a tab-delimited text file by selecting Export to File… from the context menu on the table grid, refer to Fig. 6-29.

Fig. 6-30 Export to File… in the context menu of the Site settings overview

Likewise, the -visible- table contents can also be updated – completely or partially – by imported data. By selecting Update from File… from the context menu on the table grid, those values are overwritten by the loaded data, for which the table key (here: “ID”) and the column header is found in the loaded tab-delimited text file. The text file may contain the columns and the rows of the Settings Overview table in an arbitrary order and it may also contain only a subset of them. Only the column with the table key (here: “ID”) is mandatory.

How to selectively modify a network configuration

This example shall explain how to exploit the filter functions and the copy/fill functions in table grids to change a configuration parameter in a well determined subset of sites using the settings overview dialog. The same basic mechanisms can also be applied in the other settings overview dialogs, of course.

It shall be demonstrated how to change the DL capacity credit in all those sites that have an altitude different from 113m. First, display the site settings overview dialog as described above. Scroll down until you find a site with an altitude (terrain level) equal to 113m. Click into this field with the right mouse button to show the table grid context menu and choose the entry Set Filter. Then all those sites are excluded from the settings overview that have an altitude different from 113m.


www.actix.com

To get a presentation of the sites that have an altitude different from 113m, the table grid filter must be inverted by selecting Invert Filter from the context menu. Then all the desired sites are shown in the settings overview dialog. Now let us set the DL capacity credit to 1280. Choose “Hardware” from the Quick Jump menu in the upper left corner. Then select the topmost field in the Capacity Credit DL column and type ‘1280’. Then select the complete column by clicking on the corresponding headline field and press <Ctrl-D> to copy the first value in the selection to the other selected fields of the column. Alternatively, you could choose Fill Down from the table grid context menu after the column was selected. Then the new setting ‘1280’ will be copied to all other sites that match the above stated condition.

Select column

<Ctrl-D>

If the table grid filter is removed then by selecting Remove Filter from the context menu, all sites are shown in the settings overview dialog again. You will notice that the DL capacity credit of the sites with 113m altitude has not been changed as was demanded.

The Site and Cell Configuration Mode offers yet another possibility to display a selection of sites in a settings overview dialog. Enter the mode by clicking the icon (tooltip Configure Sites or Cells) in the paint toolbar. The mouse pointer automatically turns into a cross-hair. To graphically select sites for editing their parameters, just draw a polygon around those sites, vertex by vertex. The final vertex is set with a double click. Then all sites enclosed in the polygon are shown in a settings overview dialog similar to Fig. 6-29. See also section 6.5.4.6 for more information in using the Site and Cell Configuration Mode to open overview dialogs of cell settings.

6.5.3.9 Finding a Site

In larger projects, there is usually a considerable number of sites, and it is not easy to quickly associate a site item in the configuration data tree with its graphical representation in a surface plot. Thus there is a function to easily localize the position of a site in a surface plot from its item in the configuration data tree by using the context menu entry Find in Map. Then the surface plot is shifted such that the associated site is exactly in the center of the current view. Furthermore, it is highlighted by cell grippers for identification. See Fig. 6-31 for an example of a highlighted site in a map.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-31 A highlighted site in a map

6.5.3.10 Controlling Sites’ Visibility

In huge network scenarios with thousands of sites it might be useful to filter the visible sites in the tree window to those located inside the simulation area. Then the access to the relevant sites is more structured. This filter option can be switched on by using the entry Filter Sites located inside Simulation Area from a site’s or the Network Elements node’s context menu. The status of limited site visibility is indicated by a special icon at the Network Elements node in the hierarchical configuration data tree of the Configuration tab. In order to show the complete site data in the tree window again, just click the same entry in the site’s or the Network Elements node’s context menu anew. Note that this option has no influence on the visibility of the sites in a surface plot – they are always completely shown.

In multi-technology networks, there is another option to control the visibility of the various network layers. By using the icon (tooltip Show only Active Layers) from the views toolbar, only those sites having cells that belong to the currently active network layer(s) are set visible; all other sites disappear. The site visibility pertains both the sites shown in the tree window to the left as well as in the viewing area. If the network layer filter flag is set, this status is also indicated by the special icon at the Network Elements node in the tree window.

6.5.3.11 Deleting a Site

A site can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Site from that particular site’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the site.

If there are other subordinate elements in the network configuration such as cells, repeaters, and pathloss matrices, they are also deleted together with their site.

6.5.4 Cell In Radioplan, a cell is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a site. All cells (and repeaters) at one site can belong to different sytem technologies.

The association of a cell with a technology is determined by the network layer that the cell is assigned to. The network layer is mainly defined by the system technology, a carrier frequency, and an HCS identifier. In hierarchical multi-frequency network structures, cells belonging to different hierarchical network layers can operate on different frequencies. See section 5.2.1 on the definition of network layers.

A cell must have at least one antenna. In case of additional antennas at a cell, those antennas can have individual position offsets.

Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. See section 6.5.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells, repeaters, and additional antennas.


www.actix.com

6.5.4.1 Creating a Cell

It is possible to either create a new cell with default settings or to import a cell configuration from the library or another project. According to the hierarchical network architecture, a cell is always subordinate to a site in the network configuration. Hence, it can only be created if there is at least one site in the network.

A new cell will automatically be assigned to the currently active network layer. So before a new cell is created, the desired network layer must be activated in the combo box of the views toolbar. In case of multiple network layers, the new cell would be assigned to the first network layer in the network layer management dialog.

Remember! Make sure to activate the right network layer before a new cell is created.

Creating a cell from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Cell from the superordinate site’s context menu. The new cell is added then to the tree directly beneath the according site.

Alternatively, to import a cell from the library, select Import Cell… from the superordinate site’s context menu. If there are already other cells in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired cell configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the cell is imported and added to the tree directly beneath the according site.

A possibility to add a complete site with several cells in one step is described in section 6.5.3.1. To use this function, the Site and Cell Add Mode ( icon in the paint toolbar) must be entered.

Usually, a newly created cell has not yet been assigned an antenna. Initially, such a cell is symbolized by an orange arrow pointing towards the direction of the cell sector. As soon as an antenna is referenced in the cell, the arrow is replaced by a black arrow, refer to Fig. 6-32. Please, also consider the site symbol visualization as configured in the display settings dialog, refer to section 3.5.2.

Fig. 6-32 Cell symbol without any antenna (left) and with an assigned antenna (right)

6.5.4.2 Exporting a Cell

A cell can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Cell… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the cell available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.4.3 Access to Cell Settings

The configuration data of a cell can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective cell’s context menu (by right-clicking the cell item) or double-click the cell item in the tree, alternatively.

There is yet another way to conveniently access the cell settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. By double-clicking a cell symbol (arrow or antenna pattern), the respective cell symbol in the viewing area and the according cell item in the tree window are highlighted, and its cell configuration dialog is opened. This action is visualized in Fig. 6-33.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-33 Opening the cell configuration dialog directly from a cell symbol

Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a cell symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the cell configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the cell’s context menu.

The technology specific parameters of the cell configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.5.4.4 General Cell Settings

The General tab of the cell configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-34. Refer to Table 6-12 for a description of the general parameters.

Fig. 6-34 General tab of the cell configuration dialog

Table 6-12 General cell parameters


ID The identifier of the cell. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other cells.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the cell. —

Network Layer The network layer that this cell belongs to. The user can choose among all defined network layers from a combo box.

—


www.actix.com


Antenna

Pattern The antenna assigned to this cell. In this list field, one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this cell. A mouse click on the button to the right leads directly to the antenna configuration dialog of the selected pattern.

—

Azimuth The horizontal orientation of this cell’s antenna (azimuth).

°

Mechanical Tilt The vertical orientation of this cell’s antenna (mechanical downtilt). The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used.

°

Additional Electrical Tilt

The additional electrical tilt of this cell’s antenna. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt, and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available.

°

Position

Height over Ground

The height of the cell antenna over ground. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site.

m

Offset from Site (X)

The position offset of the cell’s antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m

Offset from Site (Y)

The position offset of the cell’s antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m

Hardware Properties

Cable Loss DL A compound Tx loss characterizing the link between the amplifier and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain.

dB

Cable Loss UL A compound Rx loss characterizing the link between the amplifier and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain.

dB

Noise Figure The noise figure of the receiver at this cell. dB

Color

Color for cell area plots

The color to be used for presentations of this cell in best cell area plots. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette.

—

Transmitter

Activated A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this cell are transmitting or not.

For GSM and iDEN cells the transmitters flags are in a separated tab Transmitters (see sections 9.3.2 and 10.3.2).

—

Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a cell is created with the context menu entry Add Cell at the according site item in the configuration data tree.


www.actix.com

6.5.4.5 Cell Custom Parameters

The Custom Parameters tab of the cell configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-35. It lists parameters, which have been defined for a cell in addition to the standard Radioplan parameters for the technology of this cell.

Fig. 6-35 Example for the Custom Parameters tab of the cell configuration dialog

Typically, custom parameters may be imported by customer-specific plugins for the import of radio network planning tool data or measurement data.

Alternatively, a new custom parameter can also be defined by the user by adding parameter name and value pairs to the table grid in Radioplan. They can be added by editing the fields as well as by pasting a 2-column table via clipboard into the table grid.

Likewise, custom parameters can be removed by deleting them from the table in the Custom Parameters tab. For removing a custom parameter for many or all cells together, see on the Cell Settings Overview dialog in section 6.5.4.6.

6.5.4.6 Cell Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all cells together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from a certain cell’s context menu, refer to Fig. 6-36. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the cell settings.

Only the settings of those cells are shown that belong to the same system technology as the cell where the function was invoked.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-36 Cell settings overview

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the cell configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:

• A parameter can simply be displayed in a cell visual by using the context menu item Visualize.

• Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the upper left part


• Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of some context menu functions. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of cells in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).


It is also possible to create a technology independent cell settings overview. This function can be invoked by choosing the menu entry File Current Project Cell Settings. Alternatively, one can select the entry Cell Settings Overview… from the context menu of an arbitrary site. Then a similar overview dialog as shown in Fig. 6-36 is opened, but it only contains technology independent parameters such as the antenna position and orientation. This general overview also contains the settings of repeaters and additional antennas.

The Site and Cell Configuration Mode offers yet another possibility to display a selection of cells in a settings overview dialog. Enter the mode by clicking the icon (tooltip Configure Sites or Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. The mouse pointer automatically turns into a cross-hair. To select certain cells for parameter configuration, just hold down the <Shift> key and draw a polygon around the corresponding sites with the desired cells, vertex by vertex. The final vertex is set with a double click. Then all cells enclosed by the polygon are shown in a settings overview dialog similar to Fig. 6-36.

Remember: Hold down the <Shift> key in the Site and Cell Configuration Mode to open a technology independent overview dialog of the cell settings.


www.actix.com

All custom parameters that are defined at least for one cell in the Overview dialog, are listed in additional columns at the right end of the table, highlighted in orange, refer to Fig. 6-37.

Fig. 6-37 Cell settings overview detail with custom parameters

In order to add a new parameter, select New Parameter… from the context menu on the table grid and specify the parameter key to be used as column header. Consequently, a new column is added to the table.

In order to completely remove a custom parameter from all cells listed in the Overview dialog, select Delete Parameter… from the context menu on the table grid of the column to be removed.

Export to or Update from File

As for all overview settings tables in Radioplan, the contents of the entire Cell Settings Overview table including the column headers can be exported to a tab-delimited text file by selecting Export to File… from the context menu on the table grid (see Fig. 6-29 in section 6.5.3.8).

Likewise, the -visible- table contents can also be updated – completely or partially – by imported data. By selecting Update from File… from the context menu on the table grid, those values are overwritten by the loaded data, for which the table key (here: “ID”) and the column header is found in the loaded tab-delimited text file. The text file may contain the columns and the rows of the Settings Overview table in an arbitrary order and it may also contain only a subset of them. Only the column with the table key (here: “ID”) is mandatory.

6.5.4.7 Transmitter Settings Overview

For GSM and iDEN there is another overview table that shows the transmitter settings of all cells. This transmitter settings overview dialog is available by selecting Transmitter Overview… from a cell’s context menu. Then a dialog in the shape of Fig. 6-38 is opened.

Fig. 6-38 Transmitter settings overview


www.actix.com

The data in this overview table contains the same items as the Transmitter tab of every GSM or iDEN cell. Also the usual edit and filter functions are available in this table as described in section 6.5.4.6 above.

6.5.4.8 Finding a Cell

In larger projects, there is usually a considerable number of sites and cells. In order to quickly find a cell in the network plan and/or associate it with its item in the configuration data tree, the user can quickly search for a cell by name. To this end, the name of the cell just needs to be entered in the cell search toolbar on the upper right of the application window, refer to Fig. 6-39.

Fig. 6-39 Quick Search toolbar for cell names

Alternatively, one can also use the cell lookup function of this toolbar by pulling down the list field and selecting the corresponding cell. Once the icon is pressed, both the cell symbol in the viewing area is highlighted by grippers and the respective cell item in the data tree is selected.

A cell can further be localized in the surface plot from its item in the configuration data tree by using the context menu entry Find in Map. Then the surface plot is shifted such that the associated site is exactly in the center of the current view. Furthermore, it is highlighted by cell grippers for identification.

6.5.4.9 Active Flag of Cells and Transmitters

Each cell has an active flag that determines whether the cell exists in the network plan or not. Furthermore, a cell has at least one transmitter that can be active or not, depending on whether it is on air or not. These two different active flags are configured as follows:

The cell active flag is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan, see Fig. 6-40. If a cell is switched off, it does not exist in the network plan any more; its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area.

Fig. 6-40 Checkbox to toggle the existence of a cell in the network plan

In contrast to that, a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the cell. Alternatively, it can be configured by the according parameter in the cell configuration dialog as apparent from section 6.5.4.4. An exemplary site with one disabled transmitter is shown in Fig. 6-41.

For GSM and iDEN cells each TRX has a transmitter flag. By the Transmitter Active context menu entry of such a cell, the transmitter flags of all TRXs are toggled. Nevertheless, the cell is already displayed as transmitter disabled, if at least the BCCH transmitter is disabled.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-41 A disabled transmitter (red crossed; dashed arrow) at a cell

6.5.4.10 Duplicating and Dragging a Cell

Usually, a network configuration that is to be investigated contains a larger amount of cells that are distributed over the sites. These cells typically differ in only very few parameters (as, e.g., the IDs and antenna directions). For this reason the opportunity is provided to duplicate an existing cell. Then the parameter changes are quickly made. So it is not necessary to import all the cells of the network configuration from the library.

To duplicate a cell, choose Duplicate Cell from an existing cell’s context menu. A new cell is added then to the hierarchical network configuration data tree on the same level as the existing one, i.e. at the same site. By opening the settings dialog of the new cell its parameters can be modified as appropriate. Alternatively, parameters from already configured cells could easily be copied to the new cell as explained in the previous subsection.

Often it is desired to have a newly created cell (be it created with default settings, imported from the library, or duplicated) available at another site. In order to realize this, it is possible to drag the cell with the mouse to the destination site with a simple drag&drop action. Just left-click on the cell icon in the configuration data tree to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. Then drag the cell item to the destination site and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination site’s item appears selected. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved cell is now shown at the destination site.

6.5.4.11 Deleting a Cell

A cell can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Cell from that particular cell’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the cell.

6.5.5 Repeater In Radioplan, a repeater is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell.

A repeater must have exactly one antenna. It can have an individual position offset from the parent site position. The connection to its donor cell is symbolized by a dashed line between the repeater and the donor cell in the viewing area as shown in Fig. 6-42.

Fig. 6-42 A repeater (left) associated with its donor cell

Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. If this is the case, the superordinate site is not allowed to have a pathloss matrix. See section 6.5.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells, repeaters, and additional antennas.


www.actix.com

6.5.5.1 Adding a Repeater

It is possible to add a new repeater and associate it with its designated donor cell. According to the hierarchical network architecture, a repeater is always attached to a site. This site need not necessarily be the same as the site where the associated donor cell is attached. Since a repeater is always associated with a donor cell, it can only be created if there is at least one cell in the network. The new repeater will inherit the network layer and most parameters from its donor cell. The item of the new repeater is shown below the site item in the tree window where it was created, see Fig. 6-43.

Fig. 6-43 A repeater attached to a site in the hierarchical configuration data tree structure

Also cascaded repeaters are supported, i.e. the donor “cell” of a repeater can be another repeater.

Creating a repeater from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Repeater from the designated donor cell’s context menu. The new repeater is added then to the tree directly at the site of the donor cell. It is also possible to move the repeater to another site by a drag and drop action as described in subsection 6.5.5.6.

6.5.5.2 Access to Repeater Settings

The configuration data of a repeater can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective repeater’s context menu (by right-clicking the repeater item) or double-click the repeater item in the tree, alternatively.

There is yet another way to conveniently access the repeater settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. By double-clicking a repeater symbol (arrow or antenna pattern), the respective repeater symbol in the viewing area and the according repeater item in the tree window are highlighted, and its repeater configuration dialog is opened. This action is visualized in Fig. 6-44.

Fig. 6-44 Opening the repeater configuration dialog directly from a repeater symbol

Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a repeater symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the repeater configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the repeater’s context menu.

The technology specific parameters of the repeater configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.5.5.3 General Repeater Settings

The General tab of the repeater configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-45. It is similar to the general cell settings. The description of the general parameters is repeated here for convenience, refer to Table 6-13.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-45 General tab of the repeater configuration dialog

Table 6-13 General repeater parameters


ID The identifier of the repeater. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other repeaters.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the repeater. —

Network Layer The network layer that this repeater’s donor cell belongs to. It could only be changed in the donor cell itself.

—

Antenna

Pattern The antenna assigned to this repeater. In this list field, one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this repeater.

—

Azimuth The horizontal orientation of this repeater’s antenna (azimuth).

°

Mechanical Tilt The vertical orientation of this repeater’s antenna (mechanical downtilt). The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used.

°


The additional electrical tilt of this repeater’s antenna. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt, and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available.

°

Position

Height over Ground The height of the repeater antenna over ground. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site.

m

Offset from Site (X) The position offset of the repeater’s antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m


www.actix.com


Offset from Site (Y) The position offset of the repeater’s antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m

Hardware Properties

Cable Loss DL A compound loss characterizing the link between the repeater and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain.

dB

Color


The color to be used for presentations of this repeater in best cell area plots. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette.

—

Transmitter

Activated A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this repeater are transmitting or not.

—

Donor Cell

Donor Cell The donor cell can be selected from the pulldown list that contains all cells of the respective network layer.

—

Connection Type The type of connection between the donor cell and the repeater. Possible values are ‘radio’, ‘fiber’, and ‘microwave’.

—

Each tab of the repeater configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a repeater is created with the context menu entry Add Repeater at the according cell item in the configuration data tree.

6.5.5.4 Repeater Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all repeaters together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary repeater’s context menu. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the repeater settings. It looks and works similar to the cell settings overview dialog, see Fig. 6-36 in section 6.5.4.6.

6.5.5.5 Switching Repeaters On/Off

Each repeater has an active flag that determines whether the repeater exists in the network plan or not. Furthermore, a repeater has at least one transmitter that can be active or not, depending on whether it is on air or not. These two different active flags are configured as follows:

The repeater active flag is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan, see Fig. 6-46. If a repeater is switched off, it does not exist in the network plan any more; its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-46 Checkbox to toggle the existence of a repeater in the network plan

In contrast to that, a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the repeater. Alternatively, it can be configured by the according parameter in the repeater configuration dialog as apparent from section 6.5.5.3.

6.5.5.6 Dragging a Repeater

Often it is desired to have a newly created repeater be located at another site. In order to realize this, it is possible to drag the repeater with the mouse to the destination site with a simple drag and drop action. Just left-click on the repeater icon in the configuration data tree to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. Then drag the repeater item to the destination site and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination site’s item appears selected. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved repeater is now shown at the new site.

Dragging a repeater to another site does not change the association to its donor cell. The donor cell can be modified in the repeater settings dialog as described in section 6.5.5.3.

6.5.5.7 Deleting a Repeater

A repeater can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete from that particular repeater’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the repeater.

6.5.6 Additional Antenna In Radioplan, an additional antenna is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a cell that in turn must have a (main) antenna. An additional antenna always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell.

An additional antenna must have exactly one antenna. It can have an individual position offset from the parent site position.

An additional antenna should not be mixed up with a normal antenna pattern (i.e. template) which is described in section 6.5.9. An additional antenna is used in Radioplan to model the case that a cell has several antenna patterns. In this case, there is one antenna pattern directly assigned to the cell; all other antennas are modeled by additional antennas.

Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. If this is the case, the superordinate site is not allowed to have a pathloss matrix. See section 6.5.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells, repeaters, and additional antennas.

6.5.6.1 Adding an Additional Antenna at a Cell

It is possible to add a new additional antenna at its designated donor cell. According to the hierarchical network architecture, an additional antenna is always subordinate to its cell in the network configuration. Hence, it can only be created if there is at least one cell in the


www.actix.com

network. The new additional antenna will inherit the network layer and most parameters from its cell. The item of the new additional antenna is shown below the cell item in the tree window, see Fig. 6-47.

Fig. 6-47 An additional antenna with its cell in the hierarchical configuration data tree structure

Creating an additional antenna from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Additional Antenna from the designated cell’s context menu. The new additional antenna is added then to the tree directly beneath the according cell.

6.5.6.2 Access to Additional Antenna Settings

The configuration data of an additional antenna can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective additional antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) or double-click the additional antenna item in the tree, alternatively.

There is yet another way to conveniently access the additional antenna settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. By double-clicking an additional antenna symbol (arrow or antenna pattern), the respective additional antenna symbol in the viewing area and the according additional antenna item in the tree window are highlighted, and its additional antenna configuration dialog is opened. This action is visualized in Fig. 6-48.

Fig. 6-48 Opening the additional antenna configuration dialog directly from an additional antenna symbol

Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above an additional antenna symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the additional antenna configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the additional antenna’s context menu.

The technology specific parameters of the additional antenna configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.5.6.3 General Settings of an Additional Antenna

The General tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-49. It is similar to the general cell settings. The description of the general parameters is repeated here for convenience, refer to Table 6-14.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-49 General tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog

Table 6-14 General additional antenna parameters


ID The identifier of the additional antenna. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other additional antennas.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the additional antenna. —

Network Layer The network layer that this additional antenna’s donor cell belongs to. It could only be changed in the donor cell itself.

—

Antenna

Pattern The antenna (pattern) assigned to this additional antenna. In this list field, one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this additional antenna.

—

Azimuth The horizontal orientation of this additional antenna (azimuth).

°

Mechanical Tilt The vertical orientation of this additional antenna (mechanical downtilt). The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used.

°


The additional electrical tilt of this additional antenna. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt, and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available.

°

Position

Height over Ground The height of the additional antenna over ground. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site.

m

Offset from Site (X) The position offset of the additional antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m


www.actix.com


Offset from Site (Y) The position offset of the additional antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m

Hardware Properties

Cable Loss DL A compound loss characterizing the link between the donor cell and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain.

dB

Color


The color to be used for presentations of this additional antenna in best cell area plots. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette.

—

Transmitter

Activated A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this additional antenna are transmitting or not.

—

Each tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when an additional antenna is created with the context menu entry Add Additional Antenna at the according cell item in the configuration data tree.

6.5.6.4 Additional Antenna Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all additional antennas together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary additional antenna’s context menu. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the additional antenna settings. It looks and works similar to the cell settings overview dialog, see Fig. 6-36 in section 6.5.4.6.

6.5.6.5 Switching Additional Antennas On/Off

Each additional antenna has an active flag that determines whether the additional antenna exists in the network plan or not. Furthermore, an additional antenna has at least one transmitter that can be active or not, depending on whether it is on air or not. These two different active flags are configured as follows:

The active flag of the additional antenna is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan, see Fig. 6-50. If an additional antenna is switched off, it does not exist in the network plan any more; its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area.

Fig. 6-50 Checkbox to toggle the existence of an additional antenna in the network plan

In contrast to that, a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the additional antenna. Alternatively, it can be configured by the according parameter in the additional antenna configuration dialog as apparent from section 6.5.6.3.


www.actix.com

6.5.6.6 Deleting an Additional Antenna

An additional antenna can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete from that particular additional antenna’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the additional antenna.

6.5.7 Neighbor Lists Each cell can have a list of neighbor cells for intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system handover – depending on the network layer of the related cell. These neighbor lists are configured in a separate dialog that can be opened by using the entry Neighbor Lists… from a cell’s context menu. An exemplary view of this dialog is shown in Fig. 6-51.

Fig. 6-51 Neighbor list configuration dialog

The lists can be easily configured in the following ways:

• A new neighbor cell can be appended at the end of the list by clicking into the last (empty) field and selecting a cell out of the appearing dropdown list. Then the other fields of the line (Priority, Exclusive Relation flag, Network Layer) have to be added.

• An existing neighbor cell can be modified (i.e. be exchanged against another cell) by editing the according parameter in the list.

• A neighbor cell can be deleted from the list by clicking the field left of the cell to be deleted, and then pressing the <Delete> key.

• The usual filter function in the table grid can be applied to e.g. restrict the visibility of neighbor relations to those of a particular network layer.

Neighbor cell relations can be displayed graphically for each cell by using the function Show Neighbor List from that cell’s context menu. Then for each cell a separate graphics layer is created that would be reused when the neighbor list display of a cell is updated. All generated graphics layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window. An example of the graphical presentation of the neighbor lists of a cell is given in Fig. 6-52.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-52 Graphical presentation of the neighbor list of a cell

A method to automatically allocate or amend cell neighbor lists is included in Radioplan. It is based both on planning data (pathloss predictions) and drive test measurements. The function can be called by choosing the menu entry Tools Neighbor Lists Automatic Update…. A detailed description of this feature can be found in [R-ANP].

6.5.8 Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix represents the radio propagation conditions with respect to a specific cell/antenna location. It contains pathloss values, arranged in regular pixels, from the respective radiation point (i.e. position of an antenna) to each pixel in the matrix. Usually a pathloss matrix is assigned to a cell, a repeater, or an additional antenna.

Radioplan supports multi-resolution pathloss matrices. Some prediction models in radio network planning tools calculate the radio propagation in the short range area around a site with a comparatively higher accuracy and finer resolution than in the surrounding long range area. Such pathloss matrices can be imported into Radioplan and are handled in the same way as in the planning tool.

In Radioplan, a pathloss matrix contains the pure pathloss from the radiation point to each pixel, i.e. isotropic antennas are assumed. Afterwards, the influence of the particular antenna pattern at the respective cell is overlaid to obtain the resulting coverage.

6.5.8.1 Importing a Pathloss Matrix

A pathloss matrix can be imported from the library by clicking Import Pathloss Matrix… from a cell’s, a repeater’s or an additional antenna’s context menu. A file open dialog appears where the user can specify the desired pathloss matrix. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding network element.

Alternatively, a pathloss matrix stored in a georeferenced raster data file can be imported. This is done by selecting Import Pathloss Matrix from Raster Image… from the context menu of a cell, a repeater, or an additional antenna item. In case of a TIFF file, the attribution of color values to pathloss values is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette.

It is even possible to import more than one pathloss matrix that can be held temporarily at a cell. However, in order to work with the network model, to perform any kind of network simulation or analysis, only a single pathloss matrix per cell, repeater, or additional antenna is allowed.


www.actix.com

6.5.8.2 Pathloss Matrix Format

The pathloss matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. 6-53. It consists of two rectangular grids made up of pixels positioned in the horizontal x-y-plane. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a pathloss value in dB. The smaller of the matrices with the short range part (HiRes part) has typically a finer resolution than the larger long range part (LowRes part). In the area of the HiRes part, the pixels of the LowRes part are exchanged.

The width and height of the pixels of both matrices are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. The alignment of the pathloss matrices is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix, i.e. the Northwestern corner. The covered area of a pathloss matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns for the long range part.

PixelWidth LowRes

R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 ...

R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 ...

...

RnCm

R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 ...

R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 ...

...

RnCm


North

West



PixelHeight LowRes

Storage Format

LowRes Part

(optional)HiRes Part

Fig. 6-53 Pathloss matrix format

6.5.8.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Pathloss Matrix

The configuration parameters of a pathloss matrix are basically its positioning, dimension, and grid size for both matrix parts. These parameters are summarized in the pathloss matrix configuration dialog. It can be viewed by choosing Settings… from the matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking on the pathloss matrix item in the configuration tree. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6-54. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-15.

Fig. 6-54 Pathloss matrix configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 6-15 Pathloss matrix parameters


Resolution Low/High

West The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the pathloss matrix. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

m

North The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the pathloss matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.

m

Pixel Width The expansion of a pathloss matrix pixel in West-East direction. m

Pixel Height The expansion of a pathloss matrix pixel in South-North direction. m

Cols The number of columns in the pathloss matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

Rows The number of rows in the pathloss matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

Whether a pathloss matrix is tuned, can be identified in the Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview.

6.5.8.4 Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of all pathloss matrices used in the project together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Current Project Pathloss Settings, refer to Fig. 6-55. Alternatively, the user can select Settings Overview… from a certain pathloss matrix’s context menu. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the pathloss settings.

Fig. 6-55 Pathloss matrix settings overview

In addition to the settings of a single pathloss matrix, this overview dialog also indicates whether the LowRes part and, if available, the HighRes part of the pathloss matrices are tuned or not.

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly work with the pathloss configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:

• Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the lower left part

• Mark table fields and copy their content to other tables and applications via the clipboard


www.actix.com

• Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of some context menu functions. This enables to display a certain group of pathloss matrices in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).

• Highlight a site/cell in the viewing area that belongs to the currently selected line in the table by clicking the Find selected Site button

• Delete several pathloss matrices in one step by selecting the according checkboxes in the Mark for Delete column. The matrices are deleted when the overview dialog is closed by pressing the OK button. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the pathloss matrices.

6.5.8.5 Viewing Pathloss Plots

A surface plot layer can be created from a single pathloss matrix by choosing Show this Matrix from this matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking on the matrix item). Moreover, the antenna applied in a cell can be incorporated to produce another layer. This option is chosen by selecting the entry Show Pathloss incl. Antenna Diagrams from the cell’s context menu (by right-clicking on the cell item). The newly created pathloss layer is displayed then in the viewing area. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling, the color palette, and the alpha blending factor appropriately. See section 3.5.4 how to adjust these settings. Fig. 6-56 shows a typical plot of the pathloss for a single cell.

Fig. 6-56 Sample plot of the pathloss including antenna for a single cell

Besides viewing a single pathloss matrix, it is also possible to create composite layers for the entire network based on the pathloss matrices. Most of these plots can be easily accessed from the icons in the views toolbar, such as the best pilot received power , best interference ratio , best serving cell areas , and cell overlap . More plots are available from the View Configuration Data Plots submenu. Inactive sites / cells are not considered during the creation of these layers. Layers of the same type can be retained if the <Shift> key is held down when clicking one of the toolbar icons or menu entries.

6.5.8.6 Editing a Pathloss Matrix

Under certain circumstances it can be useful to modify a pathloss matrix graphically. For example, this way a certain area could be excluded from any consideration by assigning it a very high pathloss (e.g. 255dB).

In order to modify a pathloss matrix, Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i.e. polygons) in the matrix with a certain pathloss value with the mouse. To do so, one


www.actix.com

has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the pathloss matrix item. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state.


As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated, the chosen pathloss matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid, and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. See section 3.5.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. Alternatively, the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x- and y-direction) can be specified, see Fig. 6-57. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions.


It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw pathloss regions. Section 3.4.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. So if the background image is a map, it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. Thus pathloss regions can be drawn very quickly.

The pathloss regions are drawn by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify the pathloss that is assigned to the region just drawn. The edit pathloss matrix dialog is depicted in Fig. 6-58.

Fig. 6-58 Edit pathloss matrix dialog

After having edited the appropriate pathloss value, the new pathloss region is shown in the surface plot.


6.5.8.7 Duplicating and Dragging Pathloss Matrices

Especially when pathloss matrices generated by empirical pathloss models without any obstacles are used that have a regular shape (e.g. smooth decay towards all directions) it


www.actix.com

seems to be useful to have a possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported once. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from the pathloss matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item). The newly created pathloss matrix is added at the same network element as the original one.

In order to have the new pathloss matrix available at another network element (cell or repeater or additional antenna), it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination network element with a simple drag&drop action. To accomplish this, left-click on the pathloss matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. Then drag the matrix item to the destination network element and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination network element’s item appears selected. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved pathloss matrix is now shown at the destination network element. Fig. 6-59 shows an example of such a drag&drop action.

drag&drop

Fig. 6-59 Dragging a pathloss matrix to another cell

Generally, a dragged pathloss matrix is not aligned with its new network element. One option to realize the alignment is to use the “Synchronize Position with Site/Cell” button from the pathloss matrix configuration dialog which is only visible if the <Shift> key was held down when opening the dialog.

Several pathloss matrices are only allowed to be placed temporarily at a single network element. When used for normal operation as, e.g., network simulation or analysis, only a single pathloss matrix at each network element can be used.

6.5.8.8 Deleting a Pathloss Matrix

A pathloss matrix can be deleted from its associated network element by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. Alternatively, several pathloss matrices can be deleted in one step using the pathloss matrix settings overview dialog as described in section 6.5.8.4. In either case, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the pathloss matrix.

6.5.8.9 Working with Tuned Pathloss Matrices

The Measurement Module allows to tune pathloss matrices with measurements, refer to [R-Meas]. Once pathloss matrices have been tuned they can be stored at a dedicated location for further use. This way the matrices do not need to be tuned every time when the user works with a certain project. Instead, the previously tuned pathloss matrices can be retrieved from their storage place and be imported into the project.

In order to save the tuned matrices from a project, the menu function File Export Export Tuned Predictions…. Then a dialog appears where the user can select the directory to store the tuned matrices in. When confirming this dialog, all tuned pathloss matrices from the project are saved into the selected directory.

Likewise, a complete chunk of tuned pathloss matrices can be imported into a project in one step using the menu function File Import Import Tuned Predictions…. A dialog


www.actix.com

appears where the user can specify the directory to retrieve the previously tuned matrices from. When confirming this dialog, all tuned pathloss matrices from the chosen directory are imported into the project and are automatically associated with the right network elements. In this process, any non-tuned pathloss matrices at those network elements are overridden. Note that in order to be imported, a matrix must fit the non-tuned matrix in extensions, location and resolution.

6.5.9 Antenna In Radioplan, an antenna item describes an antenna pattern that is defined by a vertical and a horizontal diagram. These two cuts are used to interpolate a three-dimensional antenna pattern. Each distinct antenna represents a template that can be referenced arbitrary times from the cells.

The antenna diagram is specified by a horizontal (ϕ -plane), and a vertical (ϑ -plane)

antenna diagram. A gain value can be specified for the antenna. The horizontal pattern must be normalized such that the attenuation has its minimum at °= 0ϕ with

1)0( =°=ϕϕC . For the vertical pattern it is only demanded that

°≤<°−= 9090;1)(min ϑϑϑϑC . Thus it is possible to use antenna patterns with an

incorporated downtilt, i.e. the minimal attenuation is at °≠ 0ϑ .

The three-dimensional antenna pattern is interpolated from the given horizontal and vertical diagrams. Refer to [R-TecRef] for a detailed description of the antenna pattern interpolation. An example pattern comprising a horizontal and a vertical diagram is shown in Fig. 6-60, its three-dimensional presentation from two different perspectives is given in Fig. 6-61.

Fig. 6-60 Example antenna pattern described by a horizontal and a vertical cut

Fig. 6-61 Three-dimensional presentation of the antenna pattern from Fig. 6-60

Antennas of the same type with just different electrical tilt angles are grouped in an antenna family. In order to assign an antenna to a certain antenna family, this antenna


www.actix.com

must be given the respective antenna family name. The hierarchical structure of antenna families and antennas belonging to these families is reflected in the configuration tree structure, refer to Fig. 6-62. Antennas that are not associated with an antenna family belong to the group No Family.

Fig. 6-62 Hierarchical structure of antenna families

In Radioplan a specific antenna model is called antenna family. An antenna family can have a range of allowed electrical tilts. For each tilt angle there could be a separate antenna belonging to the same antenna family.

Especially for network optimization purposes, it might be necessary to group different antenna families (e.g. with different beam widths) that shall be used for antenna type optimization. To this end, the user can freely assign an antenna group name (also called alternative antenna group) to each antenna. All antenna families having the same group name are assumed to belong to one antenna group. If antennas of one antenna family have different alternative antenna group names, this antenna family would consequently belong to all of the referenced alternative antenna groups.

6.5.9.1 Importing an Antenna

Despite very simple and rather theoretical antenna patterns as, e.g., an isotropic antenna, a three-dimensional antenna pattern is quite a complex unit. This is especially true for measured antenna patterns. Thus it is not intended to create an antenna configuration from the scratch. Instead, it is possible to import an antenna configuration from the library.

Antennas do not directly belong to the network hierarchy as network controller, sites, cells, repeaters etc. do. They reside in a separate section of the configuration data tree called Antennas. To import an antenna in Radioplan format, select Import Antenna… from the context menu of the Antennas node of the configuration data tree. Alternatively, an antenna can be imported in the Planet format by using the context menu entry Import PLANET™ Antenna…. If there are already other antennas in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog is opened where the desired antenna configuration file can be chosen. If importing a Radioplan antenna, the available library items are presented by default. Then the antenna is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other antennas.

The import of an antenna does not immediately mean that it is used in the network configuration. It must be referenced by a cell in order to be used.


www.actix.com

6.5.9.2 Exporting an Antenna

An antenna can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Antenna… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the antenna available for other projects, or to preserve it permanently in the library.

6.5.9.3 Duplicating an Antenna

It is possible to duplicate an antenna as soon as it has been imported once. Then the copy could be modified as appropriate. To duplicate an antenna, choose Duplicate Antenna from an existing antenna’s context menu. A new antenna is added then to the Antennas node in the configuration data tree. By opening the configuration dialog of the new antenna its parameters can be modified as appropriate. This is explained in the following section.

6.5.9.4 Inspecting the Antenna Configuration Data

The configuration data of an antenna can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) or double-click the antenna item in the tree, alternatively. The configuration dialog of the antenna is shown in Fig. 6-63. A description of the configuration parameters is found in Table 6-16 whereas the pattern format of the horizontal cut (lower left table) and the vertical cut (lower right table) is explained in Table 6-17.

Fig. 6-63 Antenna configuration dialog

Table 6-16 Antenna parameters


ID The identifier of the antenna. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other antennas.

—

Antenna Family

The name of the antenna family. As normally, the included electrical tilt of an antenna pattern is appended to the antenna ID, this family name is just the ID without the tilt info.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the antenna. —

Gain The antenna gain. dBi

Electrical Tilt The electrical tilt that is incorporated in the vertical antenna diagram.

°


www.actix.com


Beamwidth The 3dB beamwidth of the horizontal antenna diagram. °

Alternative Antenna Group

A string identifier that combines different antenna families in groups for antenna type optimization.

—

The attenuation values of the antenna pattern are positive for a real attenuation and negative for an amplification. Furthermore, the antenna pattern is scaled such that the attenuation is 0 dB for the main lobe of the pattern both in the horizontal and the vertical diagrams. The resulting power offset induced by the antenna pattern for a certain angle is then calculated as antenna power offset (angle) [dB] = antenna gain [dB] – antenna attenuation (angle) [dB].

Table 6-17 Antenna pattern format


Show Diagram A button to show the respective antenna pattern cut (horizontal/vertical) in a separate window.

—

Azimuth/Downtilt The angle in the horizontal/vertical antenna diagram of the associated pattern value.

° [0 … 359]

Attenuation The attenuation of the antenna diagram in a certain direction (i.e. angle). Positive values mean a real attenuation; negative values mean an amplification.

dB

If the antenna diagrams do not define an attenuation value for each integer angle, the missing values are padded with the last value given for an angle smaller than the missing one.

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all antennas of the project together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Current Project Antenna Settings, refer to Fig. 6-64. Alternatively, the user can select Settings Overview… from an arbitrary antenna item’s or the Antennas node’s context menu. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the antenna settings. In addition to the antenna parameters, it also show the number of occurrences for each antenna in the project, given in the right most column.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-64 Antenna settings overview

In the upper part, the dialog has two buttons to automatically fill the antenna family name fields (derived from the antenna IDs, button Update Antenna Families) and to set the electrical tilt values from the antennas IDs (button Update Electrical Tilt from Antenna ID).

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the antenna configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:


• Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a all antennas of a certain type in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).


6.5.9.5 Viewing the Antenna Diagram

Both the horizontal and the vertical diagrams of an antenna can be shown in the viewing area in polar diagrams. These views can be directly accessed from the two Show Diagram buttons in the antenna configuration dialog. Furthermore, the entries Show Horizontal Diagram and Show Vertical Diagram, respectively, from the corresponding antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) allow to display the diagrams. A sample view is shown in Fig. 6-65.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-65 Sample view of a vertical antenna diagram

6.5.9.6 Deleting an Antenna

An antenna can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Antenna from that particular antenna’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the antenna.

All references in those cells, repeaters, or additional antennas that used the deleted antenna are removed, too. Without assigning another antenna to those network elements, the network configuration is incomplete and, thus, a network optimization or simulation could not run.

6.6 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior configuration is mainly relevant for network simulations only. Thus the following explanations in this section refer to some properties of the WiNeS dynamic/snapshot UTRAN simulators that might not be available or necessary in other Radioplan Modules.

The user behavior modeling is generally necessary for considering traffic in network optimization and simulation. While for optimization only a subset of general user related parameters is used across all system technologies, network simulation requires a much more detailed modeling. Because of this, the configuration of the user behavior contains some specific UMTS parameters that are only necessary for network simulation. Yet the user behavior is described in this general configuration chapter due to its general relevance for project setup and optimization independent of the system technology.

The UE profile summarizes the compound properties of a user’s behavior. These properties can be subgrouped concerning the equipment, the mobility, and the service parameters of a user. The service of a user is associated with a certain traffic load that has a determined distribution throughout the simulation area. This traffic distribution is given by a traffic matrix.

A UE profile defines the frame parameters for a certain category of users. During a dynamic network simulation, real UE instances are created that are assigned those frame parameters. That is, a UE profile represents a certain type of UE, not a certain UE instance itself. The amount of traffic that is generated of a given UE profile is specified within the service parameters of that UE profile.


www.actix.com

In the configuration data tree, the user behavior is located in a separated branch called User. This branch contains the UE profiles and the three sub profiles for equipment, mobility, and service parameters. Each of these profiles is located in a separate tree node below the User node.

6.6.1 Assembling a UE Profile As mentioned above, a UE profile comprises three different profiles that describe different aspects of the user behavior. These profiles are:

• equipment profile,

• mobility profile, and

• service profile.

They represent templates that are referenced from a UE profile, i.e. each UE profile is built of pre-defined sets of these three profiles. Fig. 6-66 further explains the relationship between the three template profiles, a UE profile, and actually created UE instances during a dynamic network simulation.

In the case where several UE profiles utilize the same service profile, it has to be determined to which portion each of these UE profiles is used for the activation of UEs. This is accomplished by a weighting factor called Service Portion that has a value between 0 and 1. See subsection 6.6.1.3 for the configuration of the UE profile parameters.

It has to be assured by the user that the sum of all Service Portions of UE profiles that use the same service is equal to 1. Otherwise the offered traffic load during a network simulation is proportionally higher or lower than the configured traffic (see subsection 6.6.6.4).

UE Profile

EquipmentProfile

MobilityProfile

ServiceProfile

EquipmentProfileEquipment

ProfileEquipmentProfileEquipment

ProfileEquipmentProfile

MobilityProfileMobility

ProfileMobilityProfileMobility

ProfileMobilityProfile

ServiceProfileService

ProfileServiceProfileService

ProfileServiceProfile

Templates

«created from»

«created from»

«created from»

Fig. 6-66 A UE profile references equipment, mobility, and service profiles. UEs during a dynamic network simulation are created based on a UE profile.

6.6.1.1 Importing a UE Profile

In general, there are two possibilities to create a new UE profile. Either a pre-defined UE profile can be imported from the library or a new empty UE profile can be added. The latter possibility is explained in the following subsection.

To import a UE profile, select Import UE Profile… from the context menu of the UE Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). If there are already other UE profiles in the user configuration, then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired UE profile configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the UE profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other UE profiles.


www.actix.com

On importing a UE profile, the three referenced subprofiles for equipment, mobility, and service behavior of the user must already exist in the database. Otherwise the subprofiles could not be correctly dereferenced, and the import would fail.

6.6.1.2 Adding a New UE Profile

The second and preferred possibility to create a new UE profile in a project is to add a completely new empty UE profile to the User tree node. This is accomplished by choosing Add UE Profile from the context menu of the UE Profiles node of the configuration data tree. If there are already other UE profiles in the user configuration, then the same entry (called Add Profile here) is also available at them. The new UE profile is immediately added to the user configuration. Note that it does not yet reference any of its sub profiles for equipment, mobility, and service properties. The parameters of the new UE profile can be modified as described in the following subsection.

6.6.1.3 Inspecting the UE Profile Configuration Data

The configuration data of a UE profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective UE profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the UE Profile item) or double-click the UE Profile item in the tree, alternatively. The configuration dialog of the UE profile is shown in Fig. 6-67. The parameters of the UE profile are described in Table 6-18.

The three entries for the subordinate profiles (equipment, mobility, and service profiles) are list fields where the user can choose between all defined template sub profiles of the respective kind. If there are no sub profiles available in at least one of these categories, one has first to create/import the according template sub profiles in order to be able to complete the UE profile definition.

Fig. 6-67 UE profile configuration dialog

In addition, the associated network layer for the UE profile can be chosen. If ‘ALL’ is selected, the traffic is equally divided over all network layers available in the project.

Table 6-18 UE profile parameters


ID The identifier of the UE profile. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other UE profiles.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the UE profile. —


www.actix.com


Service Portion A weighting factor between 0 and 1. It determines the portion of traffic of the associated service profile that is utilized for the UE activation. It can also be used to scale the traffic given by the traffic matrix of the associated service profile.

—

Equipment Profile

In this list field the user can choose one of the predefined equipment profiles.

—

Mobility Profile In this list field, the user can choose one of the predefined mobility profiles.

—

Service Profile In this list field the user can choose one of the predefined service profiles.

—

Network Layer The network layer that the traffic created by this UE profile is associated with. If the setting ‘ALL’ is chosen, the traffic is equally divided across all network layers available in the project.

—

Single User Mode

A checkbox to denote this UE profile for a single UE instance in a dynamic network simulation only. The service portion (see above) must be greater than 0 in order that the single UE is created.

—

Activation Delay The delay counted from the beginning of the simulation when the single UE instance with this UE profile is created.

s

6.6.1.4 UE Profile Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all UE profiles together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary UE profile’s context menu, refer to Fig. 6-68. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the UE profile settings.

Fig. 6-68 UE profile settings overview

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the UE profile configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:



www.actix.com

• Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of UE profiles in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).


6.6.1.5 Duplicating a UE Profile

In order to simplify the definition of further UE profiles from a given one, there is the opportunity to duplicate a UE profile. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original UE profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the UE Profile item). A copy of the UE profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The parameters of the new UE profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections.

6.6.1.6 Deleting a UE Profile

A UE profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular UE profile’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the UE profile.

The deletion of a UE profile does not mean that the referenced template subprofiles (equipment, mobility, and service profiles) are deleted, too. That is, the subprofile definitions can also exist in the user configuration without actually being used in a UE profile.

6.6.2 Equipment Profile The equipment profile of a UE summarizes the hardware properties and most of the used RRM algorithms of the terminal. Some equipment related parameters are, however, service specific. These parameters are thus not given in the equipment profile but rather in the service profile (see section 6.6.4). In particular, the following RRM algorithms are configured in the equipment profile:

• Measurement Processing: Measurements of different parameters are permanently taken and further processed in order to feed algorithms like e.g. Handover.

• Outer Loop Power Control: A default outer loop Power Control algorithm according to [Samp97] (also cited in [Holm04, §9.2.2.3]) is implemented. The controlled target C/I starts at the initial target C/I that is specified in the service profile in terms of the initial target Eb/N0. The adjustment step size and the limits of the outer loop Power Control range can be configured.

• Inner Loop Power Control: Generally, the inner loop Power Control is modeled on a frame basis. However, if fast fading is applied, the TPC commands are processed on a slot basis.

• HSDPA: The supported HSDPA category can be set.

• HSUPA: The supported HSUPA category can be set.

• Acknowledged Mode RLC: The response delay of the UE side RLC can be set.

For further information on these algorithms, please refer to [R-TecRef].

6.6.2.1 Importing an Equipment Profile

To import an equipment profile, select Import Equipment Profile… from the context menu of the Equipment Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). If there are already other equipment profiles in the user configuration, then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired equipment profile configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented.


www.actix.com

Then the equipment profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other equipment profiles. The new equipment profile can now be inspected and modified in the equipment profile configuration dialog. This is explained in the subsections 6.6.2.3 ff.

6.6.2.2 Exporting an Equipment Profile

An equipment profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the equipment profile available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.6.2.3 General Equipment Profile Settings

The configuration data of an equipment profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective equipment profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Equipment Profile item) or double-click the Equipment Profile item in the configuration data tree, alternatively. The General tab of the equipment profile configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-69. The according general equipment profile parameters are described in Table 6-19.

Table 6-19 General equipment profile parameters


ID The identifier of the equipment profile. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other equipment profiles.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the equipment profile. —

Transceiver

Max. Output Power The maximal output power of the UE. dBm

Min. Output Power The minimal output power of the UE. dBm

Noise Figure The noise figure of the receiver in the UE. dB

Additional Attenuation

An additional attenuation of the Tx/Rx signal at the UE, comprising effects like body loss, etc.

dB

Outer Loop Power Control

Target SIR Step Size

The incremental value of the outer loop power control if an error occurred. The according decrement when no error is detected is the incremental value multiplied by the configured target BLER (see section 6.6.4).

dB

Target SIR Limits Around Initial Value

The two-side limits of the target SIR for the outer loop power control around the configured initial target SIR (see section 6.6.4).

+/- .. dB

Pilot Measurement Filtering

Ec/Io Filter Activated

A checkbox to enable the filtering of the received pilot Ec/I0.

—

Window Size The filter length. # UMTS frames

HSDPA

Equipment Supports HSDPA

A checkbox to enable this equipment to support the HSDPA.

—

HSDPA Category The HSDPA category of the equipment according to [25.306, §5.1]. Possible values are 1 .. 12.

—

PCPICH SIR – CQI Mapping…

A button to open the mapping table between pilot SIR and CQI.

—


www.actix.com


HSUPA

Equipment Supports HSUPA

A checkbox to enable this equipment to support the HSUPA.

—

HSUPA Category The HSUPA category of the equipment according to [25.306, §5.1]. Possible values are 1 .. 6.

—

Acknowledged Mode RLC

Response Delay The ARQ response delay on the uplink for the Acknowledged Mode RLC. It can be set in steps of 1 UMTS frame, i.e. 10ms.

ms

Fig. 6-69 General tab of the equipment profile configuration dialog

To filter the received pilot Ec/I0 values has the effect that the number of cells in the Active Set does not change abruptly due to Active Set Control. The Ec/I0 values are averaged over the given filter length (window size) if the according pilot Ec/I0 filter option is activated.

6.6.2.4 Duplicating an Equipment Profile

In order to simplify the definition of further equipment profiles from a given one, there is the opportunity to duplicate an equipment profile. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original equipment profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Equipment Profile item). A copy of the equipment profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The parameters of the new equipment profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections.

6.6.2.5 Deleting an Equipment Profile

An equipment profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular equipment profile’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the equipment profile.


www.actix.com

All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted equipment profile are removed, too. Without assigning another equipment profile to those UE profiles, the network configuration is incomplete and, thus, a network optimization or simulation would not run.

6.6.3 Mobility Profile The mobility profile of a UE characterizes the mobility behavior of a user. Different movement models can be chosen, and different speed parameters can be given.

The movement models to choose from are the following ones:

• No Movement: The simplest movement model. The UE does not move at all during its lifetime (i.e. the service duration).

• Straight Movement: Upon activation, a UE chooses an arbitrary direction in the x-y-plane and starts moving with an initial speed. As soon as it arrives at the simulation area border, it is reflected and moves back into the simulation area again. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. Optionally, the speed can be updated after each change of direction.

• Street Movement: To use this movement model it is required that at least one street is defined in the simulation area. The UEs are activated on the streets of the chosen category according to the underlying traffic matrix. Then they follow the streets, where at every corner they can choose an arbitrary new direction among the branching possibilities. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. Optionally, the speed can be updated after each change of direction.

• Targeted Movement: Upon activation, a UE chooses a final target in a region with high traffic. On its way to this target, it follows a path consisting of segments of given length (parameter Segment Length). The end vertices of these segments are chosen in a way that they are located with high probability in a region with high traffic. Due to this mechanism the UE moves preferably through regions with higher traffic volume. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. Optionally, the speed can be updated after each change of direction.

In order to reduce the computational effort of a dynamic network simulation, the frequency of position updates can be decreased by the parameter Position Update Interval. For the


www.actix.com

default setting of 0s, the movement position of a UE is updated in every frame. For normal simulation areas with dimensions of several kilometers to several tens of kilometers, a movement step size of 1m … 10m seems to be appropriate. This results in values for the position update interval of

Position Update Interval [s] = (1 … 10) / (average speed [m/s]).

6.6.3.1 Importing a Mobility Profile

To import a mobility profile, select Import Mobility Profile… from the context menu of the Mobility Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). If there are already other mobility profiles in the user configuration, then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired mobility profile configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented.

Then the mobility profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other mobility profiles. The new mobility profile can now be inspected and modified in the mobility profile configuration dialog. This is explained in subsection 6.6.3.3.

6.6.3.2 Exporting a Mobility Profile

A mobility profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the mobility profile available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.6.3.3 Inspecting the Mobility Profile Configuration Data

The configuration data of a mobility profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective mobility profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Mobility Profile item) or double-click the Mobility Profile item in the configuration data tree, alternatively. The configuration dialog of the mobility profile is shown in Fig. 6-70. The parameters of the mobility profile are described in Table 6-20.

Table 6-20 Mobility profile parameters


ID The identifier of the mobility profile. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other mobility profiles.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the mobility profile. —

Movement

Movement Model This is a list field where the movement model for the UE can be chosen. Possible values are ‘No Movement’, ‘Straight Movement’, ‘Street Movement’, and ‘Targeted Movement’.

—

Street Category The street category that a UE moves on. A value of ‘any’ indicates that the UE can move on any street category. This parameter is only used for the Street Movement model.

—

Position Update Interval

The time span after which the movement position of a UE is updated by the movement model. A value of 0s means that the UE is moved in every frame.

s

Segment Length The length of a straight movement segment until the direction is changed. This parameter is only used for the Targeted Movement model. Usual values should range between 10m and 100m.

m

Speed

Distribution This is a list field where the speed distribution of the UE can be chosen. Possible values are ‘Uniform’ and ‘Normal’.

—


www.actix.com


Lowest Speed The minimal speed in case of a uniform speed distribution. m/s

Highest Speed The maximal speed in case of a uniform speed distribution. m/s

Mean The average speed in case of a normal speed distribution. m/s

Variance The speed variance in case of a normal speed distribution. (m/s)2

Enable Speed Variation

A checkbox to enable a variable user speed. If this option is activated, the UE will choose a new speed according to the given distribution on each change of direction.

—

Fig. 6-70 Mobility profile configuration dialog

6.6.3.4 Duplicating a Mobility Profile

In order to simplify the definition of further mobility profiles from a given one, there is the opportunity to duplicate a mobility profile. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original mobility profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Mobility Profile item). A copy of the mobility profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The parameters of the new mobility profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsection.

6.6.3.5 Deleting a Mobility Profile

A mobility profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular mobility profile’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the mobility profile.

All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted mobility profile are removed, too. Without assigning another mobility profile to those UE profiles, the network configuration is incomplete and, thus, a network optimization or simulation would not run.

6.6.4 Service Profile All service specific parameters are summarized in the service profile. It contains information about the service arrival process, the traffic model, and physical layer parameters. The service arrival process and the traffic model together form a two level model that is described in more detail in [R-TecRef].


www.actix.com

6.6.4.1 Modeling Services

A service is determined by its service profile. The service profile combines several models and entities that together realize the service specific behavior of the corresponding UE. The components of a service profile and their influence on the user/network behavior are depicted in Fig. 6-71.

Bearer Service Attributes

Service ArrivalProcess

Traffic Model

PHY Properties

Radio BearerSelection

UE Activation

Data Traffic

Data Detection,Power Control

Service Profile

UMTS Traffic Class

Service Type

Radio Bearer Configuration

Traffic Matrix

Fig. 6-71 Assembling a service profile

In the following, the different aspects that have an impact on the service profile settings are surveyed. These aspects are shown to the left in Fig. 6-71.

Radioplan allows to model a great variety of services. Depending on the Radio Bearer definition used, Table 6-21 gives recommendations for valid combinations of typical radio bearers and traffic models for certain service types along with their UMTS traffic classes. Note that it is possible to choose between several data rates for UL and DL (especially for Streaming, Interactive, or Background data services).

Table 6-21 Recommended service modeling

Service Type Traffic Model UMTS Traffic Class

Switching Mode

RLC Mode

Speech Speech / Video, Atoll CS

Conversational circuit switched Transparent

Video Telephony

Speech / Video, Atoll CS


Fax Streaming (CBR), Atoll CS


Transp. Modem

Streaming (VBR), Atoll CS

Conversational, Streaming

circuit switched Transparent

Audio Streaming

Streaming (CBR), Atoll CS


Video Streaming

Streaming (VBR), Atoll CS

Conversational, Streaming

circuit switched Transparent

File Download File, Streaming (VBR), Atoll PS

Interactive, Background

packet switched Acknowledged

Web Browsing WWW, Atoll PS Interactive, Background



www.actix.com

Service Type Traffic Model UMTS Traffic Class

Switching Mode

RLC Mode

SMS, MMS Messaging Background packet switched Acknowledged

E-Mail Messaging, File, Streaming (VBR), Atoll PS

Interactive, Background


In order to model the data source behavior of different services, Radioplan provides several traffic models. These traffic models can be distinguished according to their different statistical properties in UL and DL, and their interactivity capability. Table 6-22 gives an overview of the available traffic models.

Table 6-22 Available traffic models

Traffic Model Description

Speech/Video A non-interactive traffic model for Conversational or Streaming services. It delivers an independent data stream in each UL and DL. The data streams consist of “packets” (active phase) with intermediate silent phases. The mean lengths of both phases as well as the mean service duration are configurable.

The model corresponds to the real time service model described in [30.03], §B.1.2.2. For circuit switched data services, the length of the silent phase may be reduced to 0.

This traffic model is also available in a semi-dynamic version. It enables the high speed mode of the dynamic network simulator.

VoIP A non-interactive traffic model for Conversational packet-switched services. It delivers an independent data stream in each UL and DL. The data streams consist of active and silent phases. The mean lengths of both phases as well as the mean service duration are configurable. Furthermore, the codec, header compression and QoS criteria can be defined.

File Transfer An interactive traffic model for file downloads. A file request message in UL is followed by a single file download in DL. The lengths of both the file request and the file download are configurable.

Web Browsing An interactive traffic model for a web browsing session. It widely corresponds to the packet service session model described in [30.03], §B.1.2.2. This model has been refined in the following aspects:

- For each packet call within the packet service session, a request is sent in uplink. The request size is negative exponentially distributed with a configurable mean size plus a constant offset of 320 bits (= 40 bytes).

- An additional configurable (constant) server response time was introduced. This is the waiting time of the web server at the network controller to answer on a request.

- If the configured mean datagram size differs from 3840 bits (= 480 bytes) as specified in [30.03], the datagram size is not Pareto, but geometrically distributed.

Messaging A non-interactive traffic model for messaging services such as SMS. It is restricted to either UL or DL transmission. The amount of data to be transferred is configurable.

Streaming (Constant Bit Rate)

A non-interactive traffic model for typically streaming services with constant datarate and equal packet size. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services.


www.actix.com

Traffic Model Description

Streaming (Variable Bit Rate, On/Off)

A non-interactive traffic model for typically compressed encoded streaming services with variable datarate and equal packet size. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services.

Streaming (Variable Bit Rate, Gauss)

A non-interactive traffic model for typically compressed encoded streaming services with variable datarate and variable, Gaussian distributed packet size. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services.

Circuit Switched (ATOLL compatible)

A simple traffic model for circuit switched services with independent activity factors for UL and DL. This model is suited for snapshot simulations only. See [ATL-TR] for details.

Packet Switched (ATOLL compatible)

A simple traffic model for packet switched services with independent efficiency factors for UL and DL. This model is suited for snapshot simulations only. See [ATL-TR] for details.

6.6.4.2 Importing a Service Profile

To import a service profile, select Import Service Profile… from the context menu of the Service Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). If there are already other service profiles in the user configuration, then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired service profile configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented.

Then the service profile is imported and added to the configuration data tree together with possibly other service profiles. The new service profile can now be inspected and modified in the service profile configuration dialog. This is explained in subsection 6.6.4.4.

6.6.4.3 Exporting a Service Profile

A service profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the service profile available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.6.4.4 General Service Profile Settings

The configuration data of a service profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective service profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Service Profile item) or double-click the Service Profile item in the tree, alternatively. The General tab of the service profile configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-72. The general parameters of the service profile are described in Table 6-23.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-72 General tab of the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-23 General service profile parameters


Traffic Model Type

Speech / Video The radio button to choose the speech/video traffic model.

—

Speech / Video (Semi-Dynamic)

The radio button to choose the semi-dynamic speech/video traffic model for high speed mode simulations.

—

VoIP (dynamic only)

The radio button to choose the Voice over IP model.

For dynamic simulation only.

—

File Transfer The radio button to choose the file traffic model. —

Web Browsing The radio button to choose the Web Browsing traffic model.

—

Messaging The radio button to choose the messaging traffic model. —

Streaming (Constant Bit Rate)

The radio button to choose the CBR traffic model. —

Streaming (VBR/OnOff)

The radio button to choose the VBR traffic model with on/off switching.

—

Streaming (VBR/Gauss)

The radio button to choose the VBR traffic model with Gaussian packet lengths.

Circuit Switched Service (ATOLL Compatible)

The radio button to choose the ATOLL compatible circuit-switched traffic model.

For snapshot simulation only.

—

Packet Switched Service (ATOLL Compatible)

The radio button to choose the ATOLL compatible packet-switched traffic model.

For snapshot simulation only.

—


www.actix.com


Bearer Service Attributes

Switching Mode A specifier to discriminate between ‘Circuit Switched’ and ’Packet Switched’ services.

—

Traffic Class Depending on the selection of traffic model, the user can specify a UMTS traffic class in this field from the alternatives ‘Conversational’, ‘Streaming’, ‘Interactive’, or ‘Background’.

—

Maximum Bitrate UL/DL

The maximal data rates of this service for uplink or downlink. It must be ensured by the user that the available radio bearers are able to support the specified data rate.

bit/s

Guaranteed Bitrate UL/DL

The guaranteed data rates of this service for uplink or downlink. It must be ensured by the user that the available radio bearers are able to support the specified data rate.

bit/s

Maximum HS Bitrate UL/DL

The maximal high speed data rates of this service for uplink and downlink in conjunction with the QoS Profiling feature on HSPA.

bit/s

Prioritization

Service Priority The service priority that determines the order how services are processed by the Congestion Control and the Inter-Frequency Handover Control. This is a value between 1 and 15 where 1 gives the highest priority. The default service priority is 3.

—

Traffic Handling Priority

The traffic handling priority that determines the order how certain user classes are processed by the Congestion Control and the Inter-Frequency Handover Control. This is a value between 1 and 15 where 1 gives the highest priority. The default priority is 3.

—

Service Arrival Process

Interarrival Time Stretch Factor

The service interarrival process is stretched by this factor. Internally, the service interarrical times are multiplied by this factor.

—

For the Speech/Video traffic model there is a special semi-dynamic modeling available. Network configurations with semi-dynamic UEs can be investigated by dynamic network simulation in high speed mode without losing much of the accuracy compared to fully dynamic simulations. Read more on the high speed simulation mode in [R-Sim].

6.6.4.5 Physical Layer Parameters

The service specific physical layer parameters can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Fig. 6-73 shows the Physical Layer tab of the service profile configuration dialog. The physical layer parameters of the service profile are described in Table 6-24.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-73 Physical Layer tab of the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-24 Service specific physical layer parameters


Eb/No

Decoding Limit UL/DL The Eb/N0 threshold for correct (i.e. error-free) detection of signaling messages in UL and DL for the respective service. This value should be lower than the initial target Eb/N0.

dB

Initial Target UL/DL The initial target Eb/N0 in UL and DL for the service. This value could be modified by outer loop Power Control.

dB

Target Block Error Rate

Target BLER UL/DL The target BLER for the outer loop Power Control in UL and DL. The value ranges between 0 and 1.

—

The UL/DL initial target values for the inner loop Power Control are specified in terms of a target Eb/N0. This value can easily be converted into a corresponding target SIR according to the following relationship:

SIR [dB] = Eb/N0 [dB] - 10 * log10(3840 / (spreading factor * user data rate [kb/s])).

Refer to [R-TecRef] for details on the definition of Eb/N0 and SIR.

Especially if outer loop Power Control is applied, the choice of the decoding limits for UL and DL is crucial because they model the Transport Block (TB) detection thresholds of the modem. If a received TB’s Eb/N0 is above the configured decoding limit, then it is correctly received. Otherwise the TB could not be detected. In order to guarantee a reasonable behavior of the modem, the decoding limit offsets should be chosen slightly smaller than 0dB (-0.5dB … -1dB) such that decoding limits in turn are below the respective target Eb/N0 values.

6.6.4.6 Packet Data Settings

Some settings for packet switched services can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Fig. 6-74 shows the Packet Data tab of the service


www.actix.com

profile configuration dialog. The packet data configuration of the service profile is described in Table 6-25.

Fig. 6-74 Packet Data tab of the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-25 Packet data configuration of the service profile


TCP

Enable TCP Model A flag to enable or disable the TCP model. —

Max. Segment Size The maximal segment size used by TCP. byte

Initial Window UL/DL The initial transmission window for UL and DL.

Max. Segment Size

Loss Window UL/DL The TCP loss window for UL and DL. Max. Segment Size

Restart Window UL/DL

The TCP restart window for UL and DL. Max. Segment Size

Fast Recovery Congestion Window Setting UL/DL

A number specifying the fast recovery congestion window setting. Possible values are 1 or 2.

—


Enable A flag to enable the Acknowledged Mode RLC. —

Maximum Transmissions

The maximal number of transmissions of a single RLC PDU in Acknowledged Mode. If the PDU could not successfully be received, it is lost.

#

Poll on last PDU in Transmission Buffer

Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on the last PDU in the transmission buffer.

—

Poll on last PDU in Retransmission Buffer

Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on the last PDU in the retransmission buffer.

—

Poll every Poll_PDU Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on every Poll_PDU.

—


www.actix.com


Use Window Based Polling

Flags for UL and DL to enable window based polling.

—

Window Size UL/DL The transmission window size of the ARQ algorithm according to [25.322, §9.4].

—

Poll_PDU UL/DL This value gives the number of PDUs to be transmitted before the next polling is done.

# PDUs

Poll_Window UL/DL The required fill level of the transmission window to initiate polling.

%

Timer_Poll_Prohibit See [25.322, §9.5(b)] ms

Timer_Status_Prohibit See [25.322, §9.5(f)] ms

The Default button can be used to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.

6.6.4.7 Traffic Model Configuration

The parameters of the distinct traffic models can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Depending on the choice of traffic model, the model parameters may differ. In the sequel, the configuration tabs of the various traffic models are described.

Speech/Video Traffic Model

The speech/video traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-75 shows the Speech / Video tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-26.

Fig. 6-75 Speech / Video tab in the service profile configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 6-26 Speech/video traffic model parameters


Activity

Mean Active Time This is the mean active time of a speech transmission. The resulting voice activity factor is calculated as (Mean Active Time) / ((Mean Active Time) + (Mean Silent Time)).

s

Mean Silence Time This is the mean silent time of a speech transmission. The resulting voice activity factor is calculated as (Mean Active Time) / ((Mean Active Time) + (Mean Silent Time)).

s

Mean Holding Time The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration).

s

Data Rate

Bitrate UL/DL The data rate of the speech/video service in UL and DL. These values are only given for information here; they are copied from the Bearer Service Attributes section in the General tab.

bit/s

Voice over IP Traffic Model

The Voice over IP traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-76 shows the Voice over IP tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-27.

Fig. 6-76 Voice over IP tab in the service profile configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 6-27 Voice over IP traffic model parameters


Activity

Mean Active Time This is the mean active time of a speech transmission. s

Mean Silence Time This is the mean silent time of a speech transmission. s


s

Codec

Codec Selects the type of speech codec. —

Configure This button is only enabled if the Codec is set to ‘Manual’. Then the speech codec parameters can be set as described below this table.

—

QoS

Max. Tolerable Delay

The maximally tolerable packet delay of VoIP packets in order to not get discarded.

ms

Robust Header Compression

Enable RoHC If this checkbox is activated, robust header compression is enabled during VoIP transmission.

—

Compressor The configuration parameters of the header compression. —

Decompressor The configuration parameters of the header decompression.

—

In case the user has selected ‘Manual’ for the speech codec type, the Configure button is enabled. When pressing it, another dialog is opened that contains the custom VoIP dodec configuration settings. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6-77; Table 6-28 below describes the codec setup.

Fig. 6-77 Custom Voice over IP codec settings dialog

Table 6-28 Voice over IP codec configuration


Payload

Mean Payload Size The mean payload size per VoIP packet. bytes

Payload Std. Deviation

The standard deviation of the VoIP payload size. bytes


www.actix.com


Interarrival Time

Mean IAT The mean interarrival time of voice packets. ms

IAT Std. Deviation The standard deviation of the interarrival time of voice packets.

ms

IAT Distribution Access Order

Choice between determinate of random IAT distribution access order.

—

File Transfer Traffic Model

The file transfer traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-78 shows the File Transfer tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-29.

Fig. 6-78 File Transfer tab in the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-29 File transfer traffic model parameters


File Transfer

Mean File Size UL The mean file size in uplink for a file transfer. This size is usually relatively short (FTP request message).

bits

Mean File Size DL The mean file size in downlink for a file transfer. This size is usually much larger than the uplink value (actual file transfer).

bits

Server Response Time

The constant server response time that models a waiting time between a file request in uplink and the corresponding download.

s


www.actix.com

Web Browsing Traffic Model

The Web Browsing traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-79 shows the WWW tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-30.

Fig. 6-79 WWW tab in the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-30 Web Browsing traffic model parameters


Web Browsing

Mean Packet Call Count

The mean number of packet calls per Web Browsing session.

#

Mean Datagram Count

The mean number of datagrams per packet call. A datagram corresponds to an IP packet.

#

Mean DL Datagram Size

The mean size of a datagram. bits

Mean UL Datagram Body Size

The mean size of the variable part of the UL packet request. The actial UL packet request size is calculated as the sum of a negative exponentially distributed part with given mean plus a constant offset of 40 bytes.

bytes

Mean Datagram IAT

The mean interarrival time between two consecutive datagrams.

s

Mean Reading Time

The mean reading time between two packet calls. A packet call corresponds to an answer to an HTTP request.

s

Server Response Time

The constant server response time that models a waiting time between a HTTP request in uplink and the corresponding download.

s


www.actix.com

Messaging Traffic Model

The Messaging traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-80 shows the Messaging tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-31.

Fig. 6-80 Messaging tab in the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-31 Messaging traffic model parameters


Messaging (SMS/MMS)

Max. Amount of Data

The maximal amount of data bits to carry an SMS. The maximal considered SMS length is restricted to 2400 bits at a SF of 32 on the RACH. If, e.g., SF = 256 is used, the maximal length is only 300 bits.

bits

Direction The direction of data transfer for this unidirectional traffic model. The user can choose between ‘Uplink’ and ‘Downlink’.

—

Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) Traffic Model

The streaming (CBR) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-81 shows the Streaming tab for CBR services in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-32.

Table 6-32 CBR streaming traffic model parameters


Data Quantity


s

Packet Size UL/DL The size of a single data packet in UL and DL. bits


www.actix.com


Data Rates [bits/s]

Data Rate UL/DL The constant data rate in UL and DL. bit/s

Fig. 6-81 Streaming tab for CBR services in the service profile configuration dialog

Streaming (Variable Bit Rate, On/Off) Traffic Model

The VBR streaming (On/Off) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-82 shows the Streaming tab for VBR (On/Off) services in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-33.

Fig. 6-82 Streaming tab for VBR (On/Off) services in the service profile configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 6-33 VBR streaming (On/Off) traffic model parameters


Data Quantity


s

Packet Size UL/DL The size of a single data packet in UL and DL. bits

Data Rates [bits/s]

Peak Data Rate UL/DL

The peak data rate of the packet stream in UL and DL. bit/s

Average Data Rate UL/DL

The average data rate of the packet stream in UL and DL. bit/s

Distribution of On/Off Durations

The distribution of the on/off durations of the data streams in UL and DL. Possible values are ‘Exponential’ and ‘Pareto’.

—

Streaming (Variable Bit Rate, Gauss) Traffic Model

The VBR streaming (Gauss) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-83 shows the Streaming tab for VBR (Gaussian packet size) services in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-34.

Fig. 6-83 Streaming tab for VBR (Gauss) services in the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-34 VBR streaming (Gaussian packet size) traffic model parameters


Data Quantity


s


www.actix.com


Data Rates

Average Data Rate UL/DL

The average data rate in UL and DL. bit/s

Data Rate Std. Deviation UL/DL

The standard deviation of the data packet size in UL and DL.

bits

Autocorrelation Constant UL/DL

The autocorrelation constant characterizing the correlation of the packet size between consecutive data packets for UL and DL.

s

Flow Control

Buffer Dimension The reception buffer dimension in terms of storage time. s

ATOLL Compatible Traffic Models

The ATOLL compatible traffic models can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if they were selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-84 shows the Atoll Service tab in the service profile configuration dialog. Depending on the type of model, either the upper left hand side (circuit switched traffic model) or the right hand side (packet switched traffic model) is enabled. The parameters of these traffic models are described in Table 6-35.

Please refer to [ATL-TR] for a detailed description of these traffic models.

Fig. 6-84 Atoll Service tab in the service profile configuration dialog

Table 6-35 ATOLL compatible traffic model parameters


Circuit Switched

Mean Number of Calls / Hour

The mean number of calls per hour. #

Mean Call Duration The mean call duration. s


www.actix.com


UL Voice Activity Factor

The uplink voice activity factor. This is a value between 0 and 1.

—

DL Voice Activity Factor

The downlink voice activity factor. This is a value between 0 and 1.

—

Optimization Performance Prediction

Coding Factor UL/DL

The coding factor in UL and DL. —

DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio

The average power ratio between DPCCH and DPCH in UL and DL.

—

Packet Switched

Mean Number of Sessions / Hour

The mean number of sessions per hour. #

Mean Reading Time

The mean reading time of a session. This value is only used for determining the probability of CTS to the FACH.

s

UL Efficiency Factor

The efficiency factor of the packet transmission in the uplink. This is a value between 0 and 1.

—

DL Efficiency Factor

The efficiency factor of the packet transmission in the downlink. This is a value between 0 and 1.

—

UL Volume / Session

The mean transmitted data volume of a session in uplink. KByte

DL Volume / Session

The mean transmitted data volume of a session in downlink.

Kbyte

6.6.4.8 Duplicating a Service Profile

In order to simplify the definition of further service profiles from a given one, there is the opportunity to duplicate a service profile. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original service profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Service Profile item). A copy of the service profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The parameters of the new service profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections.

6.6.4.9 Deleting a Service Profile

A service profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular service profile’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the service profile.

All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted service profile are removed, too. Without assigning another service profile to those UE profiles, the network configuration is incomplete and, thus, a network optimization or simulation would not run. Furthermore, if there was a traffic matrix and/or a revenue matrix assigned to that service profile, they are also deleted from the project.


www.actix.com

6.6.5 Creating Generic User Profiles It is also possible to create a set of generic user profiles with one action. This is accomplished by right-clicking on the User folder in the Configuration tab and selecting Add Generic User Profiles (see Fig. 6-85).

Fig. 6-85 Add Generic User Profiles

After selecting this option, a new generic UE profile is created below the UE Profiles node. Together with it, generic profiles for equipment, movement, and service are generated and referenced by the new UE profile.

This generic set of profiles can be used, for example, for traffic matrix generation, see section 12.10.

6.6.6 Traffic Matrix Each service profile is associated with a traffic matrix. A traffic matrix is location based data of traffic density values. The traffic density is given in Erlang/km2. The traffic values in the traffic matrices are used for several purposes:

• Traffic and load distribution: For network optimization, a traffic matrix can be used to create load distributed throughout the network. So the network can be optimized for carrying a defined network load.

• Zero traffic masking: Areas with no traffic can be excluded from network optimization in order to focus on traffic relevant areas.

• UE activation: New UEs are activated during a network simulation according to the spatial distribution of the relative traffic values in the traffic matrices. That is, UEs are created with higher probability at positions with higher traffic values.

• Targeted movement: Users in a dynamic network simulation move preferably along paths with higher traffic. The relative traffic values in the traffic matrices are used for this directly.

• Interarrival time of the service arrival process: The mean interarrival time of UE activations for a certain service is calculated from the given mean holding time of the service and the total traffic density (given through the traffic matrix).

A traffic matrix is located subordinate to the respective service profile in the configuration data tree.


www.actix.com

6.6.6.1 Importing a Traffic Matrix

There are two possibilities to import a traffic matrix. One can import

• either a predefined traffic matrix from the library or another project,


For each service profile, only a single traffic matrix is supported. Vice versa, each service profile immediately needs a traffic matrix because otherwise no UE at all would be created during a network simulation, if this service profile is referenced in UE profile(s). In order to allow for duplicate&move actions with traffic matrices in the configuration data tree between several service profiles, it is possible to temporarily have more than one traffic matrix at a certain service profile.

To import a matrix from the library or a stored project, select Import Traffic Matrix… from the superior service profile’s context menu. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a traffic configuration file. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding service profile.

Alternatively, an arbitrary georeferenced raster data file can be imported as traffic matrix. This is done by selecting Import Traffic Matrix from Raster Image… from the superior service profile’s context menu. In case of a TIFF file, the attribution of color values to traffic values is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. The indices in the color palette are directly interpreted as traffic values.

6.6.6.2 Traffic Matrix Format

The traffic matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. 6-86. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a relative traffic density value in Erlang/km2. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. The alignment of a traffic matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix, i.e. the Northwestern corner. The covered area of a traffic matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.

R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 ...

R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 ...

...

PixelWidth

RnCm


North

West



PixelHeightPixelHeight

Storage Format

Fig. 6-86 Traffic matrix format

Since a traffic matrix is always associated with a single service profile, it is justified to represent the traffic of one service in terms of Erlangs. A mean traffic of 1 Erlang means that, on average, one UE uses the corresponding service at the same time. However, the traffic of different services cannot be compared because, in general, these services have different (and even varying) data rates and different service activity statistics. Please also refer to the notion of “equivalent traffic” as used for optimization in [R-ACP].


www.actix.com

6.6.6.3 Exporting a Traffic Matrix

A traffic matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export Traffic Matrix to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the traffic matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active, the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area.

6.6.6.4 Inspecting the Settings of a Traffic Matrix

The configuration parameters of a traffic matrix are its positioning, dimension, and grid size. These parameters are summarized in the traffic matrix configuration dialog. This dialog can be accessed by selecting Settings… from the traffic matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking its item in the configuration data tree. It is shown in Fig. 6-87. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-36.

Fig. 6-87 Traffic matrix configuration dialog

Table 6-36 Traffic matrix parameters


Matrix Settings

West The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the traffic matrix. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

m

North The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the traffic matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.

m

Pixel Width The expansion of a traffic matrix pixel in West-East direction. m

Pixel Height The expansion of a traffic matrix pixel in South-North direction.

m

Cols The number of columns in the traffic matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

Rows The number of rows in the traffic matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

6.6.6.5 Viewing a Traffic Matrix

A surface plot layer can be created from a traffic matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix (by right-clicking on the matrix item). For each service, a separate layer is created. The newly created traffic layer is shown then in the viewing area. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling, the color palette, and the alpha blending factor appropriately. See section 3.5.4 how to adjust these settings in the layer settings dialog. Fig. 6-88 shows a sample traffic matrix where the traffic is concentrated on the streets.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-88 A traffic matrix which basically concentrates the traffic to the streets (in yellow)

6.6.6.6 Defining a New Traffic Matrix

If no traffic data are available for the simulation area, they can also be created in Radioplan. For this purpose, add a new empty traffic matrix to a service profile by choosing Add new Matrix from that service profile’s context menu. If there are already other traffic matrices then the same entry is also available from their context menus. The user can then choose a pixel resolution in the grid settings dialog (see Fig. 6-89). The configured pixel resolution is used for both the pixel width and height. The new matrix is immediately added to the configuration data tree below the corresponding service profile. It is rectangular and spans the total simulation area. In case of an arbitrary polygonal simulation area, the matrix covers the encompassing rectangle.

Fig. 6-89 The matrix resolution settings dialog is shown prior to creating a matrix to determine the pixel size.

The resulting matrix settings can be inspected in the matrix configuration dialog as described in subsection 6.6.6.4. It is still empty in the beginning, i.e. it is filled with zeros only.

In order to modify the initially empty matrix, Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i.e. polygons) in the new traffic matrix with a certain relative/absolute traffic value with the mouse. To do so, one has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix item. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state.


www.actix.com


As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated, the chosen traffic matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid, and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. See section 3.5.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. Alternatively, the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x- and y-direction) can be specified, see Fig. 6-90. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions.


It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw traffic regions. section 3.4.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. So if the background image is a map, it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. Thus traffic regions can be drawn very quickly.

The traffic regions are drawn by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify the traffic density that is assigned to the region just drawn. The associated service profile of the displayed traffic matrix is currently selected. The user could choose another service profile from the list field. In this case, the very recent modification would by applied to the traffic matrix of that service profile instead. The traffic dialog is depicted in Fig. 6-91.

Fig. 6-91 Traffic dialog

After having edited the appropriate (relative) traffic density, the new traffic region is shown in the surface plot.


6.6.6.7 Creating a Traffic Matrix from a Surface Plot Layer

Any existing surface plot layer can be used to create a traffic matrix from it under consideration of freely definable clutter weights.


www.actix.com

In order to use the function, the layer with the assumed traffic values must be created before. This can be accomplished using the various layer manipulation functions of Radioplan as detailed in section 12.5.

Then the service profile must be determined where the new traffic matrix shall be added. By using the Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… entry from the context menu of that service profile item in the Configuration tab of the tree window the traffic matrix generation dialog is opened which is shown in Fig. 6-92.

Fig. 6-92 Create Traffic Matrix from Layer dialog

In this dialog, the user can determine the underlying layer that the traffic matrix shall be created from. All available layers are given in the topmost list field where the desired one can be selected. In the lower part of the dialog, a table with the clutter classes is shown. Each clutter class is assigned a weighting factor that is set to 1 initially. These weighting factors can be modified in the table, however, in order to be used for the traffic matrix generation. If the weighting factor of a certain clutter class is not defined in the table then a factor of 1 is assumed for that class as it exists in the clutter matrix. In the unlikely case that all weighting factors are 0, they are all assumed to be 1 in order to obtain a useful result. Lastly, the general scaling factor which is given in the middle of the dialog might be adjusted, if necessary.

The traffic matrix is then determined as follows: For each pixel i of the resulting traffic matrix, the according traffic value it is calculated as

∑ ∑∈

∈

⋅⋅

⋅⋅=iCellk

iCellkkk

iiki mcw

mcwmft,

,

)()(

where f is the general scaling factor, im is the value from the original layer at pixel i ,

and )( icw is the the weighting factor of the clutter class at pixel i . iCell, denotes the set

of all pixels that belong to the cell that contains the pixel i . The cell areas (i.e. the sets of pixels that each are associated with a certain cell) are determined according to the best server criterion.

The result is a new traffic matrix that is added below the selected service profile in the configuration data tree. Be aware that this is a relative traffic matrix. It is up to the user to scale the traffic values of the matrix properly to end up with a reasonable traffic load. This can be accomplished by adjusting the scaling factor in the traffic matrix configuration dialog accordingly, refer to subsection 6.6.6.4.

For an automatic generation of a traffic matrix based on cell counters, see on Traffic Matrix Generation in section 12.10.


www.actix.com

An alternative way to create a traffic matrix from cell-based data is described below.

How to generate a Radioplan traffic matrix from cell-specific traffic values?

Assume there are cell-specific traffic values given for a particular service. Basically, this kind of traffic description is a mapping of traffic values to cell IDs which can be represented in a table. In order to import this table into Radioplan, the embedded clipboard must be opened first by using the menu entry Edit Embedded Clipboard (Table). Then the traffic table can be copied into the embedded clipboard with a normal copy&paste action.

The next step is to create a surface plot layer with the weighted traffic values per cell. This is done by selecting the column with the traffic values in the embedded clipboard and then hitting the right mouse button somewhere in the selected column. Choose Graph Selection

Mapped Surface Plot from the appearing context menu as shown below.

Fig. 6-93 Using the Graph Selection menu on the cell-based data in the Embedded Clipboard

A dialog is shown where the correct column with the cell IDs must be selected in the Cell Name field. Moreover, the flag Weight Values by Covered Cell Area must be selected in order to weight the cell-specific traffic values with the according cell areas.

Fig. 6-94 Create Surface Plot from Table dialog

After confirming these settings, a new surface plot layer is created representing the weighted traffic plot per cell. An example is given in the figure below.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-95 Example mapped surface plot resulting from Embedded Clipboard data

After having created the original layer for the generation of the new traffic matrix, the second phase of the procedure can be tackled. First a service profile from the configuration data tree must be determined where the new traffic matrix shall be added. In this example we take a service profile ‘Generic Service’ for simplicity. By choosing the function Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… from this service profile’s context menu, the traffic matrix generation dialog is opened. Here the weighted traffic plot that was just created should be selected. Furthermore, the clutter weights can be adjusted in the lower table if such values are available.

Fig. 6-96 Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer dialog

After confirming the settings in the traffic matrix generation dialog, the new traffic matrix is created. Its item is immediately added in the configuration data tree below the selected service profile.

In order to view the new traffic matrix, choose the Show this Matrix entry from the matrix’s context menu.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-97 Show this Matrix function in the Traffic Matrix context menu

The resulting traffic matrix in the example is shown below.

Fig. 6-98 Example traffic matrix resulting further from the creation with clutter weighting

6.6.6.8 Duplicating and Dragging a Traffic Matrix

Since traffic matrices for different services usually cover the same area with likely similar traffic loads, there is the possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported once (or created from the scratch). This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from the traffic matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item). The newly created traffic matrix is added at the same service profile as the original one.

In order to have the new traffic matrix available for another service profile, it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination service profile with a simple drag&drop action. To accomplish this, left-click on the traffic matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. Then drag the matrix item to the destination service profile and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination service profile’s item appears selected. If the <Ctrl> key is held down during the drag&drop action, the traffic matrix is automatically duplicated. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved/copied traffic matrix is now shown at the destination service profile.

6.6.6.9 Deleting a Traffic Matrix

A traffic matrix can be deleted from its superordinate service profile by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the traffic matrix.


www.actix.com

6.6.7 Revenue Matrix Each service profile can be associated with a revenue matrix. A revenue matrix is location based data of revenue density values generated in the network. The revenue density is given in [currency]/km2. The revenue values in the revenue matrices can be used for Capital Planning and ROI oriented network optimization.

A revenue matrix is located subordinate to the respective service profile in the configuration data tree.

6.6.7.1 Importing a Revenue Matrix

A revenue matrix can be imported in Radioplan format, e.g. coming from another project. For each service profile, only a single revenue matrix is supported. In order to allow for duplicate&move actions with revenue matrices in the configuration data tree between several service profiles, it is possible to temporarily have more than one revenue matrix at a certain service profile.

To import a matrix, select Import Revenue Matrix… from the superior service profile’s context menu. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a revenue configuration file. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown with the icon in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding service profile.

6.6.7.2 Revenue Matrix Format

The revenue matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. 6-99. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a relative revenue density value in [currency]/km2. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. The alignment of a revenue matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix, i.e. the Northwestern corner. The covered area of a revenue matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.

R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 ...

R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 ...

...

PixelWidth

RnCm


North

West



PixelHeightPixelHeight

Storage Format

Fig. 6-99 Revenue matrix format

6.6.7.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Revenue Matrix

The configuration parameters of a revenue matrix are its positioning, dimension, and grid size. These parameters are summarized in the revenue matrix configuration dialog. This dialog can be accessed by selecting Settings… from the revenue matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking its item in the configuration data tree. It is shown in Fig. 6-100. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-37.


www.actix.com

Fig. 6-100 Revenue matrix configuration dialog

Table 6-37 Revenue matrix parameters


Matrix Settings

West The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the revenue matrix. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

m

North The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the revenue matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.

m

Pixel Width The expansion of a revenue matrix pixel in West-East direction.

m

Pixel Height The expansion of a revenue matrix pixel in South-North direction.

m

Cols The number of columns in the revenue matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

Rows The number of rows in the revenue matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.

#

6.6.7.4 Viewing a Revenue Matrix

A surface plot layer can be created from a revenue matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the revenue matrix (by right-clicking on the matrix item). For each service, a separate layer is created. The newly created revenue layer is shown then in the viewing area. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling, the color palette, and the alpha blending factor appropriately. See section 3.5.4 how to adjust these settings in the layer settings dialog.

6.6.7.5 Creating a Revenue Matrix from a Traffic Matrix

Typically, the revenue generated from a network is related to the geographic traffic pattern. Consequently, there is a function to derive a revenue matrix from a traffic matrix.

To invoke this function, choose the Generate Revenue Matrix… entry from the context menu of the respective traffic matrix. Then the user is prompted with a configuration dialog where the revenue matrix generation function can be configured. After confirming the settings by pressing the OK button, the new revenue matrix will be created. It is immediately attached to the same service profile in the configuration data tree as also the original traffic matrix belongs to.

6.6.7.6 Duplicating and Dragging a Revenue Matrix

Since revenue matrices for different service profiles usually cover the same area for a certain network cluster, there is the possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported or created once. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from


www.actix.com

the revenue matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item). The newly created revenue matrix is added at the same service profile as the original one.

In order to have the new revenue matrix available for another service profile, it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination service profile with a simple drag&drop action. To accomplish this, left-click on the revenue matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. Then drag the matrix item to the destination service profile and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination service profile’s item appears selected. If the <Ctrl> key is held down during the drag&drop action, the revenue matrix is automatically duplicated. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved/copied revenue matrix is now shown at the destination service profile.

6.6.7.7 Deleting a Revenue Matrix

A revenue matrix can be deleted from its superordinate service profile by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the revenue matrix.


www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 205

www.actix.com

7 UTRAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of UMTS specific project items in Radioplan. Projects with UMTS network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization, site selection, measurement analysis, pathloss tuning, and dynamic or snapshot network simulation.

7.1 RNC Configuration The UMTS specific network controller is called RNC. It comprises most of the Radio Resource Management algorithms that are relevant for dynamic/snapshot network simulation. In particular, the following Layer 2/3 algorithms are located here:

• Radio Bearer Translation: The Radio Bearer Translation associates services with certain pre-defined UMTS Radio Bearer and Radio Access Bearer parameters. The latter parameters are provided by a Radio Bearer Definition file.

• Admission Control: The Admission Control decides whether an access attempt can be served by the network based on the current local network load in UL and/or DL. The parameterization is cell specific, however.

• Congestion Control: By default, a DL Congestion Control algorithm is applied that is based upon the maximal DL Tx power that cannot be exceeded. Addtionally, an UL Congestion Control algorithm realizes a fast (frame-based) UL Congestion Control that ignores Power Control commands for the UL that would result in an exceeded local UL network load.

• Power Balancing (parameterization): The complete Power Balancing algorithm according to [25.433, §8.3.7.2] is implemented. It is assumed that the RNC initially informs all Node Bs by a single DL POWER CONTROL REQUEST message about the Power Balancing parameters. Only the Power Adjustment Type ‘Common’ is implemented, meaning that all Node Bs have identical Power Balancing parameters. Power Balancing is only applied during Soft/Softer Handover.

• Handover Request Processing: Arriving handover requests from UEs are processed and, if admitted, performed at the RNC. Possible handover types are Hard Handover, Soft/Softer Handover, (hard) Inter-Frequency Handover, and (hard) Inter-System Handover to GSM. The latter handover type is only monitored as outgoing because the GSM network is not modeled in Radioplan for UTRA/FDD.

• Radio Bearer Control: In inactive periods of a DCH connection, it can fall back to one of the cell’s FACHs. As soon as the data stream contains sufficiently much data, the connection is switched back to DCH again.

• FACH and HSDPA Shared MAC (parameterization): Several scheduling methods for the shared MAC on each cell’s FACH and HSDPA can be configured.

• Radio Link Failure (RLF) Detection: Radio link monitoring is implemented according to [25.214, §4.3.3] which applies the radio link failure criteria specified in [25.331, §8.5.6]. DL and UL use the same algorithm with the same parameter settings. Note that RLF Detection is applicable to DCH transmission only.

• Compressed Mode Control: Depending on a certain CPICH Ec/I0 threshold, the UE sends a measurement report to the RNC requesting for Compressed Mode (CM). In case a request is admitted by the RNC, the CM is initiated for the requesting UE.


www.actix.com

Additionally, several Layer 1 procedures are located at the RNC side. Their parameters are however mainly connection specific. These procedures are:

• C/I calculation

• maximum-ratio/selection combining in Soft/Softer Handover in the modem (in conjunction with Node Bs)

• detection of Transport Blocks in the modem (in conjunction with Node Bs)

• Power Control (open-loop, outer-loop, slot-based inner-loop)

• fast data rate up- and downgrading

• adaptation of spreading factor and target C/I during Compressed Mode

All UMTS parameters of the RNC are only needed for network simulation, in particular dynamic simulation. On the contrary, network optimization does not require any RNC configuration.

For further information on these algorithms, please refer to [R-TecRef]. The general RNC parameters can be found in section 6.5.2.

7.1.1 General RNC Settings Once the RNC has been created, its data can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the RNC’s context menu or double-click the RNC item in the tree, alternatively. Fig. 7-1 shows the configuration dialog of the RNC with the General parameters tab. The general parameters of the RNC are described in Table 7-1.

Fig. 7-1 General tab of the RNC configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 7-1 General RNC parameters (for simulation only)


ID The identifier of the RNC. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration.

—

Description An arbitrary string that describes the RNC. —

Vendor Specific RRM Algorithms

Vendor In this list field, the user can select the RRM algorithms from a certain vendor. This choice influences the entire network configuration.

—

Configure Cell Parameter Templates…

Pressing this button opens a dialog where the user can choose a file with templates for cell parameters sets.

—

Radio Bearer Definitions

Specifies the source of the Radio Bearer Definitions used in the simulator. Choosing Use Factory Default Files applies the built-in settings, whereas selecting From Custom Folder and giving a directory in the input field offers the opportunity to enforce a customized Radio Bearer Definition.

—

Neighbor List Support

Use Configured Neighbor Lists

If this checkbox is activated, the neighbor lists configured at each cell are considered in network simulations.

—

Measurement

Measurement Cycle Duration

The interval for measurement reports being sent to the network.

s


Response Delay The ARQ response delay on the downlink for the Acknowledged Mode RLC.

ms

Depending on the chosen vendor specific RRM algorithms, some more parameters for those algorithms can appear in the distinct network element configuration dialogs. However, this User Guide contains only the standard parameters of the implemented default RRM algorithms. In case you purchased Radioplan with certain vendor specific RRM algorithms, please refer to the additional manual(s) for the usage of those algorithms.

Each tab of the RNC configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all its parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when the RNC is created with the context menu entry Add Network Controller at the Network Elements node in the configuration data tree.

7.1.2 Power Control Related Configuration The Power Control, Power Balancing, and Radio Link Failure Detection parameters of the RNC can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC settings dialog. Fig. 7-2 shows shows the Power Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog. The network wide parameters of the Radioplan Outer Loop Power Control, the Power Balancing and Radio Link Failure Detection algorithms are described in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Power Control parameters (for simulation only)


Radioplan Outer Loop Power Control

Step Size The target SIR adjustment step size (typically 0.1 - 0.5 dB ).

It defines the convergence speed of the algorithm. The higher the step size the faster the algorithm converges.

dB


www.actix.com


Limit The two-side limit of the target SIR around the initial target SIR.

dB

Power Balancing

Activate Power Balancing

Checkbox to activate Power Balancing throughout the network.

—

DL Reference Power offset to PCPICH Tx Power

The DL Power IE as specified in [25.433, §9.2.1.21], given relative to the PCPICH Tx power of the respective cell.

dB

Adjustment Ratio

The Adjustment Ratio IE as specified in [25.433, §9.2.2.C]. It mainly determines the convergence rate of the Power Balancing algorithm between different cells. A small value (close to 0) results in faster convergence; a large value (close to 1) results in slower convergence.

—

Adjustment Period

The Adjustment Period IE as specified in [25.433, §9.2.2.B]. During this period the Power Balancing algorithm applies a constant power offset per frame.

# UMTS frames

Max. Adjustment Step

The Max Adjustment Step IE as specified in [25.433, §9.2.2.20]. It is defined as the number of slots where the accumulated power adjustment due to Power Balancing does not exceed 1dB. It can be transformed into a maximal adjustment step size per frame as MaxAdjStepSize[dB] = 15dB / (Max. Adjustment Step).

# UMTS slots

Radio Link Failure Detection

Activate RLF Detection

Checkbox to activate the Radio Link Failure Detection algorithm throughout the entire network.

—

DPCCH SIR offset for bad quality

The Qout measure as defined in [25.101, §6.4.4.1, Fig. 6.1]. This is an offset to the DPCCH SIR target indicating bad quality.

dB

DPCCH SIR offset for good quality

The Qin measure as defined in [25.101, §6.4.4.1, Fig. 6.1]. This is an offset to the DPCCH SIR target indicating good quality.

dB

Quality Window Size

The window size for observing the quality to indicate the synchronization status. During each window period, exactly one synchronization status is indicated.

# UMTS frames

Max. Out of Sync Count

Maximal number of out-of-sync indications. This parameter is defined as N313 in [25.331, §10.3.3.43] and as N_OUTSYNC_IND in [25.433, §9.2.1.47B].

#

Max. In Sync Count

Maximal number of in-sync indications. This parameter is defined as N315 in [25.331, §10.3.3.43] and as N_INSYNC_IND in [25.433, §9.2.1.47A].

#

Max. RLF Timer Value

Maximal value of the RLF timer. This parameter is defined as T313 in [25.331, §10.3.3.43] and as T_RLFAILURE in [25.433, §9.2.1.56A].

# UMTS frames


www.actix.com

Fig. 7-2 Power Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog

7.1.3 Radio Bearer Control Configuration The Radio Bearer Control settings can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Fig. 7-3 shows the Radio Bearer Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog. The traffic volume monitoring parameters are described in Table 7-3.

Fig. 7-3 Radio Bearer Control tab of the RNC configuration dialo


www.actix.com

Table 7-3 Radio Bearer Control parameters (for simulation only)


Pending Time After Trigger

The minimal guard time between two requests for the same Transport Channel switching. This guard would avoid multiple requests if e.g. no DCH resources would be temporarily available.

ms

Use FACH for PS I/B Connection Setup

If this flag is activated, an interactive (I) or background (B) connection would first start on the FACH and later upgrade to DCH when there is enough data available. In the other case, an interactive or background connection would immediately start on the DCH.

—

Traffic Volume Underflow (on DCH)

UL Threshold If the traffic volume is below this UL threshold and simultaneously the according DL condition is met (see next parameter) then a switching from DCH to FACH is initiated.

bytes

DL Threshold If the traffic volume is below this DL threshold and simultaneously the according UL condition is met (see previous parameter) then a switching from DCH to FACH is initiated.

bytes

Time To Trigger The time interval for which the switching condition from DCH to FACH at least must hold.

ms

Traffic Volume Overflow (on RACH)

UL Threshold If this traffic volume threshold in UL is exceeded, a switching from FACH to DCH is initiated.

bytes

DL Threshold If this traffic volume threshold in DL is exceeded, a switching from FACH to DCH is initiated.

bytes

Time To Trigger The time interval for which the switching condition from FACH to DCH at least must hold.

ms

7.1.4 Common Channels Configuration The common channels can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Fig. 7-4 shows the Common Channels tab of the RNC configuration dialog. The common channels parameters are described in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4 Common channels configuration parameters (for simulation only)


HSxPA

Activate HSDPA This flag globally determines whether the HSDPA shall be used in simulations.

—

Activate STTD This flag determines whether Space-Time Transmit Diversity is applied for the HSDPA.

—

Activate Reference Power Adjustment

A flag to decide whether the Reference Power Adjustment is to be taken into account.

—

CQI Feedback Cycle

The CQI feedback cycle as defined in [25.331, §10.3.6.40a].

ms

MAC-d Flow Buffer Low Threshold

The threshold indicating low MAC-d flow buffer level for the Iub capacity allocation algorithm. If the buffer level is below this threshold, new data is requested.

%


www.actix.com


MAC-d Flow Scheduling Despite High Buffer Level

If this flag is activated, the MAC-d flow scheduling is active even for a high buffer level.

—

Activate HSUPA This checkbox activates the HSUPA in the network. —

RACH

Constant Value This constant value is used by the UE to calculate the initial output power on PRACH according to the open loop Power Control procedure, see [25.331, §10.3.6.11].

dB

Power Ramp Step The power step when no acquisition indicator is received, see [25.331, §10.3.6.54].

dB

Power Offset p-m The power offset between the last transmitted preamble and the control part of the message (added to the preamble power to receive the power of the message control part), see [25.331, §10.3.5.8].

dB

Eb/N0 Decoding Limit

The required Eb/N0 decoding limit (for error free reception) of the decoder on the RACH.

dB

Fig. 7-4 Common Channels tab of the RNC configuration dialog


www.actix.com

7.1.5 Global Handover Configuration The global Handover settings are summarized in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Fig. 7-5 shows the Handover tab of the RNC configuration dialog. In this tab, the Measurement Configuration group contains three subgroups in order to parameterize the intra-frequency, the inter-frequency, and the inter-RAT Handover. Their parameters can be configured in separate dialogs that are opened by using the appropriate buttons Intra-Frequency Handover…, Inter-Frequency Handover…, and Inter-RAT Handover… respectively. These dialogs are shown in Fig. 7-6 – Fig. 7-8. The parameters of the global Handover settings are described in Table 7-5.

Fig. 7-5 Handover tab of the RNC configuration dialog

Table 7-5 Global Handover configuration parameters (for simulation only)


Handover Support

Inter-Frequency Handover

Activates inter-frequency handover for the entire RNC region, if supported by the selected RRM algorithms.

—

Inter-RAT Handover

Activates inter-RAT handover for the entire RNC region, if supported by the selected RRM algorithms.

—

Measurement Configuration

Intra-Frequency Handover…

Button to open the intra-frequency Handover settings dialog.

—

Inter-Frequency Handover…

Button to open the inter-frequency Handover settings dialog.

—

Inter-RAT Handover…

Button to open the inter-RAT Handover settings dialog. —


www.actix.com


Common

Reporting Deactivation Threshold

The reporting deactivation threshold determines the number of cells in the Active Set where no measurement reports are sent from the UE to the RNC any more. Basically, this parameter directly corresponds to the maximal Active Set size.

#

Fig. 7-6 Intra-frequency Handover settings dialog


www.actix.com

Fig. 7-7 Inter-Frequency Handover settings dialog

Fig. 7-8 Inter-RAT Handover settings dialog

In order to trigger a Handover, every UE sends according requests to the RNC if certain events occur. The conditions for these Handover reporting events are globally defined in the RNC for its complete network area. Only the cell individual offsets can be modified separately for every cell as explained in section 7.3.4. A summary of the available Handover reporting events is given in Table 7-6, for details refer to [R-TecRef], [25.331]. The measurement quantities of the different Handover types are described in Table 7-7.

Table 7-6 Handover reporting events [25.331, §14.1.2, §14.2.1, §14.3.1] (for simulation only)


www.actix.com

Reporting Event

Description Characterized by

Intra-Frequency Reporting Events

1A A PCPICH enters the Reporting Range Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Weighting Factor, Reporting Interval, Reporting Range

1B A PCPICH leaves the Reporting Range Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Weighting Factor, Reporting Range

1C A non-active PCPICH becomes better than an active PCPICH

Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Reporting Interval

1D Change of best cell Hysteresis, Time to Trigger

1E A PCPICH becomes better than an absolute threshold

Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Threshold

1F A PCPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold

Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Threshold

Inter-Frequency Reporting Events

2A Change of best frequency Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Weighting Factors

2B The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of a non-used frequency is above a certain threshold

Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Threshold for used frequency, Threshold for non-used frequencies, Weighting Factors

2D The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold

Hysteresis, Time to Trigger, Threshold, Weighting Factor

2F The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain threshold


Inter-RAT Reporting Events

3A The estimated quality of the currently used UTRAN frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of the other system is above a certain threshold


Table 7-7 Handover measurement quantities (for simulation only)


Measurement Quantity

Measured Quantity (Intra-Frequency Handover)

The measured quantity used for intra-frequency Handover. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’, ‘CPICH_RSCP’, and ‘Pathloss’.

—

Measured Quantity (Inter-Frequency Handover)

The measured quantity used for inter-frequency Handover. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’ and ‘CPICH_RSCP’.

—

7.1.6 Compressed Mode Configuration The global settings for the Compressed Mode are summarized in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Fig. 7-9 shows the Compressed Mode tab of the RNC configuration dialog.


www.actix.com

In this tab, an activation template can be defined for the CM measurements and the CM method. Seperately the UL and the DL can be enabled for CM. If enabled, SF/2 is always applied as CM method. Furthermore, the use of an alternative code tree can be supported which is recommended to avoid code blocking on the ordinary code tree (see [R-TecRef] for more information).

The parameters of the Compressed Mode in the RNC settings dialog are described in Table 7-8.

Table 7-8 Compressed Mode configuration parameters (for simulation only)


Activation

Measurement Purpose

The measurement purpose indicates whether the TGPS (transmission gap pattern sequence) is to be used for FDD inter-frequency measurements or for GSM inter-system measurements.

—

CM Method These flags enable the CM method ‘Spreading Factor Reduction by Factor 2 (SF/2)’, separately for UL, DL, GSM, and FDD.

—

Use Alternative SC

These flags indicate whether the code for CM has to be assigned from an alternative code tree (true) or from the ordinary code tree (false).

—

Transmission Gap Pattern

TGSN The transmission gap starting slot number. The number of the first slot of the first transmission gap in the first TGP of the sequence.

—

TGL1

TGL2

The transmission gap lengths 1 and 2 (in terms of slots).. The duration of the first and second transmission gap within the TGP, respectively.

According to halving the spreading factor, which is applied as the transmission time reduction method in Radioplan, both TGL values are set to 7 slots – thereby supporting the single-frame method.

# UMTS slots

TGPL1 The TGP length 1. The duration of TGP 1 (in terms of frames).

# UMTS frames

TGPL2 The TGP length 2. The duration of TGP 2 (in terms of frames).

# UMTS frames

TGD The Transmission Gap Start Distance (in terms of slots). The distance between the starting slots of two consecutive transmission gaps within a TGP.

# UMTS slots

TGPRC The Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count. The number of TGPs within the TGP sequence. 0 stands for infinity.

#

Resulting Measurement Period

These fields inform the user about the resulting measurement period for UEs in Compressed Mode. The Calculate button can be used to update the values. The string ‘by event’ means that a Compressed Mode UE would measure either forever or until one of the events 2F, 2B, or 3A occurs.

ms


www.actix.com

Fig. 7-9 Compressed Mode settings dialog

7.2 Node B Configuration A site in a pure UMTS network is called Node B in the following. The Node B basically defines hardware parameters and the site location.

Here only the UMTS related parameters are decscribed. The general Node B parameters can be found in section 6.5.3.

7.2.1 OTSR Configuration The OTSR properties of a Node B can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. Fig. 7-10 shows the OTSR tab of the Node B configuration dialog. The OTSR parameters are described in Table 7-9.


www.actix.com

Fig. 7-10 OTSR tab of the Node B configuration dialog

Table 7-9 OTSR parameters of a Node B


OTSR Technology Installed

A flag to determine whether OTSR technology is installed at this Node B. This information is used e.g. for neighbor list optimization, see [R-ANP].

—


www.actix.com

7.2.2 Node B Hardware Configuration The hardware that a Node B is equipped with can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. Fig. 7-11 shows the Hardware tab of the Node B configuration dialog. The hardware parameters are described in Table 7-10.

Fig. 7-11 Hardware tab of the Node B configuration dialog

Table 7-10 Node B hardware configuration parameters (for simulation only)


Resources

Use Global Credit If enabled, a single credit value is used for both UL and DL, i.e. the hardware capacity may be used for either UL or DL.

—

Capacity Credit The available capacity credit for DL and UL in terms of number of channel elements.

# CE

Capacity Consumption Laws

Cost per RLS (Dedicated Channels)

A list with capacity cost values per radio link set of a dedicated channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements.

# CE

Cost per RL (Dedicated Channels)

A list with capacity cost values per radio link of a dedicated channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements.

# CE

Cost (Common Channels)

A list with capacity cost values per radio link of a common channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements.

# CE


www.actix.com

7.2.3 Node B Connection Configuration The dimension of the Iub interface of a Node B can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. Fig. 7-12 shows the Connection tab of the Node B configuration dialog. The connection parameters are described in Table 7-11.

Fig. 7-12 Connection tab of the Node B configuration dialog

Table 7-11 Node B connection parameters (for simulation only)


Iub Interface

Max. Data Rate for Class A (R99)

The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interface for all Release 99 (DCH) connections of class A.

Mbps

Max. Data Rate for Class A+B (R99)

The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interface for all Release 99 (DCH) connections of classes A and B.

Mbps

Max. Data Rate for Class A+B+C (Total)

The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interace for all user data connections in total of casses A, B, and C.

Mbps


www.actix.com

7.3 UMTS Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. See [R-TecRef] for a deeper explanation on the RRM algorithms that are specified by some of these cell parameters.

In a cell, many different channels can be configured. The following list in Table 7-12 gives a coarse overview.

Table 7-12 Available channels in a cell

Channel Realization

CPICH Out of the two Common Pilot Channels (physical channels), only the Primary one (i.e. PCPICH) is modeled. It is permanently broadcast over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power.

BCH The Broadcast Channel is transmitted on the PCCPCH over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power.

SCH The Synchronization Channel alternates in a time division manner with the PCCPCH. It is only transmitted for a tenth of a slot. The transmit power of PCCPCH and SCH is configured as a common value representing the average power over the entire slot.

FACH A cell can have several FACHs. The first FACH is modeled to be always fully loaded; all other FACHs are used for Channel Type Switching with the DCH. The FACHs are transmitted on the SCCPCH over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power.

AICH As the complementary DL channel for the connection setup procedure on the PRACH, the AICH is modeled to be permanently transmitted with a configurable – but constant – power. The availability of the RACH should be reflected in this Tx power.

PICH The Paging Indicator Channel is used in the paging procedure of the network. It needs to be transmitted at high power without power control because all terminals in a cell need to receive and decode it. The configured transmit power value represents an average power depending on the paging activity.

DCH The Dedicated Channel is available on both UL and DL. It is transmitted physically on the DPCCH and the DPDCH where the first one is permanently on whereas the latter one could have silence periods due to DTX. The DPCH has fast inner loop Power Control, outer loop Power Control, initial (i.e. open loop) Power Control, Soft/Softer Handover, Channel Type Switching with the FACH, and Compressed Mode.

RACH The UL Random Access Channel is transmitted on the PRACH for one or two frames (excl. repeated frames due to ARQ) with a power determined by the initial (i.e. open loop) Power Control.

HSDPA The HSDPA can be enabled on a per-cell basis. A cell could be used exclusively for the HSDPA, e.g. in the case when a dedicated network layer (on a different carrier frequency) is reserved for the HSDPA. Different power modes, scheduling modes, and retry policies can be configured. Furthermore, the user can specify a maximum number of supported users and the used HARQ settings.

HSUPA The HSUPA can be enabled on a per-cell basis. Different scheduling modes and retry policies can be configured. Furthermore, the user can specify a maximum number of supported users.

The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.5.4.

Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.


www.actix.com

7.3.1 UMTS Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 7-13 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 7-13.

Fig. 7-13 Resources tab of the UMTS cell configuration dialog

Table 7-13 Radio resources settings of a UMTS cell


Output Power

Maximum Power The maximal output power of the cell. dBm

PCPICH Power The constant output power on the PCPICH. dBm

Common Channels

PCCPCH/SCH The constant average PCCPCH/SCH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power.

dB

First SCCPCH The constant output power on the first SCCPCH specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor.

dB, %

Addit. SCCPCH/FACH

The constant average output power on any additional SCCPCH specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power. Furthermore, the number of additional SCCPCHs can be determined.

dB, #

AICH The constant AICH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor.

dB, %

PICH The constant PICH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor.

dB, %


www.actix.com


Scrambling Code

Code Number The scrambling code number that is assigned to this cell. The valid range of the scrambling code number is 0 … 511.

—

Scrambling Code Domain

This string denotes the scrambling code domain that the scrambling code of this cell belongs to. If no scrambling code domain is defined, this string can be empty.

—

Second Code Tree Available

A checkbox to deploy a second code tree at this cell. —

Tx/Rx Power Filter (for simulation only)

Activated A checkbox to enable the filtering of Tx/Rx powers at this cell.

—

Window Size The filter length. # UMTS frames

Downlink Load (Optimization)

Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only. This value can be initialized from the total DL power from a network simulation.

dBm

The assembly of the maximally assignable cell output power is depicted in Fig. 7-14. Typically, the compound Tx power of the common control channels (PCPICH, PCCPCH, SCCPCH, AICH, and PICH) ranges between 10% and 20% of the total cell Tx power. These channels are modeled with their average effective power as if they all were broadcast permanently. If the RACH is available, the AICH activity should be configured accordingly higher in order to take the increased number of PRACH acknowledgment signaling on this channel into consideration. The remaining cell Tx power can be utilized by other channels, such as DPCH, PRACH, or HSPDSCH.

AvailableCell Output Power

PICH

SCCPCH

PCCPCH

PCPICH

Max. Output Power

available for Transport Channels

AICH

Fig. 7-14 Assembly of the cell output power in UMTS

The filtering of the Tx powers influences the DL Congestion Control. On the other hand, the Rx power filtering has an impact on the fast UL Congestion Control, the UL Admission Control, and the initial DL Power Control.


www.actix.com

The total cell power parameter of a cell is only used for creating Ec/I0 plots. It represents to total power radiated from that cell. By assigning individual total power values to the cells of a network, customized Ec/I0 plots can be generated. There is the possibility to initialize the total power parameter of all cells from a dynamic or snapshot simulation. This can be done by choosing the context menu function Init Total Cell Tx Power with Parameter at the result parameter ‘PHY.DL.Cell » DL_TxPower [dBm]’ in the Results tab of the tree window. After the total powers have been set properly in the cells, the Ec/I0 plot can be generated by choosing the icon (tooltip Plot Interference Ratio) from the views toolbar. A dialog appears where the option Individual Cell Tx Power must be selected. More details about the generation of Ec/I0 plots can be found in section 3.4.1.

7.3.2 HSDPA Cell Configuration The HSDPA settings of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 7-15 shows the HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct HSDPA settings are described in Table 7-14.

Fig. 7-15 HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog

Table 7-14 HSDPA parameters of a cell


Activate HSDPA A checkbox to enable the HSDPA at this cell. —

Admission

Max. Number of HSDPA Users

The maximum number of HSDPA users allowed in the cell.

#

Retry Policy The retry policy for service requests on the HSDPA. Possible values are ‘Rejection’, ‘TryDCHSetup’, or ‘TryAdjacentCell’.

—


www.actix.com


No User Data on DCH A checkbox to use this cell exclusively for HSDPA, i.e. no user data is transmitted on the DCH.

—

Scheduling

Algorithm The type of scheduling algorithm in the shared MAC of the HSDPA. Possible values are ‘Round Robin’, ‘Best CQI’, and ‘Proportional Fair’.

—

MAC-d Flow Buffer Size

The flow buffer size of the dedicated MAC for HSDPA. # TB

Measurement Power Offset

The measurement power offset in relation to the PCPICH transmit power.

dB

Use CQI Adjustment A checkbox to enable CQI adjustment for HSDPA, i.e. to compensate for CQI mapping offsets to achieve a given initial BLER.

—

Use Max. Bit Rate for QoS Profiling

A checkbox to apply the maximum configured HS data rate for the QoS Profiling feature.

—

HARQ

Redundancy Version The version of the redundancy exploitation used by the HARQ. The user can choose between the options ‘Chase’ (soft combining of all transmitted TBs) and ‘IR’ (incremental redundancy).

—

Max. Processes per UE

The maximal number of stop-and-wait processes maintained by the cell per UE.

#

Max. Retransmissions The maximal number of retransmissions per stop-and-wait process.

#

Window Size The window size for the HARQ. # TBS

Radio Resources

Number of HS-PDSCH The number of HS-PDSCH used in the cell. #

Enable 16QAM A checkbox to determine whether 16QAM is utilized as HSDSCH modulation.

—

HS-PDSCH Power Mode

The power mode of the HS-PDSCH. Possible values are ‘PCPICHOffset’ or ‘Residue’.

—

PCPICH Power Offset The PCPICH Power Offset if the power mode ‘PCPICHOffset’ is chosen.

dB

Power Margin The power margin that is left up to the maximal cell output power if the power mode ‘Residue’ is chosen.

dB

Number of HS-SCCH The number of HS-SCCH used in the cell. #

HS-SCCH Power Mode

The power mode of the HS-SCCH. Possible values are ‘PCPICH Offset’, ‘DPCH Offset’, or ‘CQI Offset’.

—

HS-SCCH Power Offset

The HS-SCCH power offset for either of the power modes.

dB

Min. HS-SCCH Power The minimal HS-SCCH power, specified as PCPICH power offset.

dB

Max. HS-SCCH Power The maximal HS-SCCH power, specified as PCPICH power offset.

dB

Enable F-DPCH A checkbox to enable the F-DPCH for this cell instead of a separate A-DPCH for each user.

—


www.actix.com

In case the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator Module is not licensed, there is a different HSDPA tab that contains some settings relevant for network optimization. Fig. 7-16 shows the HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct parameters can be found in Table 7-14 given above.

Fig. 7-16 HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog for optimization

7.3.3 HSUPA Cell Configuration The HSUPA settings of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 7-17 shows the HSUPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct HSUPA settings are described in Table 7-15.

Table 7-15 HSUPA parameters of a cell (for simulation only)


Activate HSUPA A checkbox to enable the HSDPA at this cell. —

Admission

Max. Number of HSUPA Users

The maximal number of HSUPA users allowed in the cell. #

Retry Policy The retry policy for service requests on the HSUPA. Possible values are ‘Rejection’ and ‘TryDCHSetup’.

—

HARQ

Max. Retransmissions

The maximal number of retransmissions per stop-and-wait process.

#

Scheduling

Algorithm The type of scheduling algorithm in the HSUPA MAC. Possible values are ‘ResourceRequest-Equal’, ‘ResourceRequest-Round Robin’, ‘MaxTP-Equal’ and ‘MaxTP-RoundRobin’.

—

Max. Scheduled E-DCH

The maximal number of E-DCHs scheduled on the HSUPA. #


www.actix.com


Max. Rescheduled E-DCH per TTI

The maximal number of E-DCHs rescheduled in an HSUPA TTI.

#

Use max. Bit Rate for QoS Profiling

A checkbox to apply the maximum configured HS data rate for the QoS Profiling feature.

—

Enable Short TTI (2ms)

A checkbox to enable the short TTI of 2ms. —

Enable Long TTI (10ms)

A checkbox to enable the long TTI of 10ms. —

Radio Resources

Number of E-AGCH

The number of E-AGCH available in the cell. #

Number of E-RGCH/E-HICH

The number of E-RGCH/E-HICH available in the cell. #

E-AGCH Power Offset to PCPICH

The power offset of the E-AGCH in relation to the PCPICH transmit power.

dB

E-RGCH/E-HICH Power Offset to DPCH

The power offset of the E-RGCH and E-HICH in relation to the DPCH transmit power.

dB

Fig. 7-17 HSUPA tab of the cell configuration dialog


www.actix.com

7.3.4 Handover and Cell Selection Parameter Settings The settings for Handover and Cell Selection with cell specific parameters can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 7-18 shows the Handover tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct parameters are described in Table 7-16.

Fig. 7-18 Handover tab of the cell configuration dialog

Table 7-16 Handover and Cell Selection parameters of a cell (for simulation only)


Handover

Cell Individual Offset The cell individual offset of the reporting range for the Handover reporting events 1A and 1B, refer to Table 7-6.

dB

Inter-RAT handover supported

A checkbox to enable handovers to GSM at this cell. —

Inter-frequency handover supported

A checkbox to enable inter-frequency handovers from this cell.

—

Templates Pulldown boxes for selecting parameter set templates for intra-frequency handover (IAF), inter-frequency handover (IEF), and inter-RAT handover (IRAT). The boxes are only enabled if cell parameter templates have been loaded in the RNC, refer to section 7.1.1.

—

Cell Selection/Reselection

Measurement Quantity The measured quantity used for cell (re-)selection. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’ and ‘CPICH_RSCP’.

—


www.actix.com


Min. Pilot RSCP (Qrxlevmin) The minimal CPICH RSCP level to allow a service admission at this cell.

dBm

Qhyst value (RSCP meas.) Hysteresis value for cell (re-)selection if the pilot RSCP is the measured quantity.

dB

Min. Pilot Ec/Io (Qqualmin) The minimal CPICH Ec/I0 level to allow a service admission at this cell.

dB

Qhyst value (Ec/Io meas.) Hysteresis value for cell (re-)selection if the pilot Ec/I0 is the measured quantity.

dB

Max. Allowed UL Tx Power

The maximally allowed UL Tx power of a UE to successfully (re-)select a cell.

dBm

Cell Reselection Timer The “trigger” time for which the cell reselection condition must be fulfilled.

s

7.3.5 Load Control Configuration The load control of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 7-19 shows the Generic Load Control tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct load control parameters are described in Table 7-17.

Fig. 7-19 Generic Load Control tab of the cell configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 7-17 Load Control parameters of a cell (for simulation only)


Radioplan UL Load Control

Maximum UL Load for Admission Control

The maximally allowed UL load factor for the Admission Control to control the network load for this cell. The permissible range is [0, …, 1).

—

Maximum UL Load for Congestion Control

The maximally allowed UL load factor for the Congestion Control to control the network load for this cell. This value must be greater than or equal to the Admission Control UL load factor. The permissible range is [0, …, 1).

—

Radioplan DL Load Control

Admission Control Threshold

The DL threshold relative to the maximal cell output power for the admission of new service attempts. New services are blocked if the instantaneous cell output power exceeds this threshold. Only new SHO links can be allocated. Reasonably, the value must be negative.

dB

Congestion Control Threshold

The DL threshold relative to the maximal cell output power for the Congestion Control. Connections with a high Tx power are handled by the Congestion Control if the instantaneous cell output power exceeds this threshold. Reasonably, the value must be negative.

dB

Compressed Mode

Max. Number of CM Links

The maximum number of links in a cell that can be in Compressed Mode.

#

Radioplan Power Control

Min. DL DPCH Power The minimal DL DPCH transmit power for reference spreading factor 128.

dBm

Max. DL DPCH Power The maximal DL DPCH transmit power for reference spreading factor 128.

dBm

The threshold values of the DL load control are relative to the maximal cell output power, as shown in Fig. 7-20. Since this maximal power can usually be exceeded only for a short period of time (several UMTS frames), the relative thresholds must be negative dB-values, i.e. they are lower than the maximal cell output power. The admission control threshold defines an upper limit for the admission of new service attempts, i.e. above this threshold only new SHO links can be admitted.


www.actix.com

AvailableCell Output Power Admission Threshold

Congestion Control Threshold

Max. Output Power

Fig. 7-20 Relative DL Load Control thresholds

7.3.6 Scrambling Code List Handling In some cases it can be useful to change the scrambling code assignment of the cells in a project. For example, when drive test measurements shall be imported and the drive test was performed at a time when there were different scrambling codes used in the network than in the current network plan, it is necessary to reload those old scrambling codes into the project before the measurements are imported.

For such purposes, scrambling code lists as *.csv files (comma separated) can be exported or imported. The cell settings overview dialog has according functions in its Tools Scrambling Codes pulldown menu. By choosing either of the entries Import… or Export… a file open or save dialog is shown where the respective file can be selected.

In case of importing a scrambling code list, the new settings are first only shown in the cell settings overview dialog without actually making them effective in the project. This way the user can first check the correctness of the scrambling codes before confirming these settings by clicking the OK button of the cell settings overview dialog.

7.4 UMTS Repeater Configuration In Radioplan, a repeater is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell.

The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6.5.5.

7.4.1 UMTS Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig. 7-21 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 7-18.


www.actix.com

Fig. 7-21 Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog

Table 7-18 Repeater UMTS resources settings of a cell


Output Power

Maximum Power The maximal output power of the repeater. dBm

PCPICH Power The constant output power on the PCPICH. dBm

Downlink Load

Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only. This value can be initialized from the total DL power from a network simulation.

dBm

The common control channels at the repeater are controlled proportionally to its PCPICH output power applying the same offsets as in the donor cell.

7.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies, although most parameters are related to UMTS. See section 6.6 for more information.

For the purpose of network optimization and site selection, a specific user configuration is not necessary. However, a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization.

Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 233

www.actix.com

8 CDMA2000 RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of CDMA2000 specific project items in Radioplan. Projects with CDMA2000 network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization, site selection, measurement analysis, and pathloss tuning.

8.1 RNC Configuration The CDMA2000 specific network controller is called RNC. There are no CDMA2000 specific parameters at the RNC. The general RNC parameters can be found in section 6.5.2.

Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any RNC configuration.

8.2 CDMA2000 Base Station Configuration A site in a pure CDMA2000 network is called base station (BS) in the following. There are no CDMA2000 specific parameters at the BS. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6.5.3.

8.3 CDMA2000 Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.5.4.


8.3.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 8-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 Radio resources settings of a CDMA2000 cell


Output Power

Maximum Power The maximal output power of the cell. dBm

FPICH Power The constant output power on the FPICH. dBm

Other CCH Power Offset The compound average output power on the other CCHs specified by an offset to the FPICH output power.

dB

Downlink Load

Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only.

dBm

Scrambling Code

Code Number The scrambling code number that is assigned to this cell. The valid range of the scrambling code number is 0 … 511.

—

Scrambling Code Domain

This string denotes the scrambling code domain that the scrambling code of this cell belongs to. If no scrambling code domain is defined, this string can be empty.

—


www.actix.com

Fig. 8-1 Resources tab of the CDMA2000 cell configuration dialog

The assembly of the maximally assignable cell output power is depicted in Fig. 8-2. Typically, the compound Tx power of the common control channels ranges between 10% and 20% of the total cell Tx power. These channels are modeled with their average effective power as if they all were broadcast permanently. The remaining cell Tx power can be utilized by other channels, e.g. FCH.

AvailableCell Output Power

other CCH

FPICH

Max. Output Power

available for Transport Channels

Fig. 8-2 Assembly of the cell output power in CDMA2000

The total cell power parameter of a cell is only used for creating Ec/I0 plots. It represents to total power radiated from that cell. By assigning individual total power values to the cells of a network, customized Ec/I0 plots can be generated. After the total powers have been set properly in the cells, the Ec/I0 plot can be generated by choosing the icon (tooltip Plot Interference Ratio) from the views toolbar. A dialog appears where the option Individual Cell Tx Power must be selected. More details about the generation of Ec/I0 plots can be found in section 3.4.1.


www.actix.com

8.3.2 Scrambling Code List Handling In some cases, it can be useful to change the scrambling code assignment of the cells in a project. For example, when drive test measurements shall be imported and the drive test was performed at a time when there were different scrambling codes used in the network than in the current network plan, it is necessary to reload those old scrambling codes into the project before the measurements are imported.

For such purposes, scrambling code lists as *.csv files (comma separated) can be exported or imported. The cell settings overview dialog has according functions in its Tools Scrambling Codes pulldown menu. By choosing either of the entries Import… or Export… a File Open or Save dialog is shown where the respective file can be selected.

In case of importing a scrambling code list, the new settings are first only shown in the cell settings overview dialog without actually making them effective in the project. This way the user can first check the correctness of the scrambling codes before confirming these settings by clicking the OK button of the cell settings overview dialog.

8.4 CDMA2000 Repeater Configuration In Radioplan, a repeater is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell.


8.4.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig. 8-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 8-2.

Fig. 8-3 Resources tab of the CDMA2000 repeater configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 8-2 Output power settings of a CDMA2000 repeater


Output Power

Maximum Power The maximal output power of the repeater. dBm

FPICH Power The constant output power on the FPICH. dBm

Downlink Load

Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only.

dBm

The common control channels at the repeater are controlled proportionally to its FPICH output power applying the same offsets as in the donor cell.



Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 237

www.actix.com

9 GSM RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of GSM specific project items in Radioplan. Projects with GSM network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization, site selection, measurement analysis, and pathloss tuning.

9.1 BSC Configuration The GSM specific network controller is called BSC. There are no GSM specific parameters at the BSC. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6.5.2.

Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any BSC configuration.

9.2 GSM Base Station Configuration A site in a pure GSM network is called base station (BS) in the following. There are no GSM specific parameters at the BS. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6.5.3.

9.3 GSM Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.5.4. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.

9.3.1 GSM Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 9-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 9-1.

Fig. 9-1 Resources tab of the GSM cell configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 9-1 Radio resources settings of a GSM cell


Output Power

Output Power The output power of the cell on the BCCH at the antenna connector.

dBm

Serving Cell Calculation

Min. RxPower Threshold

The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e.g. for concentric cells).

If no value is specified the Min. DL RxPower (Coverage cut-off) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.4.1).

dBm

Forbidden Frequencies

List of frequencies which are not allowed for this cell.

A semicolon separated list of the frequency channel numbers.

—

Parameters

HoMarginPBGT The handover margin power budget. dB

Identification

CI The Cell Identity of the cell. —

LAC The Location Area Code for the cell. —

BSIC

NCC The Network Color Code of the cell. —

BCC The Base Station Color Code of the cell. —

9.3.2 GSM Transmitters Configuration The transmitters of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 9-2 shows the Transmitters tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct table columns for the transmitter settings are described in Table 9-2.

Table 9-2 Transmitter table parameters of a GSM cell


Tx The Tx identifier. This can either be ‘BCCH’ or a sequential number for the TCH.

—

Active The active flag of the respective transmitter.

If at least the BCCH Active flag is disabled, the cell’s transmitter is considered as inactive.

—

Hopping Strategy

Defines which hopping strategy is used for this cell. The choices are: ‘Default’, ‘No hopping’, ‘Baseband’, ‘Synth. sector 1…4’, and ‘Synth. site 1…4’.

—

TCH List The list of channel numbers used by the respective Tx.

In case of the BCCH only a single channel number is allowed. For other TCH, a semicolon separated list of channel numbers can be given (for frequency hopping).

—

HSN Hopping Sequence Number —

MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset —


www.actix.com


Number of Logical Ch.

Gives the number of logical channels.

For example, one non-BCCH Tx can support up to 8 full-rate speech logical traffc channels.

—

Fig. 9-2 Transmitters tab of the GSM cell configuration dialog

9.4 GSM Repeater Configuration In Radioplan, a repeater is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6.5.5.

9.4.1 GSM Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig. 9-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 9-3.


www.actix.com

Fig. 9-3 Resources tab of the GSM repeater configuration dialog

Table 9-3 Output power settings of a GSM repeater


Output Power

Output Power The output power of the repeater on the BCCH at the antenna connector.

dBm

Identification

CI The Cell Identity of the repeater. —

LAC The Location Area Code for the repeater. —



Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 241

www.actix.com

10 iDEN RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of iDEN specific project items in Radioplan. Projects with iDEN network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization, site selection, measurement analysis, and pathloss tuning.

10.1 Network Controller Configuration There are no iDEN specific parameters at the Network Controller. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6.5.2.

Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any Network Controller configuration.

10.2 iDEN Base Station Configuration A site in a pure iDEN network is called base station (BS) in the following. There are no iDEN specific parameters at the BS. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6.5.3.

10.3 iDEN Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.5.4. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.

10.3.1 iDEN Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 10-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 10-1.

Table 10-1 Radio resources settings of an iDEN cell


Output Power

Output Power The output power of the cell on the BCCH at the antenna connector.

dBm





dBm

Forbidden Frequencies

List of frequencies which are not allowed for this cell.

A semicolon separated list of the frequency channel numbers.

—

BSIC

Color Code The color code for this cell. —


www.actix.com

Fig. 10-1 Resources tab of the iDEN cell configuration dialog

10.3.2 iDEN Transmitters Configuration The transmitters of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 10-2 shows the Transmitters tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct table columns for the transmitter settings are described in Table 10-2.

Fig. 10-2 Transmitters tab of the iDEN cell configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 10-2 Transmitter table parameters of a iDEN cell


Tx The Tx identifier. This can either be ‘BCCH’ or a sequential number for the TCH.

—

Active The active flag of the respective transmitter.

If at least the BCCH Active flag is disabled, the cell’s transmitter is considered as inactive.

—

Channel The list of channel numbers used by the respective Tx. —

Number of Logical Ch.

Gives the number of logical channels. —

10.4 iDEN Repeater Configuration In Radioplan, a repeater is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell.


10.4.1 iDEN Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig. 10-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 10-3.

Fig. 10-3 Resources tab of the iDEN repeater configuration dialog


www.actix.com

Table 10-3 Output power settings of an iDEN repeater


Output Power

Output Power The output power of the repeater on the BCCH at the antenna connector.

dBm



Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 245

www.actix.com

11 WiMAX RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of WiMAX specific project items in Radioplan. Projects with WiMAX network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization, site selection, measurement analysis, and pathloss tuning.

11.1 Network Controller Configuration There are no WiMAX specific parameters at the Network Controller. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6.5.2.

Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any Network Controller configuration.

11.2 WiMAX Base Station Configuration A site in a pure WiMAX network is called base station (BS) in the following. There are no WiMAX specific parameters at the BS. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6.5.3.

11.3 WiMAX Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.5.4.


11.3.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. 11-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 11-1.

Table 11-1 Radio resources settings of a WiMAX cell


Output Power

Output Power The average output power on the pilot channel at the antenna connector.

dBm





dBm

Channels

Channel Number The WiMAX channel number of this cell. —


www.actix.com

Fig. 11-1 Resources tab of the WiMAX cell configuration dialog

11.4 WiMAX Repeater Configuration In Radioplan, a repeater is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and, thus, the same sytem technology as the donor cell.


11.4.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig. 11-2 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 11-2.

Table 11-2 Output power settings of a WiMAX repeater


Output Power

Pilot Power The average pilot power of the repeater. dBm


www.actix.com

Fig. 11-2 Resources tab of the WiMAX repeater configuration dialog




www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 249

www.actix.com

12 Network Data Evaluation

12.1 Network Performance Data Management Network performance data that are to be evaluated can originate from different sources. For example, network measurement data can be directly loaded from the ActixOne Platform into Radioplan. Other examples of performance data could be drive test data files, performance counter data files or result files of the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator.

All those data files can be loaded into Radioplan in order to be analyzed and post-processed. In order to grant an efficient network data analysis with reasonable memory requirements, it is possible to

• select specific parameters and categories from the results that shall be loaded into Radioplan,

• define a time interval by category to load the data for that specific interval,

• specify an analysis area commonly smaller than the simulation area to load the network performance data for a specific region.

The following scheme in Fig. 12-1 shows the general network performance data management procedure:

Binary ResultsData

Binary ResultsData

Simulation Results Files

WiNeSSimulator

Actix Radioplan

Binary Results Data

Results Import ModuleMeasurement

Files

Measurement Device

SQL Database

PM CountersFiles

Network Performance Management

ActixOne Platform

Measurement Data

Fig. 12-1 Network performance data management

The results import module analyzes the recorded network performance data files and filters the parameters according to the conditions mentioned above. All imported parameters are converted into meta information (parameter name, type and size of data) that is stored in the database, and binary result data files stored in the file system. The SQL database manages the binary files completely. Thus the user need not care about the handling of the binary results data. The advantage of this solution is a considerably faster data access and virtually no limitation on the amount of network data stored. Only the available disk space on the file system sets a physical restriction for them.


www.actix.com

In order to allow for a comparison between network performance results from different simulation runs or against measurement data, it is possible to load several result sets4 into one project like discussed in section 5.9. Furthermore, result sets from other projects are accessible for a comparison which is especially useful for the evaluation of e.g. a simulation series (refer to [R-Sim]).

12.2 Binary File System Configuration and Default Parameter Import Settings The location where binary files are stored can be specified globally in the wines.ini file (see [R-Admin]) by default.

If the feature AskForMDBOnStart is switched on that wines.ini file, the user is prompted for both the database each time Radioplan is started. The binary file system is always located below the directory of the Radioplan database file.

Result parameters are grouped by categories. For the network simulator, these categories are defined together with their parameters and default result loading settings in the resultparameters.ini file; for measurement data from a measurement device the result parameters and categories are defined in the resultparameters_measurements.ini file. These files are installed together with Radioplan and should only be modified with caution. They area tab-delimited ASCII files. Each result parameter is specified by a line together with its category, type, default loading flag, and a short description.

The resultparameterstrans.ini file is used by Radioplan to translate result parameter names from previous versions into an updated naming convention scheme.

Please see [R-Admin] and the relevant module specific user guides for more information on these *.ini files.

12.3 Concept of Result Analysis Once the network performance data have been loaded into Radioplan, they can be analyzed with respect to different aspects. Parameters can be analyzed over time, as spatial plot or as a statistical distribution. Cell-based parameters can be visualised. A summary report can be created for each result set that contains most of the key performance indicators essential for a qualified network performance and capacity analysis. All result data can also be presented in tables which enables an easy internal analysis due to a variety of built-in statistical analysis functions. Also an external analysis is possible due to flexible data export functions. Fig. 12-2 shows the general result analysis capabilities directly supported by Radioplan.

4 all parameters loaded into Radioplan in one import process


www.actix.com

Presentation in a Table

Parameter Set

Spatial Analysisin Surface Plots

Temporal Analysisin X-Y Chart Diagrams

Statistical Analysisin Histogram Charts

Summary Reportin a formatted table

Coinciding DifferentSurface Plots

Statistical Analysisof Surface Plots

Internal/External Analysis

Identifying Trouble Spots

ManipulatingSurface Plots

Inspecting IndividualPlot Data

Cell Param. Analysisin Cell Visuals

Fig. 12-2 Supported types of result analysis

The great flexibility of the data evaluation in Radioplan is furthermore evident from the fact that all the different data presentation means (i.e. surface plot, cell visual, chart diagram, histogram, and table) can easily be transformed from one into another. Moreover, it is possible to convert arbitrary data given in a table into a new result set. The principal data conversion opportunities are presented in Fig. 12-3.

New Result SetNew Result Set

Table

Surface Plot Chart Diagram

Histogram

per pixel

histogram,clutter statistics, ordirect pixel values

x and y valuescell-mapped orposition based values

histogram out of values

New Result Set

Store in Project(as Report)

Cell Visual

cell-based values

Fig. 12-3 Data transformation options supported by Radioplan

A result set is the summary of all parameter sets loaded into Radioplan in one import step, for example, a set of results from one simulation run, a set of drive test files, or a set of performance counters. To enable the direct comparison of results obtained from different simulation runs, or to tune network planning data with real measurement data, Radioplan offers two opportunities:


www.actix.com

• Several result sets can be held in a project in parallel. Parameter names from different result sets are properly amended by suffices as described below.

• Result sets from other projects in the database can be made accessible by choosing Show Results of all Projects from the context menu of an arbitrary item in the Result tab of the tree window (i.e. a project, a result set, a category, or a parameter). The visibility of other projects’ results is controlled by the user rights management. This means that a user can only see the results from those projects that he has authorized access to. Moreover, results from other projects cannot be modified, in particular they cannot be deleted.

The different projects with their result sets, result categories, and parameter sets are displayed in a hierarchical tree structure in the Results tab of the tree window. In order to distinguish the parameters from different result sets, the parameter names are extended by an appropriate numbered suffix. This suffix is added automatically and it is unique for all parameters of a result set. An example of the hierarchical result parameters tree for results from a dynamic network simulation is shown in Fig. 12-4.

Fig. 12-4 Sample view of the Results tab of the tree window

In general, all parameters are monitored in conjunction with a time stamp. The time stamp is given in frames (in case of UMTS/FDD simulation data) or in seconds, alternatively. The symbol indicates the time relation of the parameters. UE-specific parameters

additionally have an associated position. This is indicated by the combined symbol . In surface plots, UE-specific parameters can be presented directly at their associated position. Other parameters can be displayed as cell visuals or also mapped on the cell areas according to their associated site or cell. The cell areas are determined from the pathloss data and the pilot powers as given by the Best Serving Cell layer described in section 3.4.1.

A parameter itself is a record that contains all the items given in Table 12-1.


www.actix.com

Table 12-1 Items of a parameter

Item Description

Parameter Name The name of the parameter, please refer to [R-Meas], [R-TecRef]. The unit is separated by an underscore. For example, the Parameter DL_SIR_DPDCH_dB stands for DPDCH Downlink SIR and is given in dB. Radioplan presents the unit in brackets [].

Value The value for the parameter, can be either a numeric or a string value. A flag for numerical values indicates, if the value is a finite value or a NaN (-Infinity and +Infinity values are handled as NaN’s).

Time Stamp The time stamp (UMTS frame number or time instant) when the parameter was monitored.

In case of snapshot simulation results, this parameter contains the snapshot number.

Position (X and Y value) [m] (optional)

The current position of a UE at the given frame number.

ID The owner of the parameter (e.g. a UE type, cell, site, …).

Instance An instance number to distinguish between different instances of e.g. a UE. The instance number is unique over all UEs.

Assigned NE (optional)

An ID of an assigned network element, if the parameter is related to the ID and to the Assigned NE. For instance, a power value related to a UE can be distinguished by this parameter for different cells.

Carrier Frequency (optional)

In indicator for the carrier frequency or network layer that this parameter belongs to. Especially in hierarchical network structures, an analysis with regard to the carrier frequency can be useful.

A parameter set is the agglomerate of all monitored values for a specific parameter represented by its name. In the sequel, the term ‘parameter’ is also used as a synonym for a parameter set. Parameters have certain properties:

• Parameters are assigned to a specific network element. Different network elements, e.g. UEs, are distinguished by their instance number, beginning from 1.

• If a parameter is associated with two specific network elements, for example a Tx power from a cell to a certain UE instance, the secondary network element is denoted as Assigned NE to characterize this unique relationship.

• Parameters related to different carrier frequencies or network layers as, e.g., measures related to inter-frequency HO can be associated with an indicator for the carrier frequency.

• Positions are available for UE-specific parameters as well as for measurement data. These parameters can be presented in spatial views, each creating a new result data layer. Parameters without position information can nevertheless be displayed in a surface plot. They are mapped onto the cell coverage areas as predicted by the Best Serving Cell plot (see section 3.4.1).

12.4 Analyzing Result Parameters All result parameters in the Results tab of the tree window can be displayed and analyzed in various ways. For this purpose, each result parameter has a context menu that can be selected with the right mouse button. Read more about the result parameter capabilities in section 12.4.1.

The key to the extremely flexible result analysis system of Radioplan is the results selection dialog. It can be used to select result parameters for presentation in different ways and


www.actix.com

granularity. Basically, a certain selection in the results selection dialog represents a filter for the result database of the current Radioplan project. The configuration of the results selection dialog is detailed in section 12.4.2.

12.4.1 Analysis Capabilities of Result Parameters Each result parameter has a context menu that offers the following functionalities:

• Select… leads to the results selection dialog,

• Direct Surface Plot is used to directly create a surface plot layer from this result parameter applying the current settings in the results selection dialog,

• Delete this Parameter… is used to remove the corresponding parameter from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message),

• Expand All is used to expand the category folders in the tree completely,

• Collapse All is used to collapse the category folders in the tree completely, and

• Show Results of all Projects is used to make the results of all those projects visible that the user is authorized to access according to the user rights management.

The entire result set – only of the currently opened project – has some more functions in its context menu:

• Edit… is used to edit all available IDs, Assigned NEs, and any other strings in the result set. With this function it is possible to e.g. exchange the IDs of two measured cells in a measurement result set, if their feeders are exchanged.

• Delete Result Set… is used to remove the entire results set including all of its parameters from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message),

• Rename Result Set… is used to assign this result set a new name, and

• Delete All Results in Project… is used to remove all result sets with their parameters that are loaded into the currently open project from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message).

• More functions may be available depending on the type of the result set, for example:

▫ For a result set created by a drive test measurement import, Create Default Plots… can be used as a shortcut for the display of surface plots for selected parameters, see [R-Meas].

▫ For a result set created by a performance counter import, Aggregate Result Set… can be used to aggregate the contained data, see section 12.12.

In order to manipulate the IDs contained in a result set, the Edit… function from the context menu can be used. Then a dialog with a mapping table between old and new values is shown, refer to Fig. 12-5. The new values in the right column can be edited; either by choosing an existing string value from the pulldown list or completely freely by entering a new string.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-5 Edit result set IDs dialog

In addition to the context menu entries to delete result sets, there are more options for the deletion of multiple result sets in one step. First all result sets that shall be deleted must be selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse or using keyboard commands (arrow keys in combination with <Shift>, <Ctrl>, and <Space>). Then all the selected result sets are deleted in one go by either choosing Delete Result Set… from one of its context menus or by pressing <Delete>. A warning dialog appears in order to avoid unintended deletion.

12.4.2 Results Selection Dialog The key to analyze the result data in Radioplan is the results selection dialog. It can be accessed directly from the context menu of the desired parameter or by double-clicking the parameter item itself. Fig. 12-6 shows the results selection dialog. Using this dialog, all relevant settings can be adjusted for the parameter analysis – as described in the following sections.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-6 Results selection dialog

12.4.2.1 Result Filter

In the left part of the dialog, the currently selected parameter is shown in the combo box and can be changed here as well. Note that the underlying data are loaded into the memory for the currently selected parameter set to determine all available IDs, Instances, Assigned NEs, and carrier frequencies.

The user can decide whether he would like to analyze the data of all network element items of a certain parameter set or he can choose the data of a subset or a single network element. In other words the desired parameter sets can be filtered by selecting one or more IDs, Instances, Assigned NEs, or carrier frequencies as well as by selecting an observation time period and/or a geographical region (simulation/analysis area). The latter two filter conditions can be specified in the Spatial/Temporal Restrictions groups as explained in subsection 12.4.2.5.

The default entry ‘ALL’ means, that the parameters of all the available entries in the respective category (ID, Instance, Assigned NE, Subset of Cells by Carrier) are considered during the data analysis. This technique enables the analysis of a parameter from a global point of view down to a specific instance, e.g. a traced mobile in a very flexible manner. The operating mode of the result parameter selection as a filter is demonstrated in Fig. 12-7.


www.actix.com

DB

Filter

Parameter with• selected ID(s)• selected Instance(s)• selected Assigned NE(s)• selected Carrier(s)• selected Time Period / Snapshots• selected Area (Simulation/Analysis)

Graphical Presentation as:

• Surface Plot• Cell Visual• Chart Graph• Histogram• Table

ID Instance Assigned NE CarrierTime Period /

SnapshotsArea

Parameter (Set)

ID Instance Assigned NE CarrierTime Period /

SnapshotsArea

Parameter (Set)

Fig. 12-7 Filtering effect of the results selection dialog

A description of the different result parameter identification characteristics are given in Table 12-2. In addition, time and area of a parameter can be restricted by the according flags and ranges to the right of the results selection dialog.

Table 12-2 Result parameter identification


Parameter In this list field the parameter name can be chosen. If the result dialog was opened from a certain parameter, then this parameter is already pre-selected.

Unit The unit of the parameter. It is derived from the settings in the resultsparameters.ini and resultparameters_measurements.ini files, and is also displayed in the created presentation of the parameters (e.g. surface plot, diagram, histogram, or table).

Caption The caption of the parameter. It is derived from the parameter name and the settings in the results selection dialog, and is also displayed in the created presentation of the parameters (e.g. surface plot, diagram, histogram, or table).

ID In this list field the user can choose among the available network element IDs that match the parameter specified in the field above. It is possible to select a group of IDs while holding down the <Shift> key. Even non-consecutive IDs can be selected using the <Ctrl> key.

Instance In this list field the user can choose one or a subset of the available instance IDs that match the specified parameter and ID in the fields above. It is possible to select a group of Instances while holding down the <Shift> key. Even non-consecutive Instances can be selected using the <Ctrl> key.

Assigned NE

In this list field the user can choose among the available Assigned Network Elements that match the parameter specified in the field above. It is possible to select a group of Assigned NEs while holding down the <Shift> key. Even non-consecutive Assigned NEs can be selected using the <Ctrl> key.

Subset of Cells by Carrier

In this list field for results parameters whose ID’s or Assigned NE’s NE type is “cell”, a subset of cells can be selected, whereas all cells in this subset transmit on the same carrier frequency. It is possible to select a group of cell subsets while holding down the <Shift> key. Even non-consecutive cell subsets can be selected using the <Ctrl> key.


www.actix.com

Results can be represented in spatial views (surface plots), in charts over time, or as a histogram. Furthermore, it can be chosen, if the data is represented in graphical views (surface plots, charts), or in Excel-like tables. The latter presentation option enables a comfortable post-processing of the data in further applications. The configuration for these types of presentation are described in more detail below.

12.4.2.2 Surface Plots

A surface plot presents the selected parameter sets in a spatial view as grid-based data or continuous plot. In the latter case, location-base data can be plotted at the exact positions associated with the respective values. The resolution of the grid or the average pixel distance in continuous plots can be adjusted by the Pixel Size, given in meters.

For raster plots, the grid has an equal resolution in the X and Y directions. If two or more parameter values overlap in a raster pixel, the values are combined. According to the type of parameter, the results selection dialog chooses a reasonable combination function by default; however, it is possible to adjust that function. The following combination functions are available and can be selected from the Function list field:

• MAX: The parameter with the maximum value is stored into the pixel.

• MIN: The parameter with the minimum value is stored into the pixel.

• LIN AVERAGE: All values are averaged linearly per pixel.

• LIN AVERAGE (BEST): All values of the ID with the highest values of the pixel, averaged linearly per pixel.

• LOG AVERAGE: Before averaging, all values per pixel are de-logarithmized. Then, the resulting average is logarithmized again. This option is to be chosen for the linear averaging of values that are given in dB.

• COUNT: The number of overlapping parameter sets is stored into the pixel.

• DIFFERENCE: The maximal difference of the values is stored into the pixel.

• PROBABILITY: The probability per pixel is computed for the values contained in each pixel compared to a numerical reference value using a comparison operator (out of <, >, =, <>, >=, or <=).

• LIN STDDEV: The standard deviation of linear values is stored into the pixel.

• LOG STDDEV: The standard deviation of logarithmic values is stored into the pixel. This option is to be chosen for deriving the standard deviation of values given in dB.

If the values of the selected parameter sets are strings (e.g. reasons for dropped calls etc.), the data combination algorithms are ignored except for the COUNT function. Only the first parameter is stored in a pixel, all others are not added.

Using the option Evaluate in Subperiods it is possible to create several surface plots from a parameter that consecutively cover the entire given time period. This feature can be used later to animate the temporal behavior of that parameter in a layer slide show (refer to section 12.5.10).

Finally, it can be chosen, if the data of the non-empty pixels is presented graphically in a surface plot (checkbox Surface Plot (Graphic)) or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Raw Data (Table)). The table represents exactly the data shown graphically in a surface plot.

Note, that only if the MAX or MIN combination algorithms were selected, the corresponding IDs and instances of the parameter sets are stored in the pixel together with the values. In this case, all this information is shown in a tooltip when the mouse pointer is above a certain pixel. Otherwise, only the value is shown in the tooltip. The tooltips can be switched on or off in the display settings dialog, see section 3.5.2.

An overview of the result configuration options for surface plots is given in Table 12-3.


www.actix.com

Table 12-3 Surface plot result configuration


Surface Plot or Mapped Surface Plot

If this radio button is checked, the parameter is shown in a surface plot creating a new layer.

For a parameter with cell names as ID, a Mapped Surface Plot will be created, where the cell-based values are mapped to the best serving area of the cell.

—

Output to Cell Visual

For a parameter with cell names as ID, as an alternative to the Mapped Surface Plot output, an output to a Cell Visual can be selected, where the cell-based values are mapped to the cell symbols.

In contrast to the Mapped Surface Plot, for the Cell Visual no best serving cell areas caluculation is required.

—

Raw Data (Table)

If this radio button is checked, the parameter is shown in a table sorted with respect to the associated position / site / cell / carrier.

—

Function This list field offers different ways to combine location related values of a parameter, if several values fall into a single pixel. The options to choose from are: ‘MAX’, ‘MIN’, ‘LIN AVERAGE’, ‘LIN AVERAGE (BEST)’, ‘LOG AVERAGE’, ‘COUNT’, ‘DIFFERENCE’, ‘PROBABILITY’, ‘LIN STDDEV’, and ‘LOG STDDEV’.

—

Values A comparison operator and a numerical reference value can be chosen, if the ‘PROBABILITY’ combination function is selected.

—

Most Reliable Values

Especially in case of analysing measurements, there could be single extreme values that are clearly wrong and that would distort the average or other statistical measure. When enabling the option Most Reliable Values, only the values lying in a range of +/- 2*Std.Dev. around the average in each pixel are considered for the binning.

—

Continuous Plot By choosing this radio button, a continuous plot will be created where each value is presented as an individual pixel at its exact associated position.

—

Raster Plot By choosing this radio button, a raster plot with the given pixel size will be created.

—

Interpolation This option is useful for plots that usually consist of single, distant pixels. Using the Interpolation flag, the areas between the originally set pixels are filled with interpolated values. This way (almost) entirely covering plots can be created.

—

Pixel Size / Avg. Dst.

The pixel width and height for the surface plot. In case of a continuous plot, this value specifies the average distance between pixels.

m

Evaluate in Subperiods

Here, a number of subperiods can be specified. Each of these subperiods gets plotted into a separate surface plot. This feature is especially useful in connection with the Layer Slide Show, refer to section 12.5.10.

—

# of Periods Specifies the number of subperiods, thus, the number of separate consecutive surface plots.

#

Smooth Animation

In case this switch is activated, the subperiods are as twice as long and overlap by 50 percent. When used within a Layer Slide Show, the traces of the individual UEs move much smoother, refer to section 12.5.10.

—


www.actix.com

12.4.2.3 Chart Graphs

Most of the dynamics of a radio network can be observed by representing measurements over time. In order to allow for a quick and easy access to graphs related to one or more IDs, Instances, Assigned NEs, carrier frequencies, or groups of them, special group functions were introduced. The underlying algorithm is comparable to a cross table, where the rows represent the UMTS frames, and a separate column is created for each ID or network element assigned to it. Since for each pair of frame and ID / Assigned NE exactly one field is available in such a cross table, a group function can be specified to combine all the available data related to this field. If one of the checkboxes Group ID’s or Group Assigned NE’s is selected, one of the following group functions can be chosen:

• FIRST VALUE: The first value (with respect to its position in the database) is stored into the field.

• LAST VALUE: The last value (with respect to its position in the database) is stored into the field.

• SUM: The sum of all values is stored into the field.

• LOG SUM: The logarithmic sum of all values is stored into the field. This group function is recommended for values in dB/dBm.

• COUNT: The number of data items related to the ID / Assigned NE and frame is stored into the field. This group function enables the display of string messages in time charts.

• MAX: The maximal value is stored into the field.

• MIN: The minimal value is stored into the field.

• EVENT: The pure existence of at least one event related to the ID / Assigned NE and frame is stored into the field. Like COUNT, this group function enables the display of string messages in time charts. The result of this group function is like: (COUNT > 0) ? 1: 0. Thus, it is a Boolean group function.

An example shall demonstrate the usage of the group function capabilities. For instance, the user wants to create a set of charts for the downlink transmit power on a DPCH for a specific UE instance for each cell. First, the parameter ‘DL_TxPower_DPCH – Cell [dBm]’ must be chosen by double-clicking it. Secondly, a UE profile (ID) can be selected from the list box. In the following, an Instance must be chosen, if more than one UE of this type were activated. To create charts for all cells, the ALL item shall be active in the Assigned NE box. In order to create a separate graph for each of the cells, the Group Assigned NE’s checkbox must be switched on. Radioplan suppresses ‘empty’ graphs. Thus, only graphs for those cells are created where a connection was available. If no group function was selected, all the available data is presented in one common curve or column in the table, respectively.

A label text can be defined in the Y Axis Label field. This text is only applied to a graph, if any of the group functions are inactive. Otherwise, the ID or Assigned NE is applied to the corresponding graph as a label to distinguish between several graphs created in one step.

A line style can be specified using the Style list box. A graph can be drawn as a combination of lines and symbols. The default style is a line without symbols. In some cases it may be useful to present a graph by discrete symbols without connections between adjacent points, for instance if events such as handover requests shall be drawn over time.

It is possible to add a set of data to a chart (or table) that already contains items. Using the Add to Existing Chart or Add to Existing Table options, the chart is not cleared – the currently selected parameter set is displayed in the same chart distinguished by colors and usually other line styles or in the same table as another column. This option is useful, if the data of different parameter sets shall be compared. Also this option enables the direct comparison of equal measurements obtained from different simulation runs represented by different result sets.

A scaling factor can be specified additionally. This feature can be useful, if different parameter sets shall be compared graphically in one chart, but the ranges differ


www.actix.com

significantly. For instance, if an Active Set size graph and downlink Tx power DPCH graph(s) shall be drawn in one chart, it may be useful to scale the Active Set size graph by a factor of 10.

Finally, it can be chosen if the data are presented graphically in a diagram (checkbox Parameter over Time (Chart)) or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Parameter over Time (Table)). String values cannot be displayed in a diagram except one of the group features is switched on and the group function is equal to ‘COUNT’ or ‘EVENT’. For instance, if handover requests are shown graphically over time, this feature may be useful. The analysis of the non-numeric (string) data is always possible using the table option.

NaN values as well as infinite values force a break in the curve of the graph. Data items of numerical values are not connected, if NaN values were found between them. If the data are shown in a table, occurring NaNs can be suppressed by checking the box Suppress NaNs.

The presentation of the parameter sets in tables is a convenient way to statistically evaluate the data inside Radioplan or to export the data for a post-processing in other applications.

When creating a chart graph from snapshot simulation results, the snapshot index is mapped on the x-axis (instead of UMTS frame number or time).

An overview of the result configuration options for chart graphs is given in Table 12-4.

Table 12-4 Time chart result configuration


Parameter over Time (Chart)

If this radio button is checked, the parameter is shown as a time plot in a chart. More precisely, the parameter is shown as a curve vs. a time axis given either in seconds or in UMTS frames. The time unit is determined by the respective selection in the Temporal Restrictions group to the right of the results selection dialog.

Add to Existing Chart

If this checkbox is checked, the chart display is not cleared when a new parameter is to be viewed. Instead, the new curve is added to the chart in another color and according to the current line style.

Parameter over Time (Table)

If this radio button is checked, the parameter is shown in a table sorted with respect to the associated frame number / time stamp.

Add to Existing Table

If this checkbox is checked, the table display is not cleared when a new parameter is to be viewed. Instead, the new data are added to the table as another column.

Group ID’s If this checkbox is selected, for each selected ID a separate graph (time chart) / column (table) is created.

Group Assigned NE’s

If this checkbox is selected, for each selected Assigned NE a separate graph (time chart) / column (table) is created.

Group Function A function can be specified that is used to combine the data for each pair of frame / time stamp and ID / Assigned NE. This option is only active, if one of the group checkboxes is switched on. The options to choose from are: ‘FIRST VALUE’, ‘LAST VALUE’, ‘SUM’, ‘LOG SUM’, ‘COUNT’, ‘EVENT’, ‘MAX’, and ‘MIN’.

Y Axis Label The label of the time curve in the chart. This parameter is usually initialized with the parameter name (without unit).

Style A line style related to the chart graphs to be created can be specified.

Suppress NaNs If this checkbox is checked, occurring NaN or Infinite values can be suppressed if the data are presented in a table.

Scaling Factor A numerical value that scales the values of the graphs to be created.


www.actix.com

12.4.2.4 Histograms

A histogram is frequently used to determine the statistical distribution of a parameter set. A bin width in units of the currently selected parameter can be adjusted to define the resolution of the histogram. Additionally to the histogram a CDF can be created. Inside the diagram the mean value and the standard deviation can be shown as a label optionally.

It is clear that histograms can only be generated from numeric data. NaN values will be automatically suppressed.

The data of the histogram can be presented graphically (checkbox Histogram (Chart)), or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Histogram (Table)), respectively.

The items in the result dialog are summarized in Table 12-5.

Table 12-5 Histogram result configuration


Histogram (Chart) If this radio button is checked, the parameter is shown in a histogram.

—

Histogram (Table) If this radio button is checked, the parameter is shown in a table that contains the values of the histogram.

—

Bin Width The bin width for the histogram. according to the parameter

Show CDF A second graph / column is added that represents the CDF of the histogram.

—

Show Mean Value and Std. Deviation

If this checkbox is active, the mean value and the standard deviation for the histogram is shown as an additional legend.

—

Mean and StdDev. as Logarithmic Values (dB / dBm)

If this checkbox is active, the mean value and the standard deviation are calculated under the assumption that the histogram was created from logarithmic values (usually given in dB).

—

12.4.2.5 Spatial and Temporal Restrictions

In the right part of the dialog, the analysis of the results can be restricted to a certain area and/or a time interval. These results analysis settings are defined as given in Table 12-6.

Table 12-6 Results analysis restrictions


Spatial Restrictions

Whole Area Using this radiobutton, the all results are used for analysis.

—

Simulation Area Using this radiobutton, the result analysis is confined to the simulation area.

—

Analysis Area Using this radiobutton, the result analysis is confined to the analysis area.

—

Temporal Restrictions

Use Time Information

If this radiobutton is selected, the time scale of all diagrams will be given in seconds.

—

Start Time The start time of the temporal selection of the currently analyzed result parameter.

hh:mm:ss


www.actix.com


End Time The end time of the temporal selection of the currently analyzed result parameter.

hh:mm:ss

Use Frame/Snapshot Information

If this radiobutton is selected, the time scale of all diagrams will be given in UMTS frames.

—

First The first frame of the result parameter value to be considered.

In case of snapshot simulation results, this value contains the first snapshot to be considered.

UMTS frames / snapshots

Last The last frame of the result parameter value to be considered.

In case of snapshot simulation results, this value contains the last snapshot to be considered.

UMTS frames / snapshots

Detect Data Range

On pressing this button, the valid time period is determined for the currently selected parameter based on the loaded result data.

—

Restrict Analysis to a Time or Frame Period

If this checkbox is activated, the results analysis is restricted to the given time period. This period can be specified in terms of a start/end time or a first/last UMTS frame below. In case of snapshot simulation results, the analysis would be restricted to the range between the first and the last snapshot.

—

The different checkboxes can be used to enforce an analysis that is specific to a time period or a region (whole area, simulation area, or analysis area). For UE related parameters, only positions inside the (possibly) chosen area are considered. For cell/site specific parameters, only those parameters are regarded where the associated network element is situated inside the chosen area.

12.5 Results Analysis with Surface Plots A surface plot consists of a legend to the left and a plot area to the right. The legend shows the color palette with the current data scaling (for numeric data), the actual parameter that is displayed, and some further information. An example of a result surface plot is given in Fig. 12-8.

There are two possibilities to create a result surface plot. Either the parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window is double-clicked to open the results selection dialog. There the radio button Surface Plot (Graphic) must be selected. The other possibility is to choose the entry Direct Surface Plot from the context menu of the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. Then a surface plot is created directly without showing the results selection dialog. However, the current settings in this dialog (e.g. regarding the data combination function within a pixel etc.) are used for creating the surface plot.

The plot area contains the values for the previously selected parameters. Depending on the data combination function, a tooltip shows the ID, instance, and value (numeric or non-numeric) for the underlying item located at the current position of the mouse pointer.

Numeric values are scaled automatically and are mapped by the currently selected color palette to presentation colors. The scale and the color palette can be modified in the layer settings dialog (see section 3.5.4) by clicking into the legend area to the left. If parameters associated with cells are displayed, the according values are mapped onto the cell coverage areas using unambiguous color codes for each cell scrambling code. This way it is possible to overlay several cell based parameter plots and compare the cell coverage (e.g. for comparison between planning and measured data).

If non-numeric values (strings) are detected in the result data, the number of different strings is determined, the strings are shown in the lower left corner of the plot area as an additional legend, and each string is assigned a different color. Using this technique, different blocking/dropping reasons or cells can be distinguished by their colors.


www.actix.com

Infinite or NaN values are suppressed. A corresponding warning appears in the message window.

Fig. 12-8 Sample view of a surface result plot

The currently displayed contents of the viewing area (including legend as shown in Fig. 12-8) can be transferred to any other application via the clipboard using the normal copy/paste functions. Furthermore it is possible to save this picture into a bitmap (for instance a JPEG file) using the File Save Plot as Image menu item.

12.5.1 Result Surface Plot Layers For every displayed result parameter with a certain database filtering5 a new layer is created. All available result layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window. For an efficient result analysis, all the usual layer evaluation functions can be used. In particular, the following options seem to be interesting:

• To display an already existing single layer, just double-click on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. An impressive way of comparing two layers is to alternately double-clicking on either of them, such that their presentation is constantly toggled.

• Layers can be overlaid. To make a distinct layer visible, just active the corresponding checkbox in the Layers tab of the tree window. In order to bring up or push down a certain layer, one can reorder the layers by the Move <…> functions from that layer’s context menu. Alternatively, a layer can be dragged graphically by the mouse to another level in the layers list.

• Layers can have individual graphical presentations. The properties of the currently active layer can be edited in the layer settings dialog by clicking into the black legend area to the left. Interesting graphical properties of result layers for a flexible analysis are, among others, the alpha blending factor (opacity), the color palette, the individual color range transparency, etc.

• The described analysis functions can be used for any type of layer, i.e. also for configuration data layers and image layers. This enables a free comparison

5 Read more on the database filter functions of the results selection dialog in section 12.4.2.1.


www.actix.com

between network configuration data, real measurement data, simulation results, and optimized network setups.

A detailed description on the layer concept of Radioplan can be found in section 3.4.

12.5.2 Identifying a Certain Data Item for Trouble Shooting In a surface plot, usually a parameter is shown for several IDs/Instances simultaneously. This is very useful for a quick overview of the spatial distribution of that parameter across the entire simulation area. However, to identify and localize a special problem in the network at a certain time stamp, it must be possible to investigate a certain result item from a position. This is required for an effective trouble-shooting analysis of the network.

Radioplan offers an individual network trouble-shooting by using the same basic result parameter evaluation methods as previously introduced in conjunction with the parameter filtering functions. On right-clicking at an identified trouble hot-spot in a result data surface plot, a context menu is shown. If a valid result pixel was hit, then this special parameter item can be investigated by choosing the menu entry Investigate this Item…. This situation is shown in the left part of Fig. 12-9.

Note that this function is only available if the chosen pixel contains a single value. Otherwise, if it e.g. contains an average value or a probability, the value cannot be associated with a certain network element instance. Consequently, the MIN or MAX functions should be used when creating the surface plot to ensure, that each pixel only contains a single value.

Fig. 12-9 Identifying a trouble spot for further analysis

The results selection dialog is opened where the identified item (in terms of ID, Instance, and Assigned NE) is highlighted which is shown in the right part of Fig. 12-9 as an example. Now the user has a variety of opportunities to further analyze the trouble spot:

• By simply clicking the OK button in the results selection dialog, the identified parameter could be presented solely in a new surface plot layer.

• Further constraints could be chosen for the identified parameter ID such as another data combining function, another pixel size, etc.


www.actix.com

• Since the particular ID and possibly the Instance of the trouble parameter are already identified, e.g. the time span could be further limited.

• The way of data presentation can be changed, i.e. the trouble parameter could be displayed in a chart graph, in a histogram, or in a table.

• Last but not least, another parameter can be chosen to find out the connection between different parameters for the same ID/Instance in the trouble spot.

These are just some proposals for possible options to further track down a potential problem and to investigate the network behavior in detail.

12.5.3 Manipulating a Surface Plot Layer Once having created a surface plot layer, it can be manipulated in various ways to either create a new layer or update the original one. This function is invoked by using the entry Manipulate this Layer… from a layer’s context menu in the Layers tab of the tree window. Then the dialog is shown where several manipulation functions are offered. This dialog is shown in Fig. 12-10. The elements of it are described in Table 12-7.

Table 12-7 Parameters to manipulate a layer


Layer Options

Use only Pixels inside the Simulation Area

Only pixels inside the simulation area are manipulated.

Use only Pixels inside the Analysis Area

Only pixels inside the analysis area are manipulated.

Target Layer

Create new Layer A radiobutton to create a new surface plot layer from the given layer, where the pixels of the resulting layer are calculated from the pixels of the original layer by a selectable function.

Overwrite this Layer A radiobutton to reuse the surface plot layer that the manipulate layer function was called from.

Output

Convert [dBm] -> [W] A function to convert logarithmic power values (assumed being given in dBm) into linear power values (given in Watts).

This function can be applied to any kind of layer; the unit is not checked. Generally speaking, it delogarithmizes the values of the original layer.

Convert [W] -> [dBm] A function to convert linear power values (assumed being given in Watts) into logarithmic power values (given in dBm).

This function can be applied to any kind of layer; the unit is not checked. Generally speaking, it logarithmizes the values of the original layer.

Invert (Multiply by -1) A function to invert the values of an existing layer.

Reciprocal (1/x) A function to calculate the reciprocal of the values in a layer. For pixels containing 0 this function creates empty pixels.

Function A function to process the layer with a value. Available operations are ‘ADD’, ‘SUB’, ‘MUL’, and ‘DIV’.

Compare A function to compare the values of a layer with a reference. Available comparison functions are ‘LESS’, ‘LESS OR EQUAL’, ‘EQUAL’, ‘GREATER OR EQUAL’, ‘GREATER’, ‘UNEQUAL’. The resulting layer pixels are either 1 (if condition fulfilled) or 0 (if condition not met).


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-10 Manipulate layer dialog

The manipulate layer function can be applied to the following types of layers:

• configuration layers,

• measurement layers,

• optimization layers,

• result layers, and

• post-processing layers.

It is not possible to manipulate image layers or graphics layers because they contain no value information in pixels. Furthermore, layers with continuous pixels (e.g. result layers with the continuous plot option) cannot be manipulated either.

12.5.4 Coinciding Surface Plot Layers Another interesting option is to investigate the possible relation between two different parameters, either be it network configuration data, network performance counters, drive test data, simulation results, or optimization plots. Here, the starting point can be surface plot layers or cell visuals of the data. Using the entry Coincide with other Layer/Visual… from a layer’s or cell visual’s context menu in the Layers tab of the tree window, a dialog is shown where another layer or cell visual and different options for comparison can be chosen. This dialog is shown in Fig. 12-11. The elements of it are described in Table 12-8. For cell visuals only a combination function can be chosen.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-11 Coincide layers dialog

Table 12-8 Parameters to coincide layers


Current Layer The layer from which the dialog was called (cannot be changed).

Reference Layer The second layer for the comparison. All available surface plot layers from the Layers tab are listed in this list field.

Use only Pixels inside the Simulation Area

Only pixels inside the simulation area are coincided.

Use only Pixels inside the Analysis Area

Only pixels inside the analysis area are coincided.

Ignore Transparent Pixels

Transparent pixels in either layer are excluded from the combination.

Create new Layer A radiobutton to create a new surface plot layer from the given two layers, where the pixels of the layers are interrelated pair wise by a selectable function.

Function A function to interrelate two layers, creating a new layer. Available functions are ‘MIN’, ‘MAX’, ‘DIFFERENCE’, ‘SUM’, ‘QUOTIENT’, ‘PRODUCT’, ‘AND’, ‘OR’, and ‘XOR’.

Create XY Scatter Graph

A radiobutton to create a scatter graph from the given two layers. For each pixel pair of the layers, a dot is set in the resulting graph. The first layer is mapped on the y-axis, and the second layer is mapped on the x-axis.

Add X = Y Line If this checkbox is enabled, a line for the linear function X = Y is added to the XY scatter graph as a reference.

Create XY Scatter Table

A radiobutton to create a scatter table from the given two layers. The data in the table is the same as is created by the XY Scatter Graph function.

Create Scatter Statistics (Surface Plot)

A radiobutton to create a scatter statistics plot from the given two layers. Each pixel that fulfils a certain coverage criterion in both layers is plotted in a color determined from the reference layer’s legend.


www.actix.com


Create Scatter Statistics (Table)

A radiobutton to create a scatter statistics table from the given two layers. Each pixel that fulfils a certain coverage criterion in both layers is counted, and the resulting coverage probability is calculated. The results are listed in a table.

The coinciding layers function can be applied to the following types of layers:

• configuration layers,

• measurement layers,

• optimization layers,

• result layers,

• cell visuals, and

• post-processing layers or cell visuals.

It is not possible to coincide image layers or graphics layers because they contain no value information in pixels. Furthermore, layers with continuous pixels (e.g. result layers with the continuous plot option) cannot be coincided either.

At first it shall be demonstrated how this function can be exploited to identify those regions in a network where users could directly get access, i.e. where there was a service attempt, but no blocking occurred. This can be accomplished by combining the parameters ‘ServiceRequest’ and ‘ServiceBlocked’ from the Service category by an XOR function. In the resulting layer (see Fig. 12-12 to the left) it can clearly be seen that there are regions especially at the cell borders where users did not get direct network access, i.e. these regions are empty in the view. This result is underlined by the Figure to the right where additionally the blocked services (green) are shown that fill those empty regions.

Fig. 12-12 Direct access of services in brown (left) and blocked access attempts in green (right)

If, as another example, the relation between the best pilot Ec/I0 over the mean pathloss shall be investigated, the coincide layers function can be used to create a chart graph from the values of these two layers mapped onto the x- and y-axes of the graph (XY scatter graph). A possible result is shown in Fig. 12-13.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-13 Sample chart graph of two coincided layers

Similar to the scatter graph, also scatter statistics can be calculated from coinciding two layers. The principle of the scatter statistics is that the coverage percentage of both layers according to certain threshold combinations are determined and listed in a table. The applied thresholds are directly derived from the color legend of the layers. In order to choose certain dedicated thresholds, it is recommended to select the Use Color Steps option in the color palette dialog of the respective layers and then specify the thresholds. The resulting scatter statistics table contains both the coverage percentage values for the compound threshold settings (in the upper part) as well as the corresponding absolute number of pixels that fulfill the corresponding criteria (in the lower part). An example of a scatter statistics table is shown in Fig. 12-14.

Chart graphs and tables from coincided layers can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while pressing the OK button of the coincide layer dialog. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them.

As a special case, in the above example the combined coverage of pilot RSCP and pilot Ec/I0 in a UMTS network were calculated. For this particular case there is also a special function available which is described in section 12.9.5.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-14 Scatter statistics between pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 from a UMTS/FDD measurement

12.5.5 Deriving Histograms from Surface Plots The data of the currently active surface plot layer can be easily translated into a histogram view. This feature may be useful if a spatial distribution instead of a temporal distribution is required. Using the functions of the submenu Results Histogram from Surface Plot, the underlying pixel data of the surface plot is translated into a statistical distribution shown in a chart or a table, respectively. The same functions can be reached from the context menu of result data layers (submenu Histogram from Surface Plot) which can be displayed by right-clicking into a surface plot of that result parameter. This procedure is demonstrated in Fig. 12-15.

Fig. 12-15 Creating a histogram from a surface plot layer

The presentation of the histogram can further be modified as described in section 12.7.

Histograms from surface plot layers can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while selecting the according menu entry. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them.


www.actix.com

12.5.6 Extracting Tables from Surface Plots and Cell Visuals The pixel-oriented data of the currently active surface plot layer can be easily extracted into a table. This feature may be useful to e.g. make the data from a coincided layer available for further analysis in the embedded clipboard (see section 12.8.2) or an external application. Using the functions of the submenu Results Data Table from Surface Plot, the underlying pixel data of the surface plot is transferred into a table. The same functions can be reached from the context menu of result data layers (submenu Data Table from Surface Plot) which can be displayed by right-clicking into a surface plot of that result parameter. This procedure is shown in Fig. 12-16.

Fig. 12-16 Creating a table from a surface plot layer

This function is also available for cell visuals. In this case, it can only be invoked from the context menu when right-clicking into the cell visual in the viewing area and choosing Data Table from Cell Visual. The resulting table contains a mapping between the cell IDs and their respective values from the cell visual.

The data in the table can further be modified and post-processed as described in section 12.8.

Tables from surface plot layers or cell visuals can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while selecting the according menu entry. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them.

12.5.7 Cell Statistics from a Layer Each layer can be statistically evaluated over the best cell areas based on the pathloss maps and cell (pilot) powers. First the respective layer must be activated by clicking on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. Then a right mouse click into the viewing area lets the surface plot context menu appear. Choose one of the subentries of Cell Statistics from this context menu to evaluate statistical measures of the selected layer over the best cell areas as shown in Fig. 12-17.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-17 Deriving cell statistics from a surface plot layer

The result of this function is a table giving various statistical measures (e.g. average and standard deviation) of the values from the chosen layer for each cell area in combination with the number of relevant bins for statistical puposes. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the function, the table is opened in a separate window. See Fig. 12-18 for an example. Cells that have no best cell pixel in the selected area are suppressed in the table.

Fig. 12-18 Example of the cell statistics for a pilot Ec/I0 plot


www.actix.com

This table can be directly used to plot the statistical measures on the best cell areas in a new surface plot layer. The according column containing the values to be mapped must be selected by clicking the respective header field of the table. Then the table grid context menu is displayed by right-clicking into the marked column. The function to choose is Graph Selection Mapped Surface Plot. It remains to specify the column containing the cell IDs and proper plot caption/tree label and unit in the appearing dialog. More details about the mapped surface plot function from a table can be found in section 12.8.7.

12.5.8 Clutter Statistics from a Layer Each layer can be statistically evaluated over the clutter classes defined by the clutter matrix. First the respective layer must be activated by clicking on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. Then a right mouse click into the viewing area lets the surface plot context menu appear. Choose one of the subentries of Clutter Statistics from this context menu to evaluate the “coverage” of the selected layer according to different thresholds for each clutter class as shown in Fig. 12-19.

Fig. 12-19 Deriving clutter statistics from a surface plot layer

The result of this function is a table giving the percentage of the values of the chosen layer being above different thresholds over each clutter class in combination with the number of relevant bins for statistical puposes. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the function, the table is opened in a separate window. See Fig. 12-20 for an example. Clutter classes that do not occur in the selected area are suppressed in the table.

The thresholds are directly derived from the color scale of the layer which can be seen when comparing the two Figures above. In order to choose dedicated thresholds, the color scale of the layer can be modified accordingly. In this case it is recommended to choose the option Use Color Steps in the color palette dialog.

The given number of bins per clutter class can be used to weigh the importance of each percentage value in a statistical evaluation.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-20 Example of the clutter statistics for a best pilot power plot

12.5.9 Discrete Value Layers The values of an existing layer can be discretized according to the current legend thresholds. This function is particularly useful when using discrete color steps, where the layer shall be analyzed according to defined value ranges.

The currently displayed layer can be discretized by right-clicking into the layer presentation in the viewing area and choosing Surface Plot Tools Set Pixel Values to Legend Thresholds from the appearing context menu. Then immediately all pixel values of the layer are exchanged by the corresponding lower legend threshold according to the defined ranges.

It is recommended to define discrete color steps for the original layer. Then the exact legend thresholds will be used for discretizing. If continuous color shading as applied instead, the resulting discretized layer would have equally distributed steps between the maximal and minimal values of the legend.

The resulting discretized layer could be further used to e.g. analyze the portions in each value range in a histogram from that layer, or to coincide it with other layers to assess the coverage of certain parameters, etc.

12.5.10 Layer Slide Show In order to better understand the manifold of interacting mechanisms in a live UMTS network, it might be enlightening to animate the dynamics in the network after a dynamic simulation or to visualize drive test data (play-back). Radioplan offers a slide show of multiple layers of surface plots. This slide show presents multiple surface plots from the layer tree consecutively in the order of their creation.

The basics for the work with layers in Radioplan are explained in section 3.4. Moreover, the configuration of surface plots was described in section 12.4.2.2. Here, the use of the parameters Evaluate in Subperiods, # of Periods, and Smooth Animation is commented.

As an example, ten layers of the Maximum of ‘DL_SIR_DPDCH [dB]’ shall be produced for a layer slide show. These ten layers can be created with the following settings of the mentioned three parameters, as apparent from Fig. 12-21.

Fig. 12-21 Settings in the results selection dialog to produce a layer slide show


www.actix.com

As a result of these settings, several surface plot layers will be automatically created that represent (partly overlapping if option Smooth Animation is selected) time periods within the entire configured time range. The created layers are handled like normal layers, i.e. they could be presented normally by double-clicking them in the Layers tab of the tree window.

To start a layer slide show, choose Results Layer Slide Show from the menu. Alternatively, there is also an icon ( , tooltip Start Layer Slide Show) in the views toolbar to start a layer slide show. Then the layer slide show dialog is opened, see Fig. 12-22.

Fig. 12-22 Layer slide show dialog with deactivated image layers

In this dialog box, all layers to be included in the slide show should be selected in the Include column. It is also possible to show some layer(s) permanently in the background during the slide show. This can be accomplished by selecting them in the Show Always column. Furthermore, the time interval between the switching of the layers in the slide show can be chosen between 0 and 5 seconds. When everything is set up right, the layer slide show can be started by pressing the OK button.

Now, the included layers are repeated one after the other with the chosen time interval between the switching in a loop. The slide show stops when the user presses the Abort Slide Show button in the appearing pop-up dialog.

12.5.11 Printing Surface Plots Spatial views with all possibly overlapping surface plot layers can be printed true-to-scale. This is especially useful when specifying a dedicated scale factor for the plot to be printed, e.g. 1:100,000. Then distances in the printout could be directly measured with a ruler. Furthermore, the black legend is automatically displayed in white in all printouts.

Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking the icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. An example of the print preview is shown in Fig. 12-23.

Once the view is set up properly, the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the icon (tooltip Print) from the standard toolbar.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-23 Sample print preview with white legend and true-to-scale alignment

12.6 Results Analysis with Charts (Plots over Time) A chart graph presents data in a chart. Each chart has a freely configurable title (by default derived from the current settings in the results selection dialog). The x- and y-axes each have labels that are automatically set by default. Several settings for the diagrams can be modified using the axis scale and diagram settings dialog, described later in section 12.6.4. An example of a diagram showing the transmit power of a speech user while moving through several cells with Soft Handovers in a dynamic network simulation is given in Fig. 12-24.

Fig. 12-24 Sample view of a chart


www.actix.com

12.6.1 Creating a Chart Graph Arbitrary result parameters (either from measurements or simulations) can be presented in a chart graph. The key to create a chart graph from a result parameter is the results selection dialog. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. In the appearing dialog, the option Parameter over Time (Chart) must be selected. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog, the chart graph is immediately shown in the viewing area.

Each of the Radioplan Modules can have special kinds of chart graphs. As an example, the time course of the number of active UEs during a dynamic simulation can be shown by choosing Results Simulation Results Active UEs as Chart. See [R-Sim] for details.

By default, newly created chart graphs are displayed in the viewing area. However, it is also possible to create a new chart graph in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the diagram. Using this option, several chart graphs can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. The separate chart graph windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. The functions of the menu are explained briefly in Table 12-9.

Table 12-9 Functions of the menu in a chart graph window

Menu Entry Function

File Menu

Print Opens the print dialog, see section 12.6.5.

Save as Image… Shows a file save dialog to save the diagram as an image.

Close Closes the chart graph window.

Edit Menu

Copy Copies the chart to the Windows clipboard.

Graph Menu

Create Table from Graph

Creates a table with two columns representing the x- and y values of the graph in a separate window.

Zoom Out Once the user has zoomed into the graph, one zoom stage can be reverted by this command. Alternatively, the <F3> key can be used.

Fit To Window Once the user has zoomed into the graph, the zoom can be set back to the entire graph by this command. Alternatively, the <F4> key can be used.

Axis Scale and Settings…

Opens the axis scale and diagram settings dialog to modify the graph presentation, see section 12.6.4.

Reset to default styles Restores the default diagram settings.

12.6.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Chart Graphs When creating a chart graph, the user can choose some additional settings in the results selection dialog to influence the data presentation in the chart in certain ways. The chart graph configuration in the results selection dialog is also briefly explained in section 12.4.2.3. In particular, the following settings can be made:

• A special line style can be chosen for the graph presentation. All new curves in a chart will inherit the selected style properties. However, by consecutively adding curves to a diagram (see below), different line styles can be chosen for the distinct lines.

• A scaling factor can be specified for the graph presentation. All new curves in a chart will use the same specified scaling factor. However, by consecutively adding


www.actix.com

curves to a diagram (see below), different scaling factors can be applied to the distinct lines.

• By selecting the Add to Existing Chart option when displaying a parameter in a chart, an old chart is not deleted. Instead, the new curve(s) are added to the possibly existing ones. It is not useful to use this function for displaying time and frame based result data together in one chart. An analogous function is available for adding columns in a temporal data table.

• Usually, a parameter is presented in a single curve in a chart graph. However, values at a certain time stamp could be associated with different IDs and/or Assigned NEs of that parameter. In order to display separate curves for each of those IDs / Assigned NEs, the according grouping functions can be used. Fig. 12-24 is an example of a parameter that is shown for a single selected ID/Instance (UE) and grouped for the Assigned NEs (cells), i.e. for each cell associated with that parameter there is a separate curve in the graph.

• For time related results (e.g. measurement data or dynamic simulation results), the time axis of the chart graph can either be given in UMTS frames or in seconds (hh:mm:ss format). Note that when choosing the latter time scale, the smallest resolution of the time axis is generally 1 second. Thus, when investigating simulation results it is better to select the time axis in UMTS frames in order to assure a correct presentation of the time curves.

• For snapshot simulation results without time relation, the snapshot index will be mapped on the x-axis of a chart. In this case it is recommended to choose the option Use Frame Information in the Temporal Restrictions group of the results selection dialog.

Once a chart graph was created, the data can be further evaluated in the following ways:

• Single values can be inspected in tooltips. Moving the mouse pointer on a curve, a tooltip appears showing the coordinates (time stamp and value) of the closest vertex on the curve.

• It is easy to zoom into a chart at an interesting region by dragging a box with the left mouse button. When the mouse button is released, the chart is updated with new scaling settings. The zoom function in chart graphs is always active, irrespective the current mouse pointer mode. Also some of the normal zoom functions (zoom out <F3>, fit to window <F4>) are available. Fig. 12-25 gives an example of the zoom function in chart graphs.

Fig. 12-25 Zooming into a chart graph

Charts can be transferred to another application via the clipboard, or they can be saved as an image using the File Save Plot as Image… item from the menu bar in different graphics formats.

12.6.3 Creating a Table from a Graph The x- and y values of a chart diagram can be extracted into a table with two columns. This is accomplished by using the View Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. In separate graph windows, the same function can be called from the Graph Create Table


www.actix.com

from Graph menu entry. The table data can be further post-processed by means of the statistical evaluation functions available in Radioplan (refer to section 12.8.2) or in an external application.

12.6.4 Customization of Charts The initial scaling of a chart is determined automatically. It is possible to define the axis limits manually using the axis scale dialog, that can be opened using the View Graph Axis Scale and Settings… item from the menu bar. In a separate chart graph window, this menu entry is also available. A dialog appears similar to Fig. 12-26.

Fig. 12-26 Axis scale and diagram settings dialog

In the upper part of the dialog the general appearance of the chart can be influenced. So a title and the labels for the X and Y axes can be modified in the Title / Labels group. Moreover, the background color can be modified using two colors and a fill style. The fill style can be ‘Solid Color’ (only the first color is used), ‘Horizontal Shape’, ‘Vertical Shape’, or ‘45° Shape’. Using one of the latter three options, a shape is drawn defined by the fill style and the two specified colors. If the checkbox Rember Settings is active and the OK button is clicked, Radioplan stores these background settings for the chart type persistently into the Windows registry.

The background settings are stored for each graph type separately into the registry. Thus, it is possible to assign XY-graphs, histogram graphs, and polar graphs (antenna diagrams) a different background.

The axis scaling can be done automatically by Radioplan (Autoscale checkbox is switched on). If this feature is deactivated, the limits for both X and Y axes can be specified manually. As default the current minimum and maximum limits are pre-selected. The time scale of the diagram can be specified in terms of either UMTS frames or normal time stamps, respectively, depending on the settings in the results selection dialog.

The annotation character size can be used to adjust the mean spacing between characters inside the legend. Note that this value represents a mean size for the maximum amount of characters of labels due to the non-mono spaced font used for the legend.

In the table available in the lower right part of the dialog the annotations of all currently drawn graphs can be modified. Furthermore it is possible to select one or more graphs here to remove them from the current chart.

12.6.5 Printing a Chart Graph Charts can also be printed. The size and the orientation of the chart on the page can be adjusted using the chart page setup dialog, accessible from the View Graph Page Setup… menu item. In separate chart graph windows the same dialog can be accessed from File Print. The dialog is shown in Fig. 12-27, the usage is self-explanatory.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-27 Chart page setup dialog

Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking the icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. Once the chart is set up properly, the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the icon (tooltip Print) from the standard toolbar.

12.7 Results Analysis with Histograms Histograms are an important means to statistically evaluate network performance data. Basically, a histogram represents the probability distribution of a parameter and can thus reveal statistical properties that could not directly be extracted from a surface plot or a time course of that parameter. Besides the actual histogram (quantized version of the probability density function), also the CDF as well as the mean value and the standard deviation of the selected parameter can be inspected. An example for the histogram of the number of visible cells recorded during a UMTS drive test is presented in Fig. 12-28.

Histograms can only be generated for numeric values of the parameters. Possibly occurring NaNs are not considered when generating the histogram.

Fig. 12-28 Sample view of a histogram


www.actix.com

12.7.1 Creating a Histogram Arbitrary result parameters (either from measurements or simulations) can be presented in a histogram. There are generally two ways to create a histogram: either directly from the results selection dialog, or based on an existing surface plot. Both options are described in the following:

• One possibility to create a histogram from a result parameter is the results selection dialog. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. In the appearing dialog, the option Histogram (Chart) must be selected. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog, the histogram is immediately shown in the viewing area.

• As a second possibility, one can create a surface plot from the respective parameter. Then click with the right mouse button into the surface plot to view the context menu and choose one of the subentries from the Histogram from Surface Plot entry. The reference area can be the entire area, the simulation area, or the analysis area. Alternatively, the same function could be invoked from the menu bar by choosing Results Histogram from Surface Plot. Then the histogram based on the surface plot layer values is immediately displayed in the viewing area.

There is a fundamental difference between these two histogram versions of a parameter. In the first case, the histogram is generated based on the complete amount of values of the parameter at hand, irrespective the time stamp, the position, etc. (despite the configured restrictions/filtering). This means that all values of the parameter are handled equally. In the second case, however, there was a certain pre-filtering with regard to the positions of the distinct values. In particular, several values in a pixel were combined according to the choice of the data combination function in the results selection dialog. So this type of histogram represents a kind of spatial statistics of the parameter.

The generation process of a histogram is basically performed in two substeps. First, the limits for the minimum and maximum values are determined, given by the range of the underlying parameter. Secondly, for each bin (defined by the bin width parameter in the results selection dialog), the number of parameter sets is calculated. Finally, the data is normalized so that the sum of the bars is equal to 1.

By default, newly created histograms are displayed in the viewing area. However, it is also possible to create a new histogram in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the histogram. Using this option, several histograms can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. The separate histogram windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. The functions of the menu are very similar to that of chart graphs. For convenience, they are given below in Table 12-10.

Table 12-10 Functions of the menu in a histogram window

Menu Entry Function

File Menu

Print Opens the print dialog.

Save as Image… Shows a file save dialog to save the histogram as an image.

Close Closes the histogram window.

Edit Menu

Copy Copies the histogram to the Windows clipboard.


www.actix.com

Menu Entry Function

Graph Menu

Create Table from Graph

Creates a table with three columns representing the x values and the PDF and CDF values of the histogram in a separate window.

Zoom Out Zooms back to the last larger zoom after a zoom in mouse action. Alternatively, the <F3> key can be used.

Fit To Window Zooms on the entire histogram to the fit into the window. Alternatively, the <F4> key can be used.

Histogram Settings… Shows the histogram settings dialog to modify bin size, limits, etc., see section 12.7.4.

Axis Scale and Settings…

Opens the axis scale and diagram settings dialog to modify the graph presentation.

Reset to default styles Restores the default histogram settings.

12.7.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Histograms When creating a histogram, the user can choose some additional settings in the results selection dialog to influence the data presentation in the histogram in certain ways. The histogram configuration in the results selection dialog is also briefly explained in section 12.4.2.4. In particular, the following settings can be made:

• The bin width can be specified. It influences the resolution of the histogram.

• Optionally the CDF can be shown as additional graph. The mean value and the standard deviation can be added to the chart as additional label. The latter characteristics can be calculated on the basis of linear or logarithmic values, respectively.

Once a histogram was created, the data can be further evaluated in the following way:

• It is easy to zoom into a histogram at an interesting region by dragging a box with the left mouse button. When the mouse button is released, a dialog appears that can simply be left by pressing the OK button. Then the histogram is updated with new scaling settings. The zoom function in histograms is always active, irrespective the current mouse pointer mode. Also some of the normal zoom functions (zoom out <F3>, fit to window <F4>) are available.

• There are different threshold evaluation methods available in histograms. By choosing the proper method, the coverage of a parameter can be exactly evaluated at a certain threshold. More details about the threshold evaluation methods in histograms can be found in section 12.7.5.

Histograms can be transferred to another application via the clipboard, or they can be saved as an image using the File Save Plot as Image… item from the menu bar in different graphics formats.

12.7.3 Creating a Table from a Histogram The x values as well as the PDF and CDF values of a histogram can be extracted into a table with three columns. This is accomplished by using the View Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. In separate histogram windows, the same function can be called from the Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. The table data can be further post-processed by means of the statistical evaluation functions available in Radioplan (refer to section 12.8.2) or in an external application.

12.7.4 Customization of Histograms The initial scaling of a histogram is determined automatically. These settings can also be modified afterwards in the histogram settings dialog as shown in Fig. 12-29. Here the histogram limits and the bin resolution (either in terms of a bin size or the number of bins)


www.actix.com

can be specified. If the option Skip Values outside Limits is selected, all values out of the configured limits are not considered in the creation of the histogram. Additionally, the visibility of the CDF, the mean value, and the standard deviation can be controlled. If the option Mean and StdDev. as Logarithmic Values (dB / dBm) is chosen, the according characteristics are calculated based on logarithmic values, typically given in dB.

Fig. 12-29 Histogram settings dialog

The threshold evaluation methods in the dialog are explained in greater detail in section 12.7.5.

Furthermore, using the axis scale dialog can be used to set the axis limits manually in a way similar to chart graphs. This dialog can be opened using the View Graph Axis Scale and Settings… item from the menu bar. In a separate histogram window, this menu entry is also available. See section 12.6.4 for the usage of this dialog.

12.7.5 Threshold Evaluation Methods in Histograms The histogram settings dialog contains three options that influence the creation of the histogram and that can be used to evaluate the coverage of the respective parameter at a certain threshold. These options are described below:

• Normal Threshold Evaluation: In the standard setting for histograms, each bin is centred around the corresponding threshold value, i.e. it reaches from half the bin resolution below the threshold to half the bin resolution above the threshold. This option is selected by choosing the radio button thres – 0.5 * binres <= x < thres + 0.5 * binres.

• Coverage Evaluation above Threshold: When evaluating a parameter that is interpreted as being better the higher the values are (such as best pilot Rx power or Ec/I0), a coverage level at a given threshold is defined as the percentage of area where the values x >= thres. The coverage of such a parameter is equivalent to the inverse CDF of the histogram. If then a table is created from the histogram, the coverage at a given threshold can be directly read from the table in the respective row. This option is selected by choosing the radio button x >= thres (inverse CDF).

• Coverage Evaluation below Threshold: On the contrary, when evaluating a parameter that is interpreted as being better the lower the values are (such as pathloss or Active Set size), a coverage level at a given threshold is defined as the percentage of area where the values x <= thres. The coverage of such a parameter is equivalent to the normal CDF of the histogram. If then a table is created from the histogram, the coverage at a given threshold can be directly read from the table in the respective row. This option is selected by choosing the radio button x <= thres (normal CDF).


www.actix.com

The following example demonstrates the usage of the threshold evaluation method in order to determine the pilot RSCP coverage in a UMTS network at a given threshold.

How to evaluate the network coverage at a given threshold?

The starting point is a surface plot of the predicted or measured pilot RSCP which is presented in the viewing area. A histogram from this layer is created by choosing one of the functions from the Histogram from Surface Plot submenus which can be reached by a right mouse click into the plot. It is recommended to hold down the <Shift> key while clicking the menu entry.

Fig. 12-30 Histogram function in the context menu on a surface plot

Then open the histogram settings dialog and make the following adjustments:

• set the upper and lower limits to an integer nearby (preferrably outside the initial range);

• choose an integer bin resolution (e.g. 1dB);

• select the threshold evaluation method x >= thres (inverse CDF).

The final settings can be seen in the dialog below.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-31 Histogram Settings dialog

These settings have immediate effect on the histogram after confirming them with OK. Now a table can be created from the histogram as described in section 12.7.3. The RSCP coverage of the network can now be directly read from the ‘CDF’ column at a given threshold.

Fig. 12-32 Histogram Data Table created from a histogram

For example, the network RSCP coverage at a threshold of -80dBm is 83.9%.

12.7.6 Printing a Histogram Histograms can also be printed. The size and the orientation of the histogram on the page can be adjusted using the page setup dialog, accessible from the View Graph Page Setup… menu item. In separate histogram windows the same dialog can be accessed from File Print. The usage is comparable to the page setup for chart graphs, see section 12.6.5 for details.

Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking the icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. Once the histogram is set up properly, the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the icon (tooltip Print) from the standard toolbar.


www.actix.com

12.8 Results Analysis with Tables All the network performance data presented in surface plots, charts, or histograms can also be displayed in tables. This type of data representation is most intuitive regarding the understanding of the data filtering mechanisms of Radioplan. Each filter criterion is represented as a separate column in the table; each row contains a single parameter value. An example that demonstrates the parameter filtering is given in Fig. 12-33 where the UMTS DL transmit power on a DCH for a single UE instance was evaluated when making a cell reselection from cell to another.

Fig. 12-33 Sample view of a table

A table is a grid, similar to Excel. So many known usage concepts of tables are adopted in Radioplan, such as selection of single fields, rows, and columns, and post-processing of the data contained in them. Also powerful copy and export functions are available.

12.8.1 Creating a Table Since the data of surface plots, chart graphs, and histograms can alternatively be displayed in a table, the main access point for doing this is the results selection dialog. Besides this, also a histogram from a surface plot can be displayed as a table. The distinct Radioplan Modules have some specialized tables as well as summary reports (which are also tables in turn). In the following, some details are given on the mentioned opportunities.

• Creating a table from a result parameter is mainly controlled from the results selection dialog. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. There are three options to choose from: presenting location-oriented data from a surface plot in a table is done by choosing Raw Data (Table); presenting time-related data from a diagram in a table is done by choosing Parameter over Time (Table) (with the option a add more columns for other parameters using the Add to Existing Table flag); presenting histogram data in a table is done by choosing Histogram (Table). All data filtering adjustments are incorporated in the generation of a table. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog, the table is immediately shown in the viewing area.

• As another possibility, one can create a surface plot from the respective parameter. Then click with the right mouse button into the surface plot to view the context menu and choose one of the subentries from the Histogram from Surface Plot or Data Table from Surface Plot entries, respectively. Alternatively, the same functions could be invoked from the menu bar by choosing Results Histogram from Surface Plot as Table or DataTable from Surface Plot. Then the tabular data of the histogram or the data table per pixel based on the surface plot layer values are immediately displayed in the viewing area.


www.actix.com

• Likewise, specialized tables of different Radioplan Modules can be created as described in the respective chapters of this user guide. Furthermore, some Modules provide a summary report per results set that is also displayed as a table. These summary reports can be reached from the according menu entries or toolbar icons.

• Last but not least, the user can open a new window with an empty table by choosing Edit Embedded Clipboard (Table). This table offers very flexible data analysis functions. For example, data can be copied via the clipboard into this table at arbitrary positions, the data can be modified, reordered, or used to create other presentations of the data as chart graphs or surface plots.

By default, newly created tables are displayed in the viewing area (except for the embedded clipboard table). However, it is also possible to create a new table in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the table. Using this option, several tables can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. The separate table windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. The functions of the menu are given in Table 12-11.

Table 12-11 Functions of the menu in a table window

Menu Entry Function

File Menu

Import Text File Imports a tab-delimited ASCII file into this table window.

Export Text File Exports the table as tab-delimited ASCII file.

Store in Project… Stores this table as a report in the project. See section 12.8.4 for more details.

Close Closes the table window.

Edit Menu

Undo Undoes the last editing action in the table.

Redo Redoes the last change in the table.

Cut Cuts a selection from the table (and copies it to the clipboard).

Copy Copies a selection of the table to the clipboard.

Paste Pastes the clipboard contents into the table starting at the selected field.

Copy Table Copies the table data to the Windows clipboard.

Find… Opens a find dialog for the current selection in the table.

Replace… Opens a replace dialog valid for the current selection in the table.

12.8.2 Data Import into Tables It is possible to import a tab-delimited ASCII file into a table grid in a separate window. The easiest way to import a new file is to open the embedded clipboard by choosing Edit Embedded Clipboard (Table) and use the menu entry File Import Text File in the appearing grid window. The same menu entry is also available in any other table window.

Data can also be copied into a table from another table at an arbitrary position. Read in the next Section how to copy data from a table.

12.8.3 Data Export from Tables Radioplan provides mighty copy functions to allow for an unlimited post-processing of the network performance data in other applications. Arbitrary parts of a table can be selected and then be copied to the clipboard. The BIFF-8 format (MS Excel 97/2000) is supported that translates locale differences, in particular the decimal delimiter (“,” or “.” problem).


www.actix.com

Due to performance issues, the maximum table size is limited to 10,000 fields. If larger tables are selected and the Edit Copy menu item (shortcut <Ctrl-C>) is pressed, a warning appears in the message window and the selected items will be transferred as plain ASCII text into the clipboard. A second copy function transfers the entire table incl. headers to the clipboard. This can be done using the Edit Copy Table as Text menu item (shortcut <Ctrl-Shift-C>).

The selection of fields in a table is intuitive as known from other spread sheet applications. In particular, the entire table is selected by clicking the upper left corner of the table. Selecting a complete row or column of the table is accomplished by clicking the corresponding header field. Lastly, an arbitrary selection of fields can be done with the mouse pointer while holding down the left mouse button.

A table can be saved as an Excel 97/2000 file using the File Export Export Grid Data in Excel 97 Format menu item. It is not recommended to export a grid to an Excel file with more than 2000 rows, because it can be very time consuming. Alternatively the table can also be exported as plain ASCII data using the menu item File Export Export Grid Data in ASCII Format. Last but not least, table data in a separate table window can be exported into a tab-delimited ASCII file. This is done by using the menu entry File Export Text File.

12.8.4 Saving a Table/Report in the Project Any tabular data such as summary reports, other tabular reports, or ordinary tables containing data can be stored in a project. This can for example be useful to save summary reports or optimization results beyond the temporary lifetime of the underlying data.

If the table or summary report is displayed in the viewing area, it can be saved by using the menu entry View Table Save Report…. The same function is also available in separate table windows as File Store in Project…. Then a small dialog is shown that queries the user for a description of the report.

Every new report is stored under its description at a special node called Saved Reports in the Results tab of the tree window. Fig. 12-34 shows an example with two saved reports in the project.

Fig. 12-34 The Results tab of the tree window with some saved reports

In order to reopen a report, its item can be double clicked in the tree window. Alternative, the Open entry can be selected from its context menu. Likewise, a report can be removed from the project by choosing Delete from the context menu.

12.8.5 Embedded Clipboard Sometimes it seems to be useful to collect tabular data from several sources in order to compare them and to collectively evaluate them. To this end, Radioplan has an embedded clipboard that basically is an empty table grid. This table can be reached from the menu by choosing Edit Embedded Clipboard (Table).

The embedded clipboard offers the same functionality as normal data tables, and additionally it is editable and extendible. In particular, the values of individual table fields can be entered and modified, and table rows and columns can be dragged & dropped with the mouse. If a selection is copied to the embedded clipboard that has more columns or rows than initially provided by the clipboard, it is automatically extended.

The embedded clipboard is resizable and minimizable which allows for an efficient working. Fig. 12-35 shows an example of the embedded clipboard filled with collected data.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-35 Embedded clipboard for data collection and statistical evaluation

12.8.6 Statistical Data Evaluation in Tables Numerical values in tables can be evaluated in various ways. The data evaluation functions are accessible from the context menu of a table field. In order to use the functions, first a relevant selection of values in the table must be made. Then the chosen evaluation function is applied to the selected data. The result value is shown in a dialog. The workflow of statistically evaluating a table selection is demonstrated in Fig. 12-36. The available table evaluation functions are described in Table 12-12.

Fig. 12-36 Statistical evaluation of numerical table data

Table 12-12 Statistical evaluation functions in a table

Context Menu Entry Function

Evaluate Selection

Linear Average Calculates the linear average of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

Log. Average Calculates the logarithmic average of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. This function should be used for values given in dB.

Linear Std. Deviation Calculates the linear standard deviation of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

Log. Std. Deviation Calculates the logarithmic standard deviation of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. This function should be used for values given in dB.


www.actix.com


Sum Calculates the sum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

Min Determines the minimum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

Max Determines the maximum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

Count Determines the number of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

12.8.7 Transforming Table Data into Graphical Presentations Selected values in a table can be transformed into graphical presentations as chart graph, histogram, or surface plot by using the entries in the Graph Selection submenu of the table grid context menu. In case of a diagram/histogram, a separate window is opened with the chart or histogram; in case of a surface plot, a new result layer is created. The available presentation functions are described in Table 12-13.

Table 12-13 Graphical presentation functions from a table


Graph Selection

Surface Plot Creates a surface plot layer from the values of the selected column. In order to map these values to pixels, two other columns can be selected to define the x- and y-coordinates.

Mapped Surface Plot Creates a cell-mapped surface plot from the values of the selected column. In order to map these values to the cell coverage areas, another column can be selected that is assumed to contain valid cell IDs.

The resulting plot can either be created as raster plot (where the cell related values are mapped to the best cell areas) or as cell visual.

As an option, it is possible to weight the cell-based values relative to the associated cell areas.

Time Chart Shows a curve of a selected column of numerical values vs. their index (“time”) in a separate chart graph window.

Scatter Chart Shows a scatter graph from the value pairs of two consecutive selected columns in the table. The value pairs are depicted as (X,Y) dots in the graph.

Histogram Determines the histogram of a selected column of numerical values in a separate histogram window.

The workflow of creating a graphical presentation from a table selection is demonstrated in Fig. 12-37 with a histogram as example.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-37 Graphical presentation of numerical table data

12.8.7.1 Creating a Surface Plot from Table Data

A surface plot from position related values can be created by using the context menu function Graph Selection Surface Plot. It must be ensured that the function is called from the column that contains the values to be plotted, and there must be two other columns that define the Cartesian coordinates (x,y pair) of each value. Then a dialog appears as shown in Fig. 12-38.

Fig. 12-38 Create surface plot from table dialog

In the field Header Row one can select the table row that contains the column headers. If there are no headers on top of the columns, then ‘No header row’ should be selected here. Below that the columns specifying the x,y coordinates of the pixel locations must be determined. Furthermore, the user can specify plot title (to appear in the black legend in the viewing area), tree label (to appear in the Layers tab), pixel size, and unit for the new plot. The surface plot is eventually created when pressing the OK button of the dialog.

12.8.7.2 Creating a Mapped Surface Plot or Cell Visual from Table Data

A surface plot from cell related values can be created by using the context menu function Graph Selection Mapped Surface Plot. It must be ensured that the function is called from the column that contains the cell related values to be plotted, and there must be another column that define the corresponding cell IDs. Then a dialog appears as shown in Fig. 12-39.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-39 Creating a cell visual from cell related values

There are two types of surface plots in which the cell related values can be displayed: as raster layer or as cell visual. In the first case, the cell values are mapped on the best cell areas; in the latter one, the cell values are directly displayed in the cell visuals. If a raster layer is to be created, the cell-based values can be weighted with the according cell areas by selecting the checkbox Weight Values by Covered Cell Area.

Note that when creating a mapped raster layer, only data from the currently active network layer(s) will be considered. However, for cell visuals generally all data from the table, i.e. independent of the active network layer(s), will be used.

In the field Header Row one can select the table row that contains the column headers. If there are no headers on top of the columns, then ‘No header row’ should be selected here. Below that the column specifying the cell IDs must be determined. Furthermore, the user can specify plot title (to appear in the black legend in the viewing area), tree label (to appear in the Layers tab), pixel size, and unit for the new plot. The surface plot is eventually created when pressing the OK button of the dialog.

12.8.8 Converting Table Data into a Result Set As a further option, any kind of data from a table can be converted into a result set which opens an unforeseen flexibility of data analysis. If the data have once been converted to a result set, all the data evaluation and filtering functions available from the results selection dialog can be applied to them. An interesting option is to first load a tab-delimited ASCII file with some data to be analyzed into the embedded clipboard table, and then to convert it into a result set. The data could, e.g., come from a measurement device or an RNP tool.

In the following, an example is given how to further evaluate simulation results created by ATOLL [ATL-UM] with Radioplan. The simulation results can be transferred to Radioplan via the Windows Clipboard and are copied into the embedded clipboard. The actual conversion can be initiated by clicking with the right mouse button into the table grid and choosing Data Conversion Import Table as Result Set from the appearing context menu as shown in Fig. 12-40.

Make sure that the project is currently open that the table data shall be imported into. The reason for this is that the new result set is always added to the current project, though the embedded clipboard is independent of any project.


www.actix.com

Further, it is recommended to have the column descriptions in the first row of the imported table data. This makes it easier to identify the distinct columns in the conversion procedure.

Fig. 12-40 Converting a table into a result set

Then the conversion dialog is shown where the user can determine the role of the distinct data columns during the conversion procedure. An example of this dialog is given in Fig. 12-41. The according entries of the dialog are explained in Table 12-14. It is possible to define up to five parameters in the new result set.

Fig. 12-41 Convert table to result set dialog


www.actix.com

Table 12-14 Parameters for the conversion of table data into a result set


Header Row If there is a row containing headers, it can be selected here. This will ease the selection of the other columns later. All rows above the header row including itself will be excluded from the data import, i.e. it is assumed that the data start in the row below the header row. If there is no header row, then row 0 can be chosen (default).

Measurement Data A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as measurement data, indicated by the symbol .

Simulation Data A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as simulation data, indicated by the symbol .

Generic Data A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as generic data, indicated by the symbol .

Meta Data Columns

Pos X or Longitude Choose the column to be interpreted as x-coordinate (given in m) or longitude (given in °), respectively.

Pos Y or Latitude Choose the column to be interpreted as y-coordinate (given in m) or latitude (given in °), respectively.

Convert Geographic Coordinates

This flag must be set if the positions are given in geographic coordinates. Make sure that the correct projection coordinate system is chosen.

ID Choose the column to be interpreted as parameter ID.

Assigned NE Choose the column to be interpreted as Assigned NE.

Time or Frame Choose the column to be interpreted as time or frame information.

Instance Number Choose the column to be interpreted as instance numbers of the parameter ID.

Result Parameter Columns

Parameter 1…5 Choose the column to be interpreted as a parameter for the new result set. For each parameter, a name and a unit can be given to the right.

In the example, the service was chosen as parameter ID, and the activity indicator as Assigned NE. This enables the user to evaluate the imported parameters e.g. according to UEs only active in UL or DL. After the data have been converted, the new result set is shown in the Results tab of the tree window, initially with the default name “From Table”, refer to Fig. 12-42. This name can be changed easily by double-clicking on it and entering the new name in the appearing dialog.

Fig. 12-42 New simulation result set as imported from the embedded clipboard


www.actix.com

In order to demonstrate the data evaluation, the histogram of the total UE transmit power for non-speech users active in UL shall be generated. This is accomplished with the settings given in Fig. 12-43. The resulting histogram is shown in Fig. 12-44.

Fig. 12-43 Results selection dialog for non-speech users active in UL

Fig. 12-44 Histogram of the total UE transmit power for non-speech users

12.8.9 Customization of Tables The initial scaling of the rows and columns in a table is determined automatically. However, sometimes a column may be too narrow thus hiding a part of the field contents, or a multi-line head row of a table only shows a part of the header. That is why the width of table rows and columns can be modified afterwards by simply dragging the border lines between rows/columns with the mouse pointer.

The data in the table can be ordered with respect to a certain row or column. This is accomplished by double-clicking the respective header field of the row/column. Note that such an ordering operation generally causes a permutation of columns or rows.


www.actix.com

For flexible table handling, rows and columns can be inserted or deleted. These functions are available from the Modify Grid submenu in the table context menu. Their functionality is self-explanatory.

In order to modify the data in a table, Find and Replace functions are available. These features can be initiated from the Edit menu of a table window and are applied to the current selection in the table. If there is no active selection, these functions are applied to the entire table.

The outfit of tables can be modified in various ways. All these functions can be accessed from the Table menu. Read more on the table display settings in appendix 13.2.3.

12.8.10 Printing a Table Tables can also be printed. The appearance can be adjusted in the grid page setup dialog, accessible from the View Table Page Setup… menu item. For instance, it can be decided, if the grid should be printed in color or not. Moreover, the page orientation, printing of column and row headers etc. can be specified. The page setup dialog is shown in Fig. 12-45.

Fig. 12-45 Page setup dialog for tables

Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking the icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. Once the table is set up properly, the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the icon (tooltip Print) from the standard toolbar.

12.9 Network KPI Analysis Radioplan offers several plug-ins for fully automatic network KPI analysis. These kind of plug-ins make use of all previously described means of network performance analysis like surface plots, histograms, tables, and summary reports. Both generic and customized plug-ins are available for different technologies. Here only generic plug-ins are covered.

12.9.1 UMTS KPI Analysis The UMTS KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. The plug-in dialog is opened by selecting the menu entry Tools Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. 12-46. Note that in the moment of invoking this function at least one UMTS network layer must be selected in order to get the UMTS KPI analysis functions. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are described in Table 12-15.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-46 Generic UMTS KPI analysis dialog

Table 12-15 UMTS KPI analysis thresholds


Pilot RSCP Study

Enable Pilot RSCP Study

If this checkbox is active, the pilot RSCP coverage will be evaluated.

—

Minimum Pilot RSCP The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the RSCP study.

dBm

Pilot Ec/I0 Study

Enable Pilot Ec/I0 Study

If this checkbox is active, the pilot Ec/I0 coverage (assuming a constant cell total power) will be evaluated.

—

Minimum Pilot Ec/I0 Three different evaluation thresholds of the pilot Ec/I0 for the Ec/I0 study.

dB

Cell Overlap Study

Enable Cell Overlap Study

If this checkbox is active, the cell overlap will be evaluated.

—

Minimum Pilot RSCP The minimum required pilot RSCP for providing cell coverage.

dBm

Cell Overlap Window The cell overlap margin below the best pilot RSCP to be considered for cell overlap.

dB

Calculation


A radio button to use a constant network load in all cells for Ec/I0 plot creation.

—

Network Load The constant network load in all cells in case the option “Constant Network Load” is selected.

%


A radio button to use a constant cell Tx power in all cells for Ec/I0 plot creation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case.

—

Total Cell Tx Power The constant total cell Tx power that is assumed in all cells for the pilot Ec/I0 study in case the option “Constant Cell Tx Power “ is selected.

dBm


www.actix.com



A radio button to use individual cell Tx powers for Ec/I0 plot creation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool.

—

MS Noise Figure The assumed average noise figure at the mobile terminal.

dB

Shadowing Margin The assumed shadowing margin of the mobile radio channel.

dB

Calculation Pixel Size The effective calculation pixel size for all studies of the KPI analysis.

m

Calculate Statistics per Cell

If this checkbox is active, the KPI summary report will additionally contain individual statistics for all cells. Otherwise, only the global statistics for the entire network will be given.

—

Create Plots If this checkbox is active, proper surface plots for the selected studies will be created.

—

Alternative Traffic Map Optionally, an alternative traffic map can be specified for the KPI analysis. Various georeferenced raster formats are supported.

—

Area Filter

Simulation Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the simulation area.

—

Analysis Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the analysis area.

—

The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study.

After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button, the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. When the processing is finished, the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. Furthermore, a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. An example of such a KPI analysis summary is given in Fig. 12-47.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-47 UMTS KPI analysis summary report

12.9.2 CDMA2000 KPI Analysis The CDMA2000 KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. The plug-in dialog is opened by selecting the menu entry Tools Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. 12-48. Note that in the moment of invoking this function at least one CDMA2000 network layer must be selected in order to get the CDMA2000 KPI analysis functions. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are identical to those for UMTS which are described in Table 12-15.

Fig. 12-48 Generic CDMA2000 KPI analysis dialog


After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button, the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window.


www.actix.com

When the processing is finished, the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. Furthermore, a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. The KPI analysis summary for CDMA2000 is similar as for UMTS, for an example see Fig. 12-47.

In addition to the pure planning data related KPI analysis, there is another CDMA2000 KPI analysis plug-in that allows to compare the network performance from measurements with the planning data. This function is invoked by selecting the menu entry Tools Radioplan KPI Measurement Analysis while at least one CDMA2000 network layer is active. This KPI analysis dialog is identical to the one shown in Fig. 12-50, its parameters are described in Table 12-17.

This KPI analysis plug-in accomplishes two purposes: On the one hand it performs a comprehensive statistical analysis of the measurement data, on the other hand it delivers a statistical comparison between the measurements and the network planning data. Thus the resulting report contains two sections “Measurement Analysis” and “Difference to Planning Data” which give statistical measures for each cell.

12.9.3 GSM KPI Analysis The GSM KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. The plug-in dialog is opened by selecting the menu entry Tools Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. 12-49. Note that in the moment of invoking this function at least one GSM network layer must be selected in order to get the GSM KPI analysis functions. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are described in Table 12-16.

Fig. 12-49 Generic GSM KPI analysis dialog


www.actix.com

Table 12-16 GSM KPI analysis thresholds


Rx Level Study

Enable Rx Level Study If this checkbox is active, the Rx Level coverage will be evaluated.

—

Use Clutter Offsets If this checkbox is active, the clutter specific pathloss offsets will be applied on the Rx Level Threshold. This effectively models indoor coverage.

—

Threshold Rx Level The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the RSCP study.

dBm

C/I Study

Enable C/I Study If this checkbox is active, the BCCH C/I coverage will be evaluated.

—

Use Frequency Plan If this checkbox is active, the frequency plan is considered in the interference calculation. Otherwise, all BCCH and TCH channels would be assumed on the same frequency. Then the resulting C/I would mirror the general overlap / interference situation between all cells.

—

Minimum Rx Level The minimum required Rx Level for providing cell coverage.

dBm

Minimum C/I The minimum C/I to be evaluated. This will mark the lower end of the C/I plot color palette.

dB

Step Size The step size between the minimum and maximum C/I.

dB

Maximum C/I The maximum C/I to be evaluated. This will mark the upper end of the C/I plot color palette.

dB

Cell Overlap Study

Enable Cell Overlap Study

If this checkbox is active, the cell overlap will be evaluated.

—

Minimum Rx Level The minimum required Rx Level for providing cell coverage.

dBm

Cell Overlap Window The cell overlap window below the best BCCH Rx Level to be considered for cell overlap. It is defined by an upper and a lower limit.

dB

Min. Cell Overlap Count

The minimum Cell Overlap Count to be evaluated. This will mark the lower end of the plot color palette.

#

Step Size The step size between the minimum and maximum Cell Overlap Count.

#

Max. Cell Overlap Count

The maximum Cell Overlap Count to be evaluated. This will mark the upper end of the plot color palette.

#

Calculation

Calculation Pixel Size The effective calculation pixel size for all studies of the KPI analysis.

m

Calculate Statistics per Cell

If this checkbox is active, the KPI summary report will additionally contain individual statistics for all cells. Otherwise, only the global statistics for the entire network will be given.

—

Create Plots If this checkbox is active, proper surface plots for the selected studies will be created.

—


www.actix.com


Alternative Traffic Map Optionally, an alternative traffic map can be specified for the KPI analysis. Various georeferenced raster formats are supported.

—

Area Filter

Simulation Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the simulation area.

—

Analysis Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the analysis area.

—


After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button, the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. When the processing is finished, the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. Furthermore, a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area.

12.9.4 KPI Analysis with Measurements In addition to the pure planning data related KPI analysis plug-ins of the previous sections, there is another KPI analysis plug-in that allows to compare the network performance from measurements with the planning data. This function is available for all supported technologies and can be invoked by selecting the menu entry Tools Radioplan KPI Measurement Analysis. The technology used for the KPI plug-in is determined by the currently active network layer(s). This KPI analysis dialog is shown in Fig. 12-50, its parameters are described in Table 12-17.

Fig. 12-50 Generic measurement KPI analysis dialog


www.actix.com

Table 12-17 Measurement KPI analysis settings


Project

Project The project that the measurement results set(s) shall be taken from for comparison.

—

Measurement Results Sets

Result Set A list field with available results sets. One or more result sets from the selected project can be chosen for the KPI comparison.

—

Calculation

Cell Overlap Window The Rx power range below the best cell Rx power that is applied to assess the cell overlap.

dB

Measurement Data Bin Size

The binning size applied to the measurements in the KPI comparison.

m

Area Filter

Simulation Area A radio button to confine the measurement KPI analysis to the simulation area.

—

Analysis Area A radio button to confine the measurement KPI analysis to the analysis area.

—

This KPI analysis plug-in accomplishes two purposes: On the one hand it performs a comprehensive statistical analysis of the measurement data, on the other hand it delivers a statistical comparison between the measurements and the network planning data. Thus the resulting report contains two sections “Measurement Analysis” and “Difference to Planning Data” which give statistical measures for each cell. An example of the measurement KPI analysis report is presented in Fig. 12-51.

Radioplan UMTS Measurment Analysis for Project 'CS Capacity Opt Sample ORG Tuned'

Created 25.04.2006 10:41:03Pixel Size [m2] 50x50Cell Overlap Window [dB] 6.00Filter Area Simulation Area

Cell/SC Measurement AnalysisArea [bins] Area [km2] Distance to Cell Measured ValuesMeasured Area [Bin]

Best Server Area [Bin]

Outside Best Server Area [Bin]

Measured Area [km2]

Best Server Area [km2]

Outside Best Server Area [km2]

Distance Min [m]

Distance Mean [m]

Distance Max [m]

Mean RSCP [dBm]

Mean RSCP Best [dBm]

Mean Cell Overlapping

02-1 SC 25 52 19 33 0.13 0.05 0.08 37.83 802.04 1519.96 -83.98 -78.67 1.8902-2 SC 33 102 23 79 0.26 0.06 0.20 37.83 831.36 1680.62 -81.09 -74.53 1.7802-3 SC 41 40 15 25 0.10 0.04 0.06 37.83 399.89 1519.96 -82.10 -69.86 1.6005-1 SC 97 87 12 75 0.22 0.03 0.19 471.14 1216.85 2306.95 -86.36 -79.05 2.4205-2 SC 105 62 15 47 0.16 0.04 0.12 471.14 962.05 2153.73 -87.10 -78.89 1.9305-3 SC 113 1 0 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 594.99 594.99 594.99 -82.6006-1 SC 121 13 0 13 0.03 0.00 0.03 49.32 488.74 905.23 -79.8706-2 SC 129 74 20 54 0.19 0.05 0.14 42.52 833.18 1965.02 -79.85 -66.32 1.2506-3 SC 137 80 43 37 0.20 0.11 0.09 49.32 693.60 2221.56 -83.07 -79.34 1.8407-1 SC 145 4 0 4 0.01 0.00 0.01 158.74 364.23 577.73 -93.14

Fig. 12-51 Sample measurement KPI report

12.9.5 UMTS Combined RSCP and Ec/I0 Analysis Network quality is determined by both radio coverage (in UMTS: pilot RSCP) and interference ratio (in UMTS: pilot Ec/I0). Thus it is interesting to analyze the area or the traffic percentage where both parameters are above a certain required threshold. This analysis can be performed in the combined RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis plug-in.

A new combined study can be started by selecting the menu entry Tools Combined Pilot RSCP/EcIo Analysis. Then a dialog is opened where the user can configure the required thresholds for the pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 coverage and some further relevant parameters. This analysis study dialog is shown in Fig. 12-52, the configuration is explained in Table 12-18.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-52 Combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis dialog for UMTS

Table 12-18 UMTS combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis thresholds


RSCP / Ec/I0 Study

Minimum Pilot RSCP The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the combined study.

dBm

Minimum Pilot Ec/I0 The minimum pilot Ec/I0 evaluation threshold for the combined study.

dB

Calculation


A radio button to use a constant network load in all cells for Ec/I0 calculation.

—

Network Load The constant network load in all cells in case the option “Constant Network Load” is selected.

%


A radio button to use a constant cell Tx power in all cells for Ec/I0 calculation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case.

—

Total Cell Tx Power The constant total cell Tx power that is assumed in all cells for the pilot Ec/I0 study in case the option “Constant Cell Tx Power “ is selected.

dBm


A radio button to use individual cell Tx powers for Ec/I0 calculation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool.

—

Total Noise Threshold The assumed total noise threshold being composed of the thermal background noise and the average noise figure at the mobile terminal.

dB

Calculation Pixel Size The effective calculation pixel size for the combined analysis.

m

Create Plots If this checkbox is active, plots of the analysis parameters will be created when the study is executed.

—


www.actix.com

The study produces a summary report that shows the combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 coverage in the simulation/analysis areas in relation to the covered area and the covered traffic. If the option Create Plots was selected, coverage plots of the various coverage areas are created and listed in the Layers tab to the left. An exemplary summary report of this combined study is given in Fig. 12-53.

Fig. 12-53 Sample combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 report

12.10 Traffic Matrix Generation Radioplan can automatically create traffic matrices from live network data such as cell counters collected from a switch.

By means of the Traffic Matrix Generation wizard, which is called by the menu entry Tools Traffic Matrix Generation , for any service type a traffic matrix can be generated that:

• distributes the cell counter traffic to the best serving cell areas, optionally only to areas with a minimum beacon signal received power,

• optionally considers clutter weights,

• is attached to a Service Profile previously defined in the Radioplan project tree.

This functionality can be used as an alternative to importing traffic data from a radio network planning tool (refer to section 5.5.1).

The following sections describe the prerequesites for that as well as the wizard-based traffic matrix generation itself.

12.10.1 Prerequisites Before starting the Traffic Matrix Generation wizard, the following prerequisites should be observed:

• Select the Network Layer(s) for the best serving cell calculation

The best serving cell areas will be calculated for the Radioplan project configuration of the selected network layer(s) (refer to section 5.2).

Thus, the calculation can be based on predictions imported from a planning tool as well as on predictions tuned afterwards in Radioplan by measurements.

• Only the active cells will be considered for traffic matrix generation.

• The Simulation Area defines the area for traffic matrix generation.

• Define a Service Profile as part of the Radioplan project user configuration, to which the generated traffic matrix shall be attached to.

A set of profiles representing a generic user can be created easily by selecting Add Generic User Profiles from the context menu of the User folder in the project tree (refer also to section 6.6.5).

Through the Network Layer setting of each UE Profile that references the Service Profile the traffic matrix can also be assigned to a specific network layer.

For more information on the user configuration in a Radioplan project, please refer to section 6.6.


www.actix.com

• If the traffic shall be weighted during the distribution to the best serving areas based on the clutter matrix, a clutter matrix must be defined in the Radioplan project.

• If the traffic shall be weighted during the distribution to the best serving areas based on another raster map, this raster map must be displayed as a surface plot in the Radioplan Layers tab.

This surface plot can be created, for example, by importing a raster data file (refer to section 3.4.12), by displaying any matrix of the Radioplan project (e.g. clutter matrix; refer to section 6.4.1.5), and by creating any other surface plot based on the comprehensive Radioplan analysis capabilities (refer to section 12.5).

• The input data with the cell-based traffic (counter) values must be available as a list of cell names (cell IDs as in the Radioplan project) associated with the cell traffic value.

It may be provided in a spreadsheet application for copy-paste via the clipboard or as a tab- or comma-separated file: *.txt , *.csv , or *.dat .

The traffic value may be basically any type. As what type it is interpreted by Radioplan, depends on the Service Profile to which the traffic matrix is attached to, e.g.:

• Erlang – for service profiles with Traffic Model “Speech /Video” – i.e. a served traffic value for circuit-switched services

• number of potential users – for service profiles with Traffic Model “Atoll-Compatible …” – i.e. an offered traffic value

• number of simultaneously active users (of a certain type) – for service profiles with any other Traffic Model – i.e. a served traffic value for any type of service

The traffic matrix in Radioplan will always represent this traffic value as a spatial density <any_trafic_funit>/km2 , because this is independent of the pixel size.

12.10.2 Traffic Matrix Generation The traffic matrix generation is started by the menu entry Tools Traffic Matrix Generation . It opens a 3-page wizard that guides the user through the configuration options.

At the first page of the wizard, the input data can be specified and verified against the Radioplan project, Fig. 12-54.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-54 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Input Data

In order to provide the input data, either copy-paste the corresponding two columns from a spreadsheet application into the two-column grid or click the Load Traffic From File… button. In order to paste into the grid, simply select the first Cell ID field.

As the next step, by clicking the Check Input Data button, the provided list of Cell IDs is compared to the cells of the network layer(s) selected in the Radioplan project. Thereby, all lines where the Cell ID field does not correspond to any cell in the selected Radioplan network layer(s), are automatically removed from the grid.

The result is indicated in a message box:

• Traffic Input Data Are Valid : There is a traffic value defined for each cell of the selected Radioplan network layer(s).

Close the message box and click Next to proceed.

• n Cells were found without Traffic Value. Please check the Validity of Input Data! For one or more cells of the selected Radioplan network layer(s) there is no traffic value specified (either the field is empty or the cell ID is not listed.

After closing the message box the respective cells are also listed in the grid having “No Traffic Value”.

In the latter case the following options are possible:

• Simply add the missing traffic values by editing the respective fields in the grid, eventually Check Input Data again, and proceed by clicking Next.

• There area two scenarios to cope with missing traffic values:

▫ Consider Cells with Traffic Value only : The values are not available for cells, which had not been active in the network, when the counters where collected. Then, the traffic input data only represents the active cells of the live network and should also be distributed to those cells serving areas only. Accordingly, the traffic matrix generation will be executed only for the cells with a traffic value. By checking Permanently deactivate Cells without Traffic Value , the cells


www.actix.com

without traffic values will remain deactivated in the Radioplan project as a result of the traffic matrix generation. Otherwise, they are only deactivated during the Traffic Matrix Generation.

▫ Consider all Cells : In this case, the traffic matrix generation assumes zero traffic for the undefined cells, but calculates the best serving cell areas also for those cells. Accordingly, no traffic is spread to the undefined cells, thus creating zero traffic areas.

At the second page of the wizard, optionally, the traffic weighting can be specified, Fig. 12-55.

In the distribution of the cell traffic values to each cell’s best serving area weight based on the clutter or based on a raster layer can be considered.

A formula for the clutter weighting is given in section 6.6.6.7.

In any case the Weighting Factors are used as relative weights, i.e. a pixel with weighting factor 10 will get 10 times the traffic of a clutter pixel with weighting factor 1. Moreover, a Weighting Factor of zero results in zero traffic for the respective area.

At the same time, the total traffic in each cell area will remain the same as the input traffic value; only the relative distribution of the traffic across each cell area may be different.

• Weighting by Clutter Matrix : For each clutter class a Weighting Factor can be specified by editing the Weighting Factor column. Then the weight to be applied to each pixel depends on the pixels clutter class. The clutter weights can be pre-configured in the TrafficMatrixGeneration.ini configuration file, which is located in the configuration\resultanalysis\ subdirectory of the Radioplan installation (see [R-Admin] for more information).

• Weighting by Raster Layer : If one or more surface plots are available in the Layers tab, they are available for selection in the associated drop-down list. If a raster layer is selected, then the weight to be applied to each pixel is taken from that surface plot.

Fig. 12-55 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Traffic Weighting


www.actix.com

Then, at the third page of the wizard, the calculation and output options can be specified, Fig. 12-56.

Fig. 12-56 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Calculation and Output Options

The calculation and output options include:

• The Pixel Size [m] for the traffic matrix to be generated.

• If Enable Area below Min. Rx Power [dBm] is enabled, the traffic is only distributed to areas where the beacon signal power received from the best serving cell exceeds the specified Min. Rx Power.

• The Scaling Factor is applied to each pixel of the generated traffic matrix.

• The traffic matrix to be generated must be assigned to a Service Profile. All service profiles defined in the user configuration of the Radioplan project are availabel for selection from the associated drop-down list.

• If Generate Plot of Traffic Matrix is enabled, a surface plot of the generated traffic matrix is automatically created at the end. The unit that will be displayed in the layer settings of that surface plot can also be defined.

Note that the specified unit does not affect the traffic matrix generation process nor the contents of the generated traffic matrix; it is just a display property of the generated surface plot layer.

By clicking Run , the traffic matrix generation is executed. As the result a new traffic matrix is created and attached to the specified service profile in the Radioplan project tree.

And if Generate Plot of Traffic Matrix was enabled, it is also already displayed as a surface plot.

The end of the processing is also logged in the Message window.

12.11 Interference Matrix Generation Radioplan can automatically create interference matrices from the project data. Such interference matrices are typically used for frequency planning.


www.actix.com

Since a Radioplan project may contain different types of pathloss matrices, the resulting interference matrices can be based on:

• predictions as imported from a planning tool,

• predictions tuned afterwards in Radioplan by measurements, or

• measurements only, if the pathloss matrices were created from measurements.

The following sections describe the prerequesites for that and how to create interference matrices as well as the contents of the interference matrix result set and how to export interference matrices.

12.11.1 Prerequisites Before starting the Interference Matrix Generation wizard, the following prerequisites should be observed:

• Only the active Network Layer(s) will be considered for interference matrix generation (refer to section 5.2).

• Only the active cells will be considered for interference matrix generation.

• The Simulation Area defines the area for interference matrix generation.

• For generating an interference matrix using Traffic Weighting, all traffic matrices will be considered that are referenced through their Service Profile by an active UE Profile and where the UE Profile either references an active network layer or ALL network layers.

Moreover, a C/I mapping table with 3 columns is required as an input to the interference matrix generation:

• 1st column: C/I threshold

• 2nd column: co-channel interference probability for the respective C/I thresholds

• 3rd column: adjacent-channel interference probability for the respective C/I thresholds

These values can be specified in a tab-separated *.txt file, where:

• C/I values must be integer in ascending order per row, and

• rows not starting with such an integer number are ignored.

For example:

C/I co adj 0 0.933192799 0.158655254 1 0.90878878 0.121672505 2 0.878327495 0.09121122 3 0.841344746 0.066807201 4 0.797671619 0.047790352 5 0.747507462 0.033376508 6 0.691462461 0.022750132 7 0.63055866 0.01513014 8 0.566183833 0.009815329 9 0.5 0.006209665 10 0.433816167 0.003830381 11 0.36944134 0.002303266 12 0.308537539 0.001349898 13 0.252492538 0.000770985 ...


www.actix.com

12.11.2 Create an Interference Matrix Result Set The interference matrix generation is started by the menu entry Tools Interference Matrix Create Interference Matrix… which opens the Create Interference Matrix dialog, Fig. 12-57, with the configuration parameters defined in Table 12-19.

Fig. 12-57 Create Interference Matrix dialog

A C/I mapping table – as specified in section 12.11.1 – is a mandatory input.

Table 12-19 Create Interference Matrix parameters


C/I Mapping Table File The file with the mapping of C/I thresholds to probabilities of co-channel and adjacent-channel interference – as specified in section 12.11.1.

—

Title (Result Set) The title of the Result Set that will be created as a result of interference matrix generation.

The default is “Interference Matrix”.

—

Noise Threshold Pixels with a best server beacon signal received power (for GSM: RxLev_DL) not exceeding this threshold are ignored by the interference matrix generation.

dBm

Pixel Resolution The pixel size that is applied for generating the interference matrix.

m

Weighting Use Area (homogeneous traffic): ignores the traffic configuration of the project and calculates the probabilities of interfered area.

Use Traffic Weighting: considers the traffic matrices configured in the project (refer to section 12.11.1) for weighting the probabilities of interfered area, thus yielding probabilities of interfered traffic.

—

By clicking OK , the interference matrix generation is executed and the progress and end is logged in the Message window.

At the end a new Result Set with the specified name is added (appended) to the Results tab.

12.11.3 Interference Matrix Result Set An “interference matrix” actually represents interference probabilities for a number of cell-to-cell relations. Accordingly, the Interference Matrix Result Set does not contain pixel-based values, but cell-based values that refer to another cell.


www.actix.com

In the Result Set, two values are distinguished:

• a measure for co-channel interference probability: IM – CoChannel [Num] and

• a measure for adjacent channel interference probability: IM – AdjChannel [Num] .

Both values actually are not probabilities in the range [0; 1], but measures that indicate accordingly higher or lower interference probability.

Both parameter either represent interfered area, if Use Area (homogeneous traffic) was selected as Weighting, or interfered traffic, Use Traffic Weighting was selected in the Create Interference Matrix dialog.

In the interference matrix generation process, these values are calculated as illustrated in Fig. 12-58.

for each best cell i (‘C’ representing the received signal level):

for each other cell k != i:

for each best server area pixel of cell i:

calculate Ci/Ik(thereby ignoring C or I levels below Noise Threshold)

map it to the 2 probabilities:for co-channel and for adjacent-channel interference

multiply the probability with:the bin size (for interfered area)and, for interfered traffic, with the total traffic density value of the bin

(thereby ignoring bins with zero traffic density)

Accumulate the weighted probabilities over the bins

yielding:the probable interfered traffic or areafor co-channel and adjacent channel interference

Fig. 12-58 Calculation principle of the values in the Interference Matrix Result Set

The Interference Matrix Result Set can be further analyzed and displayed by all usual functions for a Radioplan result set (refer to section 12.4).

For example, a list of the cell-to-cell relations for each Result Set parameter can be created a double-click on the parameter and then, in the opened Parameters for Active Project dialog, selecting Parameter over Time (Table) in the Graphical Settings.

12.11.4 Export an Interference Matrix An Interference Matrix Result Set can be exported to a tab-delimited file in Cellopt AFP 2 format by the menu entry Tools Interference Matrix Export Interference Matrix… , which opens the Export Interference Matrix dialog, Fig. 12-59.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-59 Export Interference Matrix dialog

In this dialog, the user must:

• specify the name of the interference matrix file to be created and

• select the Interference Matrix Result Set; All Interference Matrix result sets are listed. Even if only one is listed, it must be selected.

The contents of such a generated file in Cellopt AFP 2 format may look as follows:

12.11.5 Customizing the Interference Matrix Generation Some default settings of the interference matrix generation can be pre-configured in the winesinterferencematrix.ini file in the configuration data folder %APPDATA%\configuration (see [R-Admin] for details).

12.12 Result Set Aggregation Radioplan can be used to aggregate data that has been imported by the Performance Counter measurement import plugin into a Generic Radioplan result set (refer to section 5.9.1).

Thus, for example, traffic data measured at a switch over a certain period can be aggregated in order to use it as representative input to traffic matrix generation, automatic neighbor list planning, or automatic parameter optimization in Radioplan.

For such a Generic result set, the result set aggregation can be started by selecting the entry Aggregate Result Set… from the context menu of the result set name, Fig. 12-60.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-60 Generic result set context menu

This opens the result set aggregation dialog, Fig. 12-61.

There are two methods available to aggregate the result set data:

• Calculate the Busy Hour or, more generally, a Busy Period for each cell and day

▫ If the Average flag is checked, a further result set in addition to the Busy Hour result set will be created. That result set contains the average value of N_Best Busy Hour values for each cell, where N_Best means is specified by the Number of Days.

• Calculate the Maximum Value for each cell

In the Select Master drop-down list, all performance counter parameters of the result set are listed. One of them has to be selected as the master counter in order to determine the Busy Hour or Busy Period. Typically the master counter represents some kind of traffic. All other counters will be aggregated for the same Busy Hour or Busy Period time stamps.

The Data Availability per Day [%] that is required to use the data for aggregation and the Measurement Period [minute] can be specified. Based on that the data availability is checked before the result set aggregation for each cell and day.

For example, if the Measurement Period is set to 60 minutes, 24 counter measurements for a particular cell and day, i.e. one for each hour of the day, have to be available to achieve a Data Availability per Day of 100%. The counter of one hour could be missing to still achieve 95% data availability.

Counter measurements for which the data availability threshold is not exceeded, will be discarded.

The availability range Start Time and End Time is initialized with the period for which the selected Master counter is available in the underlying result set. This time range may be further delimited to get a shorter time focus, e.g. when aggregating a huge amount of performance counters.

The Average Number of Values per Object indicates to the user, how many values for each measurement object the selected master counter consists of. It is automatically generated for the selected Master counter, Measurement Period, and Time Range.


www.actix.com

Fig. 12-61 Result Set Aggregation dialog

By clicking OK in the result set aggregation dialog, the data aggregation is executed.

At the end a new … (Busy Period) result set with the name corresponding to the processed result set is created.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 317

www.actix.com

13 Appendix This appendix contains additional information and reference guides about Radioplan in general.

13.1 Network Configuration Data Specification

13.1.1 Directory Structure of the Network Configuration Files The network configuration files are ordered in a hierarchical directory structure. This structure is also mirrored in the tree structure that is displayed in the Configuration tab of the tree window in Radioplan, see section 6.1.

Every project needs its own data and should thus have an own data directory. Inside this project directory, the hierarchical directory structure resides as shown in Fig. 13-1.

Fig. 13-1 Directory structure of the configuration files

In general, every leaf directory in the tree contains all possible data sets in separate files. If there are, for instance, three different sites in the simulation setup, then there must be three corresponding configuration files in the config\utran\nodeb directory. The names of the configuration files can be chosen arbitrarily; however, they must be unique inside a certain directory. All files (if not unique) contain an identifier inside to uniquely distinguish between different objects.

13.1.2 Network Configuration File Format Most of the network configuration files are in ASCII format. The only exception is large binary files for grid-based data (e.g. pathloss data). The configuration files use the Java properties file format in general. It is characterized by line based data. Each line contains first a parameter name (starting with capital letter) followed by an equation sign (“=”) and subsequently a value of the parameter. The parameters (“Java properties”) can appear in arbitrary order in the files. It is also possible to give comments in the configuration files. Comments start with a “#” and continue until the end of line.

Normally, the network configuration files should not be changed manually although they are in a readable ASCII format. Always use Radioplan to modify the network configuration!


www.actix.com

13.2 Window Controls Reference

13.2.1 Menus The following overview gives a summary of the available functions that are accessible from the menus.

File Menu

Creates a new project

Loads configuration data (creates a new project)

Saves configuration data of the current project

Functions related to current project (see File Current Project)

Saves the current plot as image (not for tables)

Connect/Disconnect Atoll session

Import functions (see File Import)

Export functions (see File Export)

Shows print dialog for current view

Shows print preview

Shows printer setup dialog

Quits the application

File Import

Imports a raster file into an image layer

Imports a vector file into an image layer

Imports a Radioplan layer

Imports a graphics layer

Imports a Radioplan project from another database

Imports a new Asset project

Imports a new ATOLL project

Imports a new TCPU project

Imports a new NetPlan project

Imports a new Odyssey project

Imports a new Planet EV project

Imports a new Wizard project

Imports a new CellOpt AFP project

Imports measurement data from a measurement device

Imports tuned pathloss matrices into the project

Imports network configuration data from the OSS

File Export

Updates an Asset project with changes

Updates an ATOLL project with changes

Updates an Odyssey project with changes

Updates a Planet EV project with changes

Updates a Wizard project with changes

Exports a CellOpt AFP plan

Exports tuned predictions to Asset

Exports tuned predictions to Atoll

Exports data in Excel 97 format (for tables only)

Exports data in ASCII format (for tables only)

Exports all tuned pathloss matrices from the project

Updates OSS network configuration data with changes


www.actix.com

Edit Menu

Undoes the last action

Redoes the last action

Cuts a selection (stored to clipboard)

Copies a selection (stored to clipboard)

Copies a selection as plain text

Pastes the clipboard contents at the cursor

Shows the find dialog

Shows the replace dialog

Selects all items in current view

Opens the embedded clipboard in a separate window

View Menu

Shows the projection settings dialog

Select configuration data to be viewed (see View Configuration Data Plots)

Graph edit functions (see View Graph)

Table edit functions (see View Table)

Zoom functions (see View Zoom)

Viewing area component switches (see View Visible Components)

Graphical edit functions (see View Paint)

View Configuration Data Plots

Shows composite pathloss layer

Shows composite pathloss layer with antenna patterns

Shows best cell received power layer

Shows interference ratio layer

Shows best serving cell layer

Shows cell overlap layer

Shows frequency plan

Shows RSSI layer (for CDMA systems only)

Shows carrier-to-adjacent interferer layer (for GSM only)

Shows clutter data layer

Shows DEM layer

View Graph

Creates a table from the shown diagram/histogram

Shows the axis scale dialog

Shows the histogram settings dialog

Shows the chart page setup dialog

Resets chart view to default styles

The graph submenu is only active if a chart/histogram is displayed in the viewing area.


www.actix.com

View Table

Stores table/report in project

Shows the page setup dialog for printing

Shows the header/footer dialog for printing

Allows page breaks in tables

Splits up a table to pages with given # rows/columns

The table submenu is only active if a table is displayed in the viewing area.

View Zoom

Shows an enlarged part of the view

Shows a downsized part of the view

Fits the view to the window size (total configuration data)

Fits the simulation area to the window size

Fits the analysis area to the window size

These entries are identical with the respective icons in the standard toolbar, see section 13.2.2.

View Visible Components

Checkbox for viewing sites

Checkbox for viewing cells

Checkbox for viewing area boundaries

Checkbox for viewing streets

Checkbox for viewing site/cell labels

Checkbox for viewing additional legend

These entries are identical with the checkboxes of the components toolbar, see section 13.2.2.

View Paint

Default paint mode (no paint option active)

Switches to zoom mode

Switches to pan mode (to shift the displayed surface plot)

Distance measurement tool

Switches to simulation area paint mode

Switches to analysis area paint mode

Switches to streets paint mode

Switches to matrix editing mode

Switches to Site and Cell add mode

Switches to Site and Cell configuration mode

Shows the grid size dialog

Measurements Menu

Starts the measurement software

Clears the measurement layers

Opens the Measurement Module settings dialog

Opens a dialog to tune all pathloss matrices with measurements

Reverts pathloss tuning

Creates pathloss matrices from measurements, if available

Copies tuned predictions into this network layer


www.actix.com

Optimization Menu

Starts the optimization engine

Stops the optimization engine

Releases the optimization engine

Opens the general optimization settings dialog

UMTS & CDMA analysis plots (see Optimization CDMA & UMTS Analysis Plots)

GSM & iDEN analysis plots (see Optimization GSM & iDEN Analysis Plots)

WiMAX analysis plots (see Optimization WiMAX Analysis Plots)

Revenue analysis plots (see Optimization Revenue Analysis Plots)

Shows optimization summary report

Shows optimization progress chart

Checkbox for the automatic plot update during optimization

Loads optimization settings

Saves optimization settings

Optimization CDMA & UMTS Analysis Plots

Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP coverage

Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP threshold per pixel

Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 coverage

Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 threshold per pixel

Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP from the best cell

Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 from the best cell

Shows a surface plot of the RSSI per pixel

Shows a cell overlap plot (pilot pollution areas)

Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell

Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site

Shows a surface plot of the equivalent traffic

Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users

Shows a surface plot of the relative load per cell

Shows a surface plot of the relative traffic per cell

Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell

Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell

Shows a surface plot of the CQI

Best cell areas display functions(see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas)

Optimization GSM & iDEN Analysis Plots

Shows a surface plot of the BCCH coverage

Shows a surface plot of the BCCH RxLev threshold per pixel

Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I coverage

Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I threshold per pixel

Shows a surface plot of the BCCH RxLev from the best cell

Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I from the best cell

Shows a surface plot of the best cell area overlap








www.actix.com

Optimization WiMAX Analysis Plots

Shows a surface plot of the RSSI coverage

Shows a surface plot of the RSSI coverage threshold per pixel

Shows a surface plot of the CINR coverage

Shows a surface plot of the CINR coverage threshold per pixel

Shows a surface plot of the RSSI from the best cell

Shows a surface plot of the CINR from the best cell

Shows a surface plot of the best cell area overlap







Optimization Revenue Analysis Plots

Shows a surface plot of the total revenue

Shows a surface plot of the covered revenue

Shows a surface plot of the lost revenue

Shows a surface plot of the total revenue per cell

Shows a surface plot of the covered revenue per cell

Shows a surface plot of the lost revenue per cell

Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas

Shows best cell areas of all cells

Shows best cell areas of all reconfigurable cells

Shows best cell areas of all relevant cells

Simulation Menu

Opens the simulation settings dialog

Applies network element templates (see Simulation Network Configuration)

Starts a dynamic network simulation

Stops a dynamic network simulation

Shows the project series dialog

Loads the latest simulation results

Flag to automatically load simulation results

Toggles the backup function

Enables simulations on the local machine

Available remote connections

Simulation Network Configuration

Applies template settings to sites in project

Applies template settings to cells in project


www.actix.com

Results Menu

See Results -> Measurement Results

See Results -> Simulation Results

Histogram from plot functions (see Results -> Histogram from Surface Plot)

Table from plot functions (see Results -> Data Table from Surface Plot)

Starts a layer slide show

Results Measurement Results

Shows the measurement summary report

Results Simulation Results

Shows the simulation result summary report

Creates default result layers

Shows chart with active UEs per UE profile

Shows table with active UEs per UE profile

Results Histogram from Surface Plot

Creates a histogram from all plot pixels

Creates a histogram from the plot pixels in the simulation area

Creates a histogram from the plot pixels in the analysis area

Creates a histogram table from all plot pixels

Creates a histogram table from the plot pixels in the simulation area

Creates a histogram table from the plot pixels in the analysis area

Results Data Table from Surface Plot

Creates a data table from all plot pixels

Creates a data table from the plot pixels in the simulation area

Creates a data table from the plot pixels in the analysis area

Tools Menu

Opens the general settings dialog

Opens the display settings dialog

User-defined workspace functions (see Tools User Settings)

Neighbor list optimization (see Tools Neighbor Lists)

Interference matrix generation (see Tools Interference Matrix)

Database functions (see Tools -> Database)

License management functions (see Tools -> License Management)

List of additional plug-ins


www.actix.com

Tools User Settings

Exports the color legend presets

Imports the color legend presets

Export the workspace

Import a workspace definition

Reset the workspace to factory defaults

Opens the layer template manager for the workspace

Tools Neighbor Lists

Shows the neighbor list optimization dialog

Exports the neighbor list definitions

Tools Interference Matrix

Creates an interference matrix

Exports the interference matrix

Tools Database

Automatically updates all projects in the database

Shows a list of all projects currently in the database

Cleans up and compresses the database

Deletes all cached matrices (to free disk space)

Deletes cached matrices in current project

Deletes all temporary files (to free disk space)

Tools License Management

Shows the license registration dialog

Needed for license transfer to another computer

The usage of the license handling menu entries is described in section 2.3.

Window Menu

Checkbox for the standard toolbar

Checkbox for the status bar

Checkbox for the message window

Checkbox for the tree window

Minimizes all separate windows

Closes all separate windows

List of current separate windows

Help Menu

Opens the online help window

Shows the info dialog of WiNeS


www.actix.com

13.2.2 Toolbars

Standard Toolbar

Creates a new project

Loads the configuration data of a project

Saves the configuration data of a project

Cuts the selection and adds it to the clipboard

Copies the selection to the clipboard

Pastes the clipboard contents at the cursor position

Undoes last action

Redoes last action

Shows print dialog for current view

Shows print preview dialog

Zooms in (scale-up)

Zooms out (scale-down)

Zoom undo

Fits current view (total configuration data) to window size

Fits simulation area to window size

Fits analysis area to window size

Shows the last surface plot

Shows the last chart graph

Shows the last histogram

Shows the last table

Shows the results summary report

Context sensitive help function

Views Toolbar

Opens the network layer management dialog

Filters the visible network elements to the active network layer(s)

Creates best cell received power layer

Creates interference ratio layer

Creates best serving cell layer

Creates cell overlap layer

Creates clutter data layer

Creates DEM terrain layer

Shows raster image import dialog

Starts a layer slide show

Currently active network layer(s)

Cell Search Toolbar

Cell search field Find cell


www.actix.com

Paint Toolbar

Default paint mode

Zoom mode

Pan mode

Distance measurement tool

Simulation area paint mode

Analysis area paint mode

Site and Cell add mode

Site and Cell configuration mode

Matrix editing mode

Street paint mode

Graphics paint mode

Define grid size

In zoom mode, the user can draw a dragbox with the mouse pointer by holding down the left mouse button. When releasing the mouse button, the viewing area is scaled to the just drawn dragbox. If a chart graph is displayed in the viewing area, then zooming with the mouse pointer also works in the default mode, i.e. zoom mode need not be chosen to scale the diagrams. In pan mode the visible part of the viewing area can be shifted with the mouse by pressing and holding the left mouse button while moving the surface plot to the desired position. This mode works for surface plots only.

Components Toolbar

Checkbox for viewing sites

Checkbox for viewing cells

Checkbox for viewing simulation/analysis area boundaries

Checkbox for viewing streets

Checkbox for viewing site/cell labels

Checkbox for viewing additional legend (string data only)

Graphics Toolbar

This toolbar is only visible in graphics paint mode.

Simulator Toolbar

Starts a dynamic network simulation

Stops a dynamic network simulation

Opens the simulation settings dialog

Opens the simulation results import dialog

Creates the simulation result summary report


www.actix.com

Optimization Toolbar

Measurement Toolbar

Starts the measurement software

Clears all measurement layers

Opens the Measurement Module settings dialog

Creates the measurement summary report

13.2.3 Additional Table Grid Settings When displaying a table, several additional adjustments can be made. All of these adjustments are available from the Table menu.

The header/footer dialog for tables allows to set up headers and footers of the current table for printing (see Fig. 13-2).

The column headers, labeled Left Aligned, Centered, and Right Aligned, indicate the header alignment of the text in the cells below them. All of the text contained in the Left Aligned column (with the exception of the column header) will be left justified in the header/footer. The Centered column will be centered horizontally and Right Aligned will be right justified.

Fig. 13-2 Header/footer dialog for tables

There are 10 rows used for entering header/footer text, providing the user with a mechanism to mix fonts within the header/footer. The actual text printed to the page is pieced together by appending each of the cells to the previous. In other words, the Left Aligned header text is determined as follows: (1,1) + (2,1) + (3,1) + (4,1) + (5,1) + (6,1) + (7,1) + (8,1) + (9,1) + (10,1), where (x,y) indicates the text contained in that cell and + indicates string concatenation.

The font can be changed by selecting a cell or range of cells, and then clicking the font button. A standard font dialog will be displayed and the user can make the necessary changes. When the font dialog is closed via its OK button, the changes will be applied back to the selected cells.


www.actix.com

In addition to text, the grid will also accept the following predefined tokens (or escape sequences):

Token Description

$F Document file name

$A Application name

$P Current page number

$N Total number of pages

$D Current date

$R Register / Tabsheet name

A page break feature can be switched on or off using the View Table Page Break Mode menu item. If activated, cyan lines appear that can be used to adjust the page breaks similar to Excel.

Fig. 13-3 Page configuration dialog

In some cases it should be useful to print a table to a predefined number of pages. Radioplan scales the table if the View Table Fit to [n,m] Pages checkbox is switched on, that the table fits to the desired number of columns and rows.

13.3 Library Overview A library with typical parameter settings for the radio network configuration items is provided in the \library\ directory below the Radioplan installation directory. Internally, the library is structured hierarchically as the network configuration data tree which is described in chapter 6. The library directory structure is identical with the network configuration structure given in section 13.1.

In particular, the library contains typical template profiles and sample matrices for the following items:

• sample clutter matrix

• equipment profiles

• mobility profiles

• service profiles

• sample traffic matrix

• UE profiles

• antenna patterns

• a generic cell

• a generic site

• sample pathloss matrices


www.actix.com

• a generic RNC

• monitor template configuration (for simulator only)

Seven sample pathloss matrices are provided in the library. Three of them are calculated with a freespace pathloss model, the other four ones are calculated according to the vehicular propagation model as specified in [30.03]. The models used are explained in the following.

Free space pathloss equation:

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛⋅+⎟⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛⋅+=

][log10

][log205.32][

kmRD

MHzfdBL

UMTS 30.03 version 3.2.0 Vehicular:

[ ] 80log21)log(18][

log)1041(40][ 3 +⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛⋅+Δ⋅−⎟⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛⋅Δ⋅−= −

MHzfh

kmRhdBL bb

R: base station – mobile station separation

f: carrier frequency (2000 MHz)

bhΔ : base station antenna height, in meters, measured from the average rooftop level

D: pathloss exponent

13.4 Examples Overview Altogether three example projects are provided in the \examples directory of the Radioplan installation CD-ROM. They are summarized in Table 13-1.

Table 13-1 Example projects

Project Description

Demo Project The demonstration project. See chapter 4 for details.

Dresden Example

A realistic UMTS network scenario in the center of Dresden, Germany.

Dresden Example Optimized

An optimized UMTS network scenario with respect to capacity and QoS in the center of Dresden, Germany.

13.4.1 Demo Project The specifications of the Demo Project are given in Table 13-2, see chapter 4. The simulation area is shown in Fig. 13-4.

Table 13-2 Specification of the Demo Project

Configuration Item

Specification

Investigation area 1000m x 1000m

Network configuration

2 sites with three cells each, diagonally aligned

Antennas 6° Downtilt Antenna

Pathloss model Freespace propagation model with pathloss exponent of 3

UE profiles Speech UE (40Erl/km2, movement along streets) and WWW UE (5Erl/km2, straight movement)


www.actix.com

Configuration Item

Specification

Traffic Equally distributed within rectangles (different regions per UE profile).

Streets Simple street grid (rectangle).

Fig. 13-4 Demo project

13.4.2 Dresden City Example The specifications of the Dresden scenarios are given in Table 13-3. The simulation area is shown in Fig. 13-5, whereas the 3-dimensional building structure is shown in Fig. 13-6. Both projects differ slightly in the network configuration.

Table 13-3 Specification of the Dresden example project

Configuration Item

Specification

Simulation area Polygonal area of approx. 10km2

Network configuration

10 sites (mostly 3-sectorized), placed with respect to surroundings, different antenna heights

Antennas 6° Downtilt Antenna

Pathloss model Empirical propagation model (COST 231 with 3-dimensional building model) [RPS]

UE profiles different user profiles for a typical service mix

Traffic Different traffic matrices; speech mainly concentrated to streets, other services mainly in hotspot areas.

Streets Realistic street map of the center of Dresden.


www.actix.com

Fig. 13-5 Dresden scenarios

Fig. 13-6 3-dimensional building database of downtown Dresden


www.actix.com

13.5 Supported Raster Data File Formats A large number of raster data formats are supported for import. They can either be loaded as image layers or as network configuration matrix for DEM, clutter, traffic, or pathloss. The most common of these file formats are briefly introduced in the following Subsections with some remarks on special features and their georeferencing ability.

13.5.1 TIFF / Geo TIFF Format Most forms of TIFF and GeoTIFF files are supported where the latter ones are georeferenced. All common GeoTIFF projections are supported. Georeferencing from GeoTIFF is supported in the form of one tie point and pixel size, a transformation matrix, or a list of GCPs. In order to use some uncommon projected and geographic coordinate systems and translate them into OGC WKT, it is necessary to have the EPSG *.csv files available. They must be found at the location pointed to by the GEOTIFF_CSV environment variable.

If no georeferencing information is available in the TIFF file itself, an ESRI world file (see Section 13.5.1.1) with the extension *.tfw, *.tiffw or *.wld, as well as a MapInfo *.tab file (only control points used, coordinate system ignored) could be used.

13.5.1.1 ESRI World File Format

The ESRI World File format is an ASCII format to associate an image file with a geographical reference. It contains information about the absolute location of the image as well as the scaling and alignment of the image pixels. The usual extension for such a header file is *.wld or *.tfw. Usually, the accompanied image file is given in the TIFF format. However, this is not an exclusive condition.

A *.wld file consists of six lines with a numeric value in each line. The first two lines specify the pixel scaling vector for the x-direction, the third and fourth lines give the pixel scaling vector in y-direction, and the last two lines locate the orientation point (usually the upper left corner) of the image. In either of these line pairs, the first line contains the x-coordinate and the latter line contains the y-coordinate of the vector or the position, respectively.

Since Radioplan uses a Cartesian coordinate system internally, the values in the second and third lines must be zero. Thus it is ensured that the image is aligned to the x- and y-axes of the underlying coordinate system. If the orientation point is the upper left corner of the image, the value in the fourth line (pixel scaling vector in y-direction) must be negative because the y-vector points downward then. The values are assumed being given in meters.

13.5.2 BIL File Format The BIL file format represents one or more matrices in binary format. A *.hdr file is used to specify the exact data format of the binary matrix (*.bil file). Both 8 and 16 bit precision formats with “I” or “M” byte order formats are supported. The number of bands defined within the BIL matrix is restricted to one. Please refer to [ATL-TR] for further details about the BIL file format structure.

13.5.3 Arc/Info Raster Formats

13.5.3.1 Arc/Info ASCII Interchange Format

This format is the ASCII interchange format for Arc/Info Grid, and takes the form of an ASCII file, plus sometimes an associated *.prj file containing information on an affine georeferencing transform and some projections.

Grids are treated as signed 16bit integer unless the first scan line contains decimal values in which case the image is treated as 32bit floating point.

13.5.3.2 Arc/Info Binary Grid Format

This format is the internal binary format for Arc/Info Grid incl. information on an affine georeferencing transform and some projections, and takes the form of a coverage level


www.actix.com

directory in an Arc/Info database. To open the coverage select the coverage directory, or an *.adf file (such as hdr.adf) from within it.

13.5.4 EOSAT Fast Format EOSAT datasets normally consist of one or more raster data files (e.g. BAND1.DAT, BAND2.DAT, …) and a header file which must be called HEADER.DAT. To open the dataset select the HEADER.DAT file.

Only the raster data can be accessed. Georeferencing and other meta data is ignored.

13.5.5 Erdas Imagine Format The Erdas Imagine *.img format is supported with some limitations. Pyramid levels and metadata are ignored, but palettes and georeferencing is captured. It supports the Erdas band types u8, s8, u16, s16, u32, s32, f32, f64, c64 and c128.

13.5.6 GIF File Format Normal and interlaced GIF files are supported. GIF files always appear as having one color-mapped eight bit band. Generally, GIF files have no integrated support for georeferencing. However, if an ESRI world file exists with the *.wld extension (see Section 13.5.1.1), it will be read and used to establish the geotransform for the image.

13.5.7 Grid eXchange File Format This is a raster exchange format propagated by Geosoft, and made a standard in the gravity/magnetic field. The format also includes support for georeferencing information and projections.

13.5.8 Hierarchical Data Format (Release 4) There are two HDF formats, HDF4 (4.x and previous releases) and HDF5. These formats are completely different and not compatible. Here, only HDF4 file import is supported. NASA's Earth Observing System (EOS) maintains its own HDF modification called HDF-EOS which is also supported for import. This modification is suited for use with remote sensing data and fully compatible with underlying HDF.

Hierarchical Data Format is a container for several different datasets. For data storing, Scientific Datasets (SDS) are most often used. SDS is a multidimensional array filled by data. One HDF file may contain several different SDS arrays. They may differ in size, number of dimensions, and may represent data for different regions. The import of remote sensing and geospatial datasets in form of raster images is supported.

For georeferencing the HDF files, the ASTER Level 1B and ASTER DEM formats are supported.

13.5.9 Japanese DEM Format Japanese DEM files can be imported, normally having the extension *.mem. These files are a product of the Japanese Geographic Survey Institute.

These files are represented as having one 32bit floating band with elevation data. The georeferencing of the files is recognized as well as the coordinate system (always latitude/longitude on the Tokyo datum).

13.5.10 JPEG File Format The widely used JPEG JFIF format is supported. JPEG files are represented as one band (grey scale) or three band (RGB) datasets with Byte valued bands.

There is no direct support for georeferencing information or metadata for JPEG files. But if an ESRI world file exists with the *.wld or *.jgw suffices (see Section 13.5.1.1), it will be read and used to establish the geotransform for the image. Overviews can be built for JPEG files as an external *.ovr file.

Note that also tiled TIFF images with JPEG compressed tiles can be imported.


www.actix.com

13.5.11 Atlantis MFF Raster File Format Atlantis Scientific's MFF datasets consist of a header file (typically with the extension *.hdr) and a set of data files with extensions like *.x00, *.b00 and so on. To open a dataset select the *.hdr file.

Reading latitude/longitude GCPs (TOP_LEFT_CORNER, ...) is supported but there is no support for reading affine georeferencing or projection information. Unrecognized keywords from the *.hdr file are ignored.

Diverse data types are supported, including 8, 16, 32 and 64 bit data precisions in integer, real and complex data types. In addition, tile organized files (as produced by the Atlantis SAR Processor - APP) can be imported.

MFF files are not normally portable between systems with different byte orders. However, the keyword BYTE_ORDER can be used which can take a value of LSB (little-endian), and MSB (big-endian). This may be manually added to the *.hdr file if required.

13.5.12 PCI Labeled Raw Format The PCI *.aux labeled raw raster file format of all PCI data types (8U, 16U, 16S, and 32R) is supported. To open a PCI labeled file, select the raw data file itself. The *.aux file (which must have a common base name) will be checked for automatically.

Georeferencing, projections, and other metadata is ignored.

13.5.13 Portable Network Graphics Grey scale, pseudo-colored, paletted, RGB and RGBA PNG files (with extension *.png) are supported as well as precisions of eight and sixteen bits per sample.

ESRI world files with the extensions of *.wld, *.tfw or *.tifw (see Section 13.5.1.1) will be read for georeferencing the PNG file. Single transparency values in grey scale files will be recognized as a nodata value.

13.5.14 USGS DOQ Format The USGS (US Geological Survey) DOQ (Digital Ortho Quad) format is supported, including reading of an affine georeferencing transform, and capture of the projection string. Both the old, unlabeled DOQ format and the new, labeled DOQ format can be handled.

13.5.15 USGS SDTS DEM Format Support for reading USGS SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) formatted DEMs is included. USGS DEMs always have a data type of signed sixteen bit integer. Projection and georeferencing information can also be extracted.

SDTS datasets consist of a number of files. Each DEM should have one file with a name like XXXCATD.DDF. This should be selected to open the dataset.

13.5.16 X11 Pixmap Format XPM (X11 Pixmap Format) image files are color-mapped one band images primarily used for simple graphics purposes in X11 applications.

The XPM interface does not support georeferencing (not available from XPM files) nor does it support XPM files with more than one character per pixel. New XPM files must be color-mapped or grey scale, and color tables will be reduced to about 70 colors automatically.

13.5.17 ERMapper Compress Wavelets Format Reading of JPEG2000 files and ERMapper Compress Wavelets (ECW) is supported.

Coordinate system and georeferencing transformations are read, and some degree of support is included for GeoJP2 (GeoTIFF-in-JPEG2000), ERMapper GML-in-JPEG2000, and the new GML-in-JPEG2000 specification developed at OGC.


www.actix.com

13.6 Supported Vector Data File Formats In addition to raster images, several vector data formats are supported for import. They can either be loaded as image layers, or as simulation/analysis area or street data in the network configuration. The most common of these file formats are briefly introduced in the following Subsections with some remarks on special features and their georeferencing ability.

13.6.1 Shape File Format All varieties of ESRI shape files are supported. Normally, a whole directory of shape files is treated as a dataset, and a single shape file within that directory as a layer. In this case the directory name should be used as the dataset name. However, it is also possible to use one of the files (*.shp, *.shx, or *.dbf) in a shape file set as the dataset name, and then it will be treated as a dataset with one layer.

Note that usually polygons rather than multipolygons are imported, even for polygons with multiple outer rings. The new ESRI measure values are discarded if encountered.

If a *.prj file in old Arc/Info style or new ESRI OGC WKT style is present, it will be read and used to associate a projection with features.

13.6.2 MapInfo File Format MapInfo datasets in native (TAB) format and in interchange (MIF/MID) format are supported. A whole directory of MapInfo files is treated as a dataset, and a single file within that directory as a layer. In this case the directory name should be used as the dataset name. However, it is also possible to use one of the files (*.tab or *.mif) in a MapInfo set as the dataset name, and then it will be treated as a dataset with one single layer.

MapInfo coordinate system information is also supported.

13.6.3 Arc/Info Binary Coverage File Format Arc/Info Binary Coverages (e.g. Arc/Info V7 and earlier) are supported. The label, arc, polygon, centroid, region, and text sections of a coverage are all supported as layers. Attributes from INFO are appended to labels, arcs, polygons, or region where appropriate. If available, the projection information is read and translated. Polygon geometries are collected for polygon and region layers from the composing arcs.

Text sections are represented as point layers. Display height is preserved in the HEIGHT attribute field; however, other information about text orientation is discarded.

Info tables associated with a coverage, but not specifically named to be attached to one of the existing geometric layers is currently not accessible. Note that info tables are stored in an 'info' directory at the same level as the coverage directory. If this is inaccessible or corrupt, no info attributes will be appended to coverage layers, but the geometry should still be accessible.

The layers are named as follows:

• A label layer (polygon labels, or free standing points) is named LAB if present.

• A centroid layer (polygon centroids) is named CNT if present.

• An arc (line) layer is named ARC if present.

• A polygon layer is named PAL if present.

• A text section is named according to the section subclass.

• A region subclass is named according to the subclass name.

The Arc/Info binary coverage interface attempts to optimize spatial queries but due to the lack of a spatial index this is just accomplished by minimizing processing for features not within the spatial window.


www.actix.com

Random (by FID) reads of arcs and polygons is supported. It may not be supported for other feature types.

13.6.4 Planet ASCII Vector Format The ASCII vector format known from the Planet EV RNP tool is supported for reading.

13.6.5 Asset Vector Binary Format The binary VBF vector format known from the Asset RNP tool is supported for reading.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 337

www.actix.com

14 Abbreviations ACP Automatic Cell Planning

A-DPCH Associated Dedicated Physical Channel

AFP Automatic Frequency Planning

AICH Acquisition Indicator Channel

ANP Automatic Neighbor List Planning

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

ARQ Automatic Repeat Request

ASM ATOLL Synchronization Module

BCC Base Station Color Code

BCCH Broadcast Control Channel

BCH Broadcast Channel

BIL Band Interleaved by Line (graphics data format for multi-band images)

BLER Block Error Rate

BS Base Station

BSC Base Station Controller

BSIC Base Station Identification Code

BSS Base Station Subsystem

C/I see CIR

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CC Convolutional Coding

CDF Cumulative Distribution Function

CE Channel Element

CINR Carrier-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio

CIR Carrier-to-Interference Ratio, alternatively C/I

CM Compressed Mode

COM Component Object Model

CPCH Common Packet Channel

CPICH Common Pilot Channel

CQI Channel Quality Indicator

CTCH Common Traffic Channel

CTS Channel Type Switching

DB Database

DCH Dedicated Channel

DEM Digital Elevation Model

DL Downlink

DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel

DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel

DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel


www.actix.com

DSCH Downlink Shared Channel

DTX Discontinuous Transmission

E-AGCH Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel

ECEF Earth Centered, Earth Fixed

E-DCH Enhanced Dedicated Channel

E-HICH Enhanced Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power

EPSG European Petroleum Survey Group

E-RGCH Enhanced Relative Grant Channel

EV-DO Evolution Data Only

FACH Forward Access Channel

FCH Fundamental Channel

FDD Frequency Division Duplexing

F-DPCH Fractional Dedicated Physical Channel

FIFO First In, First Out

FPCH Forward Paging Channel

FPICH Forward Pilot Channel

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GIS Geographical Information System

GSM Global System for Mobile Communications

HARQ Hybrid ARQ

HCS Hierarchical Cell Structure

HHO Hard Handover

HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HS-DPCCH High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel

HS-DSCH High Speed Downlink Shared Channel

HS-PDSCH High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel

HS-SCCH High Speed Shared Control Channel

HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

IAT Interarrival Time

ICNIRP International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection

IE Information Element

IFHO Inter-Frequency Handover

IP Internet Protocol

IR Incremental Redundancy

ISCP Interference Signal Code Power

ISHO Inter-System Handover

KPI Key Performance Indicator

LAN Local Area Network

MAC Medium Access Control

MMS Multimedia Message Service


www.actix.com

NCC Network Color Code

NE Network Element

OGC Open GIS Consortium

OTSR Omni Transmit Sectorial Receive

OVSF Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor

PCCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel

PCPCH Physical Common Packet Channel

PCPICH Primary Common Pilot Channel

PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol

PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PICH Paging Indicator Channel

PM Performance Management

PRACH Physical Random Access Channel

QoS Quality of Service

RAB Radio Access Bearer

RACH Random Access Channel

RBC Radio Bearer Control

RL Radio Link

RLC Radio Link Control

RLF Radio Link Failure

RLS Radio Link Set

RNC Radio Network Controller

RNP Radio Network Planning

RoHC Robust Header Compression

ROI Return on Investment

RPS Radiowave Propagation Simulator

RR Round Robin

RRC Radio Resource Control

RRM Radio Resource Management

RSCP Received Signal Code Power

RSN Random Seed Number

RSSI (Useful) Received Signal Strength Indicator

Rx Receiver

SCCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel

SCH Synchronization Channel or Supplemental Channel

SDU Service Data Unit

SF Spreading Factor

SHO Soft Handover

SIR Signal-to-Interference Ratio (see CIR)

SJF Shortest Job First

SMS Short Message Service


www.actix.com

STTD Space-Time Transmit Diversity

TB Transport Block

TBS Transport Block Set

TC Turbo Coding

TCH Traffic Channel

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TDD Time Division Duplex

TGP Transmission Gap Pattern

TPC Transmit Power Control

TrCH Transport Channel

TTI Transmission Time Interval

Tx Transmitter

UARFCN UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

UE User Equipment

UL Uplink

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

UTRA UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access

UTRAN UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network

VBR Variable Bit Rate

WiNeS Wireless Network System Simulator

WKT Well-Known Text (Format)

WWW World Wide Web

341

15 References [Fisc99] J. Fischer, J. Deissner, G. Fettweis, D. Hunold, J. Voigt, R. Lehnert,

M. Schweigel, and J. Wagner, “Object Oriented Modeling of a Generic Radio System for Dynamic System Simulation,” Proceedings of the Symposium on Performance Evaluation of Computer and Telecommunication Systems (SPECTS’99), pp. 240-247, Chicago, IL, USA, July, 1999.

[Samp97] A. Sampath, P. S. Kumar, and J. M. Holtzman, “On Setting Reverse Link Target SIR in a CDMA System,” Proceedings of the IEEE 47th Vehicular Technology Conference (VTC’97), Vol. 2, pp. 929-933, Phoenix, AZ, USA, May 4-7, 1997.

[23.107] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; QoS Concept and Architecture (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 23.107, version 6.4.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, March 2006.

[25.101] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; UE Radio Transmission and Reception (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.101, version 6.9.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, September 2005.

[25.214] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Physical Layer Procedures (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.214, version 6.10.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, September 2006.

[25.215] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Physical Layer - Measurements (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.215, version 6.4.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, September 2005.

[25.304] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; UE Procedures in Idle Mode and Procedures for Cell Reselection in Connected Mode (Release 5) – 3GPP TS 25.304, version 5.1.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, June 2002.

[25.306] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; UE Radio Access Capabilities Definition (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.306, version 6.8.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, March 2006.

[25.322] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol Specification (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.322, version 6.9.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, September 2006.

Actix Radioplan User Guide References 342

www.actix.com

[25.331] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol Specification (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.331, version 6.12.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, December 2006.

[25.401] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; UTRAN Overall Description (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.401, version 6.7.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, September 2005.

[25.433] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; UTRAN Iub Interface NBAP Signalling (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.433, version 6.12.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, December 2006.

[25.922] 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio Resource Management Strategies (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.922, version 6.3.0. 3GPP, Sophia Antipolis, France, March 2006.

[Holm04] H. Holma, A. Toskala (Editors), WCDMA for UMTS. Radio Access For Third Generation Mobile Communications. 3nd edition, Wiley, 2004.

[Laih02] J. Laiho, A. Wacker, and T. Novosad (Ed.), Radio Network Planning and Optimisation for UMTS. Wiley, 2002.

[R-Sim] Radioplan Documentation. WiNeS Simulation Guide. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-TecRef] Radioplan Documentation. Technical Reference of the WiNeS Dynamic Network Simulator. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-Snapshot] Radioplan Documentation. Technical Reference of the WiNeS Snapshot Simulator. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-API] Radioplan Documentation. RRM API and Library of the WiNeS Dynamic Network Simulator. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-Meas] Radioplan Documentation. Measurement Guide. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-ACP] Radioplan Documentation. Automatic Cell Planning User Guide. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-ANP] Radioplan Documentation. Neighbor List Planning Guide. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[R-ASM] Radioplan Documentation. Data Synchronization Guide for ATOLL. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.


www.actix.com

[R-Admin] Radioplan Documentation. Administration Guide. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 2008.

[miniAFP] Cellopt Documentation. Cellopt miniAFP Module in Actix Radioplan. Actix Ltd., London, UK, 2008.

[30.03] ETSI Document TR 101 112 V3.2.0 (UMTS 30.03): Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS); Selection procedures for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS, Sophia Antipolis, France, April 1998.

[ATL-UM] ATOLL Documentation. User Manual. Forsk, Blagnac, France, 2008.

[ATL-TR] ATOLL Documentation. Technical Reference Guide. Forsk, Blagnac, France, 2008.

[RPS] Radiowave Propagation Simulator. Actix GmbH, Dresden, Germany, 1997-2008.


www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 345

www.actix.com

16 Index

A activation code ......................................23 Actix products

ActixOne.................................................. 99, 249 Analyzer ..........................................................99 Cellopt AFP ................................................17, 90 Radioplan ........................................................13 Viewpoint ........................................................99

ActixOne .......................................99, 249 additional antenna ...............................149 analysis..............................................249

concept of ~ ..................................................250 embedded clipboard .......................................289 parameter filtering..........................................256 results selection dialog....................................255 statistical ~......................271, 272, 274, 282, 290

analysis area.......................................110 antenna..... 30, 31, 129, 140, 147, 151, 160,

162 downtilt .............................31, 140, 147, 151, 160

Area Analyzer.....See W-CDMA Area Analyzer area management................................107 ARQ...................................................181 ATOLL

compatible traffic models ................................190 result import ..................................................293

ATOLL Synchronization Module export/synchronization .....................................98 import/update..................................................87

Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) .................16

B background image ... 40, 112, 122, 128, 158,

196 best server ....................................35, 252 BSC ..................237, See network controller

C Capital Planning...................... 83, 101, 201 cell .............................................129, 137

CDMA2000 ~.................................................233 GSM ~ ..........................................................237 iDEN ~ ..........................................................241 UMTS ~.........................................................221 WiMAX ~.......................................................245

cell statistics .......................................272 cell visual .............................. 41, 259, 292 channel element ..................................219 chart graph..................................260, 277 clutter................................................114

clutter classes ........................................ 114, 115 clutter matrix .................................................115 clutter statistics..............................................274 creation from vector layers..............................122 raster file export.............................................119 raster file import.............................................119

clutter statistics ...................................274 coinciding layers ..................................267

scatter statistics.............................................271 XY scatter graph ............................................270

configuration area management..........................................107 CDMA2000 ....................................................233 directory structure..........................................317 environment..................................................114 file format .....................................................317 GSM .............................................................237 iDEN .............................................................241 library ...........................................................328 project setup .................................................106 RAN..............................................................129 user behavior.................................................165 UTRAN ..........................................................205 WiMAX..........................................................245

coordinate system..................................28 projection........................................................29

D data management

binary file system...........................................250 configuration .................................................105 database ................................................. 86, 249 results....................................................100, 249

DEM...................................................124 raster file export ............................................125 raster file import ............................................124

diagram.......................................260, 277 dongle........................See hardware dongle

E editing functions

copy/fill .............................44, 135, 142, 164, 169 embedded clipboard .............................289 environment

clutter ...........................................................114 DEM..............................................................124 street category ............................... 126, 127, 128 streets ...................................................126, 172

equipment profile.................. 169, 170, 171 examples............................................329

demo project ........................................... 67, 329 export

Actix Cellopt AFP plan.......................................99 Actix CellRefs...................................................99 configuration item............................................99 interference matrix.........................................313 layer ...............................................................47 project ............................................................98 RNP project update ..........................................98 settings overview table to file ...................135, 143 tuned pathloss matrices..................................159 workspace.......................................................49


www.actix.com

F fast fading ..........................................117 file format

configuration ~ ..............................................317 raster data ~ .................................................332 vector data ~.................................................335

filtering during simulation............................................170 parameter ~ ..................................................256

G graphics painting mode...........................61

drawing preferences .........................................62 graphics layers.................................................61 line .................................................................63 polygon ...........................................................63 text.................................................................63

H Handover

Hard ~ ..........................................................205 Inter-Frequency ~..........................................205 Inter-System ~..............................................205 Soft ~ ................................................... 205, 221 Softer ~ ................................................ 205, 221

hardware dongle.............................. 21, 22 activation code.................................................23 transaction key ................................................23

histogram.............................262, 271, 281 threshold evaluation methods..........................284

I import

~ of image layers .............................................40 ~ project from Radioplan database ....................88 external result data ........................................293 from file to settings overview table........... 135, 143 layer ...............................................................47 OSS network configuration................................88 project ............................................................87 raster file ~....................................................332 result data .....................................................100 traffic matrix from measured traffic.......... 198, 307 tuned pathloss matrices ..................................159 vector file ~...................................................335 workspace .......................................................48

installation ~ folder...........................................................21 configuration folder...........................................22 user folder .......................................................48

interference matrix ..............................310 export ...........................................................313 generation .....................................................312 result set .......................................................312

K KPI analysis ........................................297

~ for CDMA2000 ............................................300 ~ for GSM......................................................301 ~ for UMTS....................................................297

L layer concept ........................................32

cell visuals.......................................................41 coinciding layers ....................See coinciding layers color settings ...................................................57 graphics layers........................................... 41, 61 image layers....................................................40 layer functions .................................................42 layer overview dialog........................................43 layer templates.......................................... 49, 57 legend presets .................................................61 locked layers ...................................................45 manipulating layers...........See manipulating layers post-processing layers......................................41 result layers...................................................264 settings...........................................................54 slide show .....................................................275

layer functions.......................................42 layer slide show...................................275 library .......................................... 87, 328 license..................................................22

~ file...............................................................24 ~ file transfer ..................................................25 ~ registration ..................................................25 ~ update................................................... 23, 25 activation code.................................................23 floating ~ ........................................................23 hardware dongle ...................See hardware dongle transaction key ................................................23

M manipulating layers..............................266 mapped surface plot....... 198, 252, 259, 292 Measurement Module..............................14 mobility profile .............................172, 173

N neighbor lists ......................................153 network configuration........See configuration network controller.........................129, 130 Network Controller ...............................241 network layer ........................................83

cell ........................................................137, 138 copy parameters from other network layer(s).....85 duplicating network layers ................................85

network layer management .....................83 network optimization ..............................16

~ based on ROI .............................................201 network performance counters...............314 network planning ...................................15 Node B ...............................................217 noise figure.........................................170

O orthogonality factor

intracell inter-scrambling code ~ .....................116 intra-scrambling code ~...........................116, 118

OSS network configuration ......................88

P pathloss matrix

high/low-res ~...............................................155 raster file import ............................................154


www.actix.com

performance counters...............See network performance counters

physical channel AICH ..................................................... 221, 222 FPICH.................................................... 233, 236 PCCPCH................................................. 221, 222 PCPICH...........................................221, 222, 232 PRACH...........................................................221 SCCPCH ................................................ 221, 222

physical layer ......................................180 pilot Ec/I0............................................170 position update interval ........................ 172 Power Balancing ...........................205, 208 Power Control ..............................206, 223

- inner loop............................................ 169, 221 - open loop ....................................................221 - outer loop............................................ 169, 221

project ~ statistics.......................................................96 ~ update .........................................................94 comparison......................................................96 configuration..................................................105 duplicating projects ..........................................90 handling ..........................................................81 maintenance wizard..........................................91 master ~.......................................................101 merging projects ..............................................93 multi-layer ~ ........................................... 83, 105 network layer management........ See network layer

management sub ~............................................................101

R Radio Access Bearer .............................179 radio propagation

(fast) fading........................................... 115, 117 pathloss equation ...........................................329 pathloss matrix ...................................... 154, 156 shadowing .....................................................115

Radio Resource Management ...129, 169, 205 Admission Control .................................. 205, 223 Channel Type Switching ..................................207 Compressed Mode.................................. 205, 207 Congestion Control ..........................205, 212, 223 Radio Bearer Translation .................................205 Radio Link Monitoring ............................. 205, 208 vendor specific ...............................................207

Radioplan .............................................13 ACP.................................................................16

Radiowave Propagation Simulator .......... 343 repeater ......................................130, 145

cascaded ~....................................................146 CDMA2000 ~.................................................235 GSM ~ ..........................................................239 iDEN ~ ..........................................................243 UMTS ~.........................................................231 WiMAX ~.......................................................246

result set ............................................251 functions .......................................................254 parameter ............................................. 252, 254

result set aggregation...........................314 revenue matrix....................................201

creation from traffic matrix..............................202 raster file import.............................................201

RNC ...........205, 207, See network controller

S scatter statistics ..................................271 service arrival process ...................174, 192 service portion..............................166, 168 service profile....................... 174, 178, 181 simulation.............................................15

filtering .........................................................170 simulation area....................................109 site .............................................129, 131

CDMA2000 ~.................................................233 GSM ~ ..........................................................237 iDEN ~..........................................................241 UMTS ~ ........................................................217 WiMAX ~.......................................................245

spreading factor...................................180 statistical analysis .........................282, 290 surface plot..................................258, 263

mapped ~ .......................See mapped surface plot system level..........................................16

T table ..................................................287

store in project ..............................................289 template.............................. 160, 166, 167 threshold evaluation methods ................284 traffic matrix .......................................192

creation from layer.........................................196 raster file export ............................................194 raster file import ............................................193

traffic matrix generation .......................306 traffic type.....................................................307

traffic model.................. 174, 176, 178, 179 ATOLL compatible ~.......................................190 traffic matrix............................. 76, 165, 192, 193

transaction key......................................23 Transport Channel

BCH..............................................................221 DCH..............................................................221 FACH ............................................................221 HSDPA..........................................................221 HSUPA ..........................................................221 RACH............................................................221

U UE

activation ......................................................192 UE profile.....................................165, 167 user behavior ......................................165 user rights management ................... 86, 91

owner .......................................... 86, 87, 90, 107 UTRA/FDD ............................................15

W watermark ............................................54 W-CDMA Area Analyzer...........................15 workspace ............................................47

color palette ....................................................57 display settings................................................52 layer settings...................................................54 legend presets .................................................61


www.actix.com

watermark.......................................................54 Z zoom functions ......................................65


www.actix.com


www.actix.com